Lexicon Stereo Receiver RV 8 User Manual

RV-8 Receiver

User Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” “Surround EX,” and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. U.S. Pat. No’s 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;

6,226,616; 6,487,535 and other U.S. and world-wide patents issued and pending. DTS, DTS-ES, Neo:6, and DTS 96/24 are

Lexicon Inc.

3 Oak Park

Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA

Manufactured under license from THX Ltd. U.S. patent numbers 5,043,970; 5,189,703 and/or 5,222,059. European patent number

0323830. Other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Ultra2 and THX are trademarks or registered trademarks of THX Ltd. Surround EX

is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used under authorization.

Tel

Fax

781-280-0300

781-280-0490

SACD is a trademark of Sony Electronics, Inc.

SHARC is a Trademark of Analog Devices, Inc.

Hammerhead is a trademark of Analog Devices, Inc.

www.harmanspecialtygroup.com

Customer Service

Telephone:

Sales Fax:

781-280-0300

781-280-0495

781-280-0499

Lexicon, Logic 7 and the L7 logo are registered trademarks of Harman International Industries, Inc. U.S. Patent Nos. D454,553;

D454,860; 5,796,844; 5,870,480 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. Lexicon LIVE is a trademark of Harman Interna-

tional Industries, Inc.

Service Fax:

This document should not be construed as a commitment on the part of Harman Specialty Group. The information it contains is

subject to change without notice. Harman Specialty Group assumes no responsibility for errors that may appear within this

document.

Part No. 070-15838 | Rev 1 | 01/06

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

Lexicon

DOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONS

This document contains general safety, installation and operation instructions for the RV-8 Receiver. It is important to read this user guide before

attempting to use the product. Pay particular attention to safety instructions.

The following symbols are used in the document:

Appears on the component to indicate the pres-

DVD1

NAME

EDIT INPUT NAME

SETUP

INPUTS

ence of uninsulated, dangerous voltage inside

the enclosure – voltage that may be sufficient to

constitute a risk of shock.

Represents a menu path. The menu items in gray boxes must be

selected with the remote control Menu ꢀ arrow to access the

menu or menu item in the black box. For example, the SETUP,

INPUTS, and DVD1 menu items must be selected to open the

DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu.

Appears on the component to indicate impor-

tant operating and maintenance instructions in

the accompanying literature.

The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is used here as an example and will

continue to be used as an example throughout this document.

Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu may be substi-

tuted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a

menu path, any other input may be substituted.

Calls attention to a procedure, practice, condi-

tion or the like that, if not correctly performed

or adhered to, could result in injury or death.

WARNING

Calls attention to a procedure, practice, condi-

tion or the like that, if not correctly performed

or adhered to, could result in damage or

destruction to part or all of the product.

CAUTION!

Note:

Calls attention to information that is essential to

highlight.

Th is d ocum en t uses t h e t erm DTS(-ES) t o in d icat e t h at DTS-ES en cod in g m ay or m ay n ot b e p resen t in t h e in p ut source.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Introduction

T a b l e o f C o n t en t s

Documentation Conventions........................................................ ii

Command Matrix ............................................................... 2-18

Understanding the Zones........................................................ 2-28

Two-Line Status....................................................................... 2-28

STATUS Menus........................................................................ 2-29

STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions ................................ 2-34

STATUS Menu Level Meters..................................................... 2-35

Getting Started

About the RV-8.......................................................................... 1-2

Highlights ............................................................................. 1-4

Product Registration .................................................................. 1-5

Installation Considerations......................................................... 1-5

Remote Control Battery Installation ........................................... 1-6

Setup

Setup ........................................................................................ 3-2

Input Setup ............................................................................... 3-4

Changing Input Names ......................................................... 3-5

Assigning Audio and Video Input Connectors ........................ 3-7

Selecting Preferred Listening Modes .................................... 3-12

Configuring Advanced Input Settings .................................. 3-17

INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings ....................................... 3-19

ZONE2 in Parameter Settings .............................................. 3-22

Speaker Setup ......................................................................... 3-25

Setting Crossover Points ...................................................... 3-25

Speaker Setup Parameters ................................................... 3-29

Automatic Calibration ......................................................... 3-36

Manual Calibration ............................................................. 3-53

I/O Config............................................................................... 3-60

Display Setup .......................................................................... 3-63

On-Screen Display Setup ..................................................... 3-64

Front-panel Display Setup ................................................... 3-66

Volume Control Setup ............................................................. 3-68

Trigger Setup .......................................................................... 3-70

Tuner Setup ............................................................................ 3-72

Tuner Region Band Limit And Increments ........................... 3-73

Lock Options........................................................................... 3-79

LIVE! CALIBRATION ................................................................. 3-80

Basic Operation

Front-Panel Overview ................................................................ 2-2

Rear-Panel Overview.................................................................. 2-6

Tuner Overview....................................................................... 2-10

Selecting a Station .............................................................. 2-10

Direct Station Access ........................................................... 2-10

Tune/Seek Access ................................................................ 2-10

Scan Mode .......................................................................... 2-11

Loading Presets ................................................................... 2-11

Saving Presets ..................................................................... 2-11

Naming Presets ................................................................... 2-11

Editing Presets ..................................................................... 2-12

Autoload ............................................................................. 2-12

Amplifier Overview .................................................................. 2-13

Amplifier Channel Status ..................................................... 2-13

Making Connections With the Amplifier Output .................. 2-13

Headphone Overview.............................................................. 2-14

Remote Control Overview ....................................................... 2-14

Operation Considerations .................................................... 2-14

MAIN Menu ........................................................................ 2-15

Menu Navigation ................................................................ 2-15

Menu Item Selection ........................................................... 2-15

Remote Control Buttons ...................................................... 2-17

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

Lexicon

Restoring Factory-Default Settings .............................................7-4

Audio Controls

Audio Controls ..........................................................................4-2

Appendix A

Specifications ............................................................................A-2

Declaration of Conformity .........................................................A-4

Tuner Presets

Tuner Presets.............................................................................5-2

Appendix B

Mode Adjust

Menu Tree.................................................................................B-2

Mode Adjust..............................................................................6-2

Listening Mode Activation .........................................................6-2

Preferred Listening Mode Selection ........................................ 6-3

MODE ꢁand ꢂBUTTONS ................................................... 6-3

Listening MODE SELECTION BUTTONS ................................. 6-3

Listening Mode Descriptions......................................................6-4

Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions ......6-39

Mode – Parameter Relationships..............................................6-47

Appendix C

Remote Control Programming.................................................. C-2

Device Activation ...................................................................C-2

Macro Operations .................................................................C-3

Remote Programming Overview ............................................C-4

Programming Macro Buttons ..............................................C-10

Three-digit Preprogrammed Codes......................................... C-18

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Troubleshooting ........................................................................7-2

Routine Maintenance.................................................................7-4

Appendix D

Installation Worksheet .............................................................. D-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

About the RV-8........................................................................... 1-2

Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Product Registration ................................................................... 1-5

Installation Considerations.......................................................... 1-5

Remote Control Battery Installation ............................................ 1-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

Lexicon

ABOUT THE RV-8

Thank you for purchasing the RV-8 Receiver, an 8-channel audio

and video control center with independent zone monitoring that

provides control of audio and video source selection in three zones

at the same time. The RV-8 includes eight configurable inputs, each

of which can be assigned to its built-in tuner, eight digital audio,

eight analog audio, phono, five composite video, five S-Video or

three component video input connectors. The analog connectors

can be configured for up to two 5.1-channel sources.

d ecod ing is wid ely reg ard ed as the fin est availab le. A Log ic

7-encoded downmix of multichannel source material is available

when using the Headphone listening mode. If a stereo source is

present, the HEADPHONE L7 listening mode processes it using

LOGIC7, then uses Head Related Transfer Functions to create a

headphone output that introduces a subtle sense of surround

sound, while preserving the original stereo image.

In addition to Logic 7, the RV-8 offers Dolby Digital Surround EX,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Pro Logic, DTS 96/ 24, DTS neo:6,

DTS-ES, THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding. THX Ultra2

certification guarantees that the RV-8 m eets the highest THX^®

specifications.

The RV-8 features an integrated 7-channel power amplifier that is

d esig ned to achieve hig h levels of p ower and p erform ance.

Equipped with a toroidal power transform er, the am plifier also

provides thermal and DC protection.

The RV-8 AM/FM stereo radio tuner features four tuning regions,

allows for the autom atic or m anual storing of up to 40 preset

stations, can receive elem ents of the Radio Data System (RDS)

broadcasts, and is fully configurable for ease of operation. The RV-8

also includes a phono input.

Th e RV-8 a lso o ffe rs LIVE! (Le xico n In t e llig e n t Va ria b le

Environment), designed to transform the way your listening room

sounds with the live sound that is created within the room by the

occupants of the room. LIVE! does not (nor is it meant to) work with

prerecorded material. LIVE! provides a realistic illusion of a larger,

more reverberant listening space–ideal for musicians wishing to

practice or perform with the sound of a larger venue.

Inside and out, the RV-8 is designed for possible future develop-

ments. The rear panel houses one RS-232 connector capable of

performing configuration downloads and flash memory software

upgrades, and another capable of supporting future developments.

The rear panel also includes one removable access panel to accom-

modate connectors for emerging technologies.

LIVE! is a unique, sophisticated reverberation system that uses a

combination of microphones and digital signal processing (DSP) to

enhance a room’s acoustics and create the illusion of a much larger

space. When you engage in normal conversation, it seems as if you

are in a large room. When you practice or perform with a musical

instrument, it seems as if you are in a concert hall. Choose from one

of three customizable presets to create an ambience to liven up a

party or amaze your friends.

More than just an audio and video control center, the RV-8 features

th e latest version of Lexicon ’s critically acclaim ed Log ic 7^®

decoding, which creates 7.1-channel output from stereo, and

5.1-and 6.1-channel sources. Unlike other decoders, Logic 7 is

compatible with all input sources and requires no special encoding.

Because the improvement it provides is clearly audible, Logic 7

With two floating-point Hammerhead™ digital signal processing

(DSP) engines, the RV-8 boasts enormous processing power. These

1-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Getting Started

powerful processors perform custom Lexicon processing such as

Logic 7 decoding, bass enhancement, dialogue enhancement, auto

azim uth, five-speaker enhancem ent, bass m anagem ent, high-

precision digital crossovers and audio controls. These features are

available at sample rates of up to 96kHz, with 24-bit resolution to

retain top performance from all sources. In addition, a third DSP

engine is dedicated to decoding multichannel compressed audio

sources.

level imbalances in stereo sources, ensuring exceptionally accurate

p layback of surround-encoded sources. A digital audio p ass-

through output is available for recording digital signals with a CD

recorder or a similar component.

Complementing its audio performance, the RV-8 features broadcast-

quality video switchers. An ultrawide-bandwidth component video

switcher accepts analog component or RGB video signals, while a

composite and S-Video switcher accepts high-quality NTSC, PAL or

SECAM video signals. Com posite and S-Video sources can be

converted to 480i NTSC (576i PAL) component video. The component

video switcher can pass high-definition TV (HDTV) signals and

standard-definition (SD) TV signals. Both switchers are designed to

pass video signals without alteration or degradation.

The RV-8 is one of the m ost advanced audio and video control

centers available. High-precision 24-bit/96kHz A/D converters can

be used to convert stereo analog audio input signals to digital

signals, allowing the RV-8 to provide the benefits of precise digital

signal processing without sacrificing signal integrity. 24-bit/192kHZ

D/A converters are available for all output channels. Alternatively,

5.1-channel and stereo analog signals can bypass A/D conversion

and internal processing, following a pure signal path directly to the

output connectors.

Built to professional standards, the RV-8 is designed to serve as the

control center in any high-quality home theater. Even the most

demanding enthusiast will be impressed with its unique combination

of power, performance, flexibility and technological sophistication.

With extensive expansion capabilities, the RV-8 represents a solid

investment that will retain its value in the face of rapidly emerging

technologies.

Digital audio input signals are processed through a two-stage phase

lock loop for extrem ely low intrinsic jitter and high rejection.

Lexicon’s proprietary auto azimuth technology corrects timing and

1-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

Lexicon

HIGHLIGHTS

•

Eight channels

•

Four S/PDIF coaxial and four S/PDIF

optical (Toslink) digital audio input

connectors

•

LIVE! (Lexicon Intelligent Variable

Environment)

Eight configurable inputs

Three independent zones

Dolby Digital Surround EX, Dolby Pro

Logic IIx, and Dolby Pro Logic decoding

One S/PDIF coaxial and one S/PDIF

optical (Toslink) digital audio output

connectors

Integrated 7-channel amplifier with

thermal and DC protection and toroidal

power transformer

DTS 96/24, DTS NEO:6, and DTS-ES

(discrete and matrix) decoding

•

24-Bit/192kHz D/A converters for all

audio channels

THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX

decoding

•

Compatible with 2Ω speaker

impedances

Two sets of analog A/V Zone 2 outputs;

one fixed, one variable

•

THX Ultra2 certification

•

AM/FM stereo radio tuner

RDS

RS-232 control

One set of analog Zone 3 outputs,

variable level

Two trigger output connectors

Rear-panel IR input connector

Two microphone input connectors

Two internal expansion slots

Removable access panel

Phono input with 2-channel analog

bypass path

•

Broadcast-quality video switching

Video up conversion from S-video/

composite to component video

•

Up to two 5.1-channel analog audio input

connectors

•

Automatic and manual calibration of

speaker distances and output levels

Analog bypass option for 5.1 analog

stereo audio input connectors

Flash memory software upgrade

capabilities

Three component video input

connectors with full HDTV compatibility

Auto switching between digital and

analog audio input connectors

•

Optional 19-inch rack-mount kit

•

Five composite video input connectors

Five S-Video input connectors

One component video output

Logic 7 decoding

Headphone output with LOGIC7

processing

IR preprogrammed/learning remote

control with LCD display

Two 32-bit DSP engines for custom

processing

•

Maximum volume level

Separate DSP engine for decoding

compressed audio sources

Two 32-bit DSP engines

1-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Getting Started

PRODUCT REGISTRATION

Please register the RV-8 Receiver within 15 days of purchase.

product registration card attached to the back cover of this user

guide. Retain the sales receipt as proof of warranty coverage.

DO NOT place the RV-8 on a windowsill or any location exposed to

direct sunlight.

DO NOT obstruct the front-panel IR receiver window. The remote

control m ust be in line of sight with the IR receiver for proper

operation.

INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

DO NOT install the RV-8 on a surface that is unstable or unable to

support all four feet.

The RV-8 requires special care during installation to ensure optimal

performance. Pay particular attention to instructions below and to

other precautions that appear throughout this user guide.

CAUTION!

DO install the RV-8 on a solid, flat, level surface such as a table or

sh elf. Th e RV-8 can also b e in stalled in a stan d ard 19-in ch

equipment rack using an optional rack-mount kit available from an

authorized Lexicon dealer.

Before m ovin g t h e RV-8, p ow er t h e un it off usin g t h e rear-

p a n el p ow er sw it ch a n d u n p lu g t h e p ow er cord from t h e

w all out let .

DO select a dry, well-ventilated location out of direct sunlight.

DO NOT expose the RV-8 to high temperatures, humidity, steam,

smoke, dampness or excessive dust. Avoid installing the RV-8 near

rad iat o rs o r st ackin g t h e RV-8 o ver o t h er h eat -p ro d u cin g

equipment such as a power amplifier.

DO NOT install the RV-8 near unshielded TV or FM antennas, cable

TV d ecod ers, or other RF-em itting d evices that m ig ht cause

interference.

DO NOT place the RV-8 on a thick rug or carpet, or cover the RV-8

with a cloth, as this might prevent proper cooling.

1-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

Lexicon

REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY INSTALLATION

The remote control requires four AAA batteries. The batteries should be replaced as needed. Alkaline batteries, which last longer without

leaking, are recommended. When battery power is low, the remote control enters a low-voltage condition, preventing it from operating the

RV-8. When this occurs, replace the batteries. Normal operation will resume when new batteries are installed.

To replace the remote control batteries:

1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote control. Press the tab (1) and lift the cover (2) away from the remote control.

2. Remove old batteries (if applicable).

3. Observing the proper polarity, insert four AAA batteries (3).

4. Align the cover over the battery compartment and gently press down until it snaps back into place (4).

5. Dispose of the old batteries (if applicable).

1-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Front-Panel Overview ................................................................. 2-2

Rear-Panel Overview ................................................................... 2-6

Tuner Overview ........................................................................ 2-10

Selecting a Station ...................................................................................2-10

Direct Station Access ...............................................................................2-10

Tune/Seek Access ....................................................................................2-10

Scan Mode ..............................................................................................2-11

Loading Presets .......................................................................................2-11

Saving Presets..........................................................................................2-11

Editing Presets .........................................................................................2-12

Autoload .................................................................................................2-12

Amplifier Overview ................................................................... 2-12

Amplifier Channel Status .........................................................................2-13

Making Connections With the Amplifier Output ......................................2-13

Headphone Overview ............................................................... 2-13

Remote Control Overview......................................................... 2-14

Operation Considerations........................................................................2-14

MAIN Menu ............................................................................................2-14

Menu Navigation ....................................................................................2-14

Menu Item Selection ...............................................................................2-15

Remote Control Buttons ..........................................................................2-17

Command Matrix....................................................................................2-18

Understanding the Zones ......................................................... 2-28

Two-Line Status ........................................................................ 2-28

STATUS Menus ......................................................................... 2-29

STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions.....................................................2-34

STATUS Menu Level Meters ...................................................... 2-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

FRONT-PANEL OVERVIEW

The RV-8 is shown below. The numbers in the front-panel illustrations correspond with the numbered items in the text.

2-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

1 FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY

3 VOLUME KNOB

Use the front-panel display to view the current input, listening

mode, input source and volume level. If the built-in tuner is active,

the display will show the frequency, band, listening m ode and

volume level. The 2 x 20 character display also functions as a display

for messages and menus, one line at a time.

Use the volume knob to adjust volume level in all Zones.

To adjust the Main Zone volume level:

Rotate the volume knob clockwise to increase

VOLUME

-34db

or counterclockwise to decrease volume level

in 1dB increm ents. A horizontal bar graph

indicating the current Main Zone volume level is displayed in the

on-screen and front-panel displays. The Main Zone volume range is

–80 to +12dB.

Note:

Power is still supplied to the RV-8 when standby mode is activated.

2 IR RECEIVER

To adjust the Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume level:

The IR receiver receives infrared commands from the RV-8 remote

control. There are three associated LEDs.

1. Press and hold the front-panel Zone 2 or Zone 3 input selection

button that corresponds with the current input source. For

instance, if the current input source is using the DVD1 input, press

and hold the DVD1 input selection button in the desired zone.

•

The amber LED blinks when a remote control command is

received.

2. While holding the desired zone input

ZONE 2 VOLUME -34db

•

The red LED lights when the A/D converters are overloading.

selection button, rotate the volume knob

clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to

decrease volume level in 1dB increments.

The blue LED lights when the RV-8 is powered on and activated

– even if the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is

set to ALWAYS OFF.

ZONE 3 VOLUME -34db

Th e corresp on d in g h orizon tal g rap h

appears in the on-screen and front-panel

displays, and indicates the position at which the current Zone 2 or

Zone 3 volume level falls within the –80 to +12dB volume range.

Red LED

Blue LED

Amber LED

3. Release the selected Zone 2 input selection button when Zone 2

or Zone 3 volume level has been set.

Note:

When RV-8 output levels have been properly calibrated, the +0dB volume

level setting corresponds to THX reference levels (75dB).

2-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

FRONT-PANEL OVERVIEW (continued)

4 MAIN ZONE INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS

p resets. S e e “T u ner Overview” on p ag e 2-10 for ad d ition al

information.

Selects the corresponding input in the Main Zone. When an input is

selected, a blue LED lights on the corresponding input selection

button. When the Main Zone is deactivated, pressing a Main Zone

input selection button activates the corresponding input in the

Main Zone. Zone 2 and Zone 3 remain deactivated until a Zone 2

or Zone 3 input is selected.

8 STANDBY BUTTON

Toggles the RV-8 between on and standby. When the RV-8 is

powered on, pressing this button places the RV-8 into standby and

lights the red LED on the button. Power is supplied to the RV-8

when in standby. When the RV-8 is in standby, pressing the button

turns the unit on and activates all zones that were active in the

previous operating session.

5 ZONE 2 INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS

Selects the corresponding input in Zone 2. When an input is

selected, an amber LED lights on the corresponding input selection

button. When Zone 2 is deactivated, pressing a Zone 2 input

selection button activates the corresponding input in Zone 2. The

Main Zone and Zone 3 remain deactivated until a Main Zone or

Zone 3 input is selected.

In the event of a power outage, the RV-8 will display a BROWN

OUT!! PRESS STANDBY m essage. To turn the unit on, use the

STAN DBY b u t t o n . Fo r m o re in fo rm a t io n , se e “ PO WER

MANAGEMENT” on p age 3-3.

9 CHANNEL STATUS LEDs

6 ZONE 3 INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS

Each amplifier channel has a blue LED on the front panel that is

illuminated when the unit is powered on. If there is a problem with

an am plifier channel, the corresponding LED will turn off. See

“A m p l ifi e r Overview” on page 2-13 for additional information.

Selects the corresponding input in Zone 3. When an input is

selected, a red LED lights on the corresponding input selection

button. When Zone 3 is deactivated, pressing a Zone 3 input

selection button activates the corresponding input in Zone 3. The

Main Zone and Zone 2 remain deactivated until a Main Zone or

Zone 2 input is selected.

10 MODE ꢃ an d ꢀ BUTTONS

Use the Mode buttons to scroll to the previous (ꢃ) or next (ꢀ)

available listening mode. Scrolling occurs in the order shown in the

MODE ADJUST menu. Refer to “L is t en i n g Mode A c t i vation” on

page 6-2 f o r more i n f o rmat i o n.

7 TUNER SELECTION BUTTONS

Tuner selection buttons allow for direct entry of station frequencies,

selection of AM or FM broadcast bands and the saving/recalling of

2-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

11 MUTE BUTTON

14 ZONE 3 OFF BUTTON

Mutes or restores the RV-8 Main Zone volume to its original level. Press

the Mut e button to mute volume level; “MUTE ON” appears in the

on-screen and front-panel displays. Press the Mut e button again to

restore the volume to its original level. The VOLUME CONTROL SETUP

and MUTE LEVEL parameter can be used to set mute levels.

Deactivates Zone 3.

15 TUNE/ SEEK BUTTONS

Allow for manual or automatic tuning of the AM/FM stereo radio

tuner.

Mute may be activated automatically or manually. For example, the

RV-8 b riefly activates m ute when chang ing inp ut sources or

listening m odes. The am ber Mute button LED lights whenever

mute is activated.

16 HEADPHONE OUTPUT

Features multiple listening modes including LOGIC7 headphone

processing. The headphone output follows the signal selected in

t h e Main Zo n e . Wh e n h e a d p h o n e s a re p lu g g e d in t o t h e

headphone output, all Main Zone amplifier outputs are muted. If

amplifier outputs 3 and 7 are assigned to Zone 2 or Zone 3, they

remain unm uted. The Main Zone preamplifier outputs are also

muted when headphones are plugged in. Preamplifier outputs for

Zone 2 and Zone3 rema i n u nmuted. S e e “Headphone Overv i e w”

on page 2-14 f o r add i t i o nal headphone information. Headphone

listening mode information starts on page 6-34.

12 MAIN ZONE OFF BUTTON

Deactivates the Main Zone.

13 ZONE 2 OFF BUTTON

Deactivates Zone 2.

2-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

REAR-PANEL OVERVIEW

The RV-8 is shown below. The numbers in the rear-panel illustrations correspond with the numbered items in the text.

11 12 13 14

CAUTION! Never m ake or b reak con n ect ion s t o t h e RV-8 un less t h e RV-8 an d all associat ed com p on en t s are p ow ered off.

2-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

present in the Main Zone, only the Front (L) and (R) input signals are

sent to the Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio output connectors. If the

ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DMIX, a downmix of the 5.1 analog

source is sent to the Zone 2 audio output connectors. See “ZON E 2 in

Para m eter S e tt i n gs” on page 3-22 f o r add i tional information.

1 AMPLIFIER OUTPUTS

Provide audio outputs to the speakers. The Center channel output

and all Right channel outputs are located on the left-hand side of

the rear-panel. All Left channel outputs are located on the right-

hand side of the rear-panel. This organizaion facilitates making

speaker connections. The amplifier binding posts accommodate the

following connectors:

Input Connector

Output Connector

Front L

(L)

•

standard 0.75-inch banana plugs

size 10-12 gauge spade connectors

up to 10-gauge bare wire

(R)

Front R

(C)

Center

(SUB)

(LS)

(RS)

Subwoofer

Side L and Rear L

Side R and Rear R

S e e page 2-13 for additional amplifier information.

2 VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS

4 COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS

Provide video input in the Main Zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3. Five

composite video connectors labeled Video 1 to 5, and five S-Video

connectors labeled S-Video 1 to 5 are available.

Three component video input connectors labeled Component Video 1

to 3 are available for use in the Main Zone and have full HDTV compat-

ibility. The ultra-wide bandwidth component video switcher accepts

any analog component or RGB video input type. Th e com p on en t

video connect ors are not available for Zone 2 or Zone 3.

3 ANALOG AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS

Provide analog audio input in the Main Zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3.

Eight stereo analog audio input connectors labeled Audio 1 to 8 are

available. Connectors labeled 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 can be configured

as 5.1-channel connectors.

5 MAIN ZONE VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provide video output in the Main Zone. Two com posite video

connectors, two S-Video connectors and one component video

connector are available.

When a 5.1-channel analog audio source is present in the Main Zone,

input signals are sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as

indicated in the following table. When a 5.1-channel analog source is

2-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

REAR-PANEL OVERVIEW (continued)

6 ZONE 2 VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

8 TUNER ANTENNA CONNECTORS

Provide video output in Zone 2. One composite video connector

an d one S-Vid eo connector is availab le. Alternatively, these

connectors can be used to connect a video recording device.

Provide two antenna connections for the AM/FM stereo radio tuner.

9 DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS (S/ PDIF)

Note:

Provide digital audio input in the Main Zone or Zone 2. Four S/PDIF

coaxial and four S/ PDIF optical (Toslink) input connectors are

available. Connectors are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48, 88.2 and

96kHz), Dolby Digital and DTS(-ES) sources. Connectors are not

compatible with MPEG (MP3) sources.

• Composite video output connectors are available when a composite

or S-Video source is present.

• S-Video output connectors are available when an S-Video source is

present.

• Component video output connectors are available when

component video source is present.

10 MICROPHONE INPUT CONNECTORS

Provides microphone input for automatic calibration.

7 ZONE 2 ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provide analog audio output in Zone 2. Two pairs of connectors,

one labeled “Fix” and the other labeled “Var” are available. These

connectors can also be used to connect a recording device. For

recording, use the output connector labeled “Fix,” which provides

a fixed output level of +0dB. If output level adjustment is needed,

use the output labeled “Var” and adjust the Zone 2 volume.

11 PHONO INPUT CONNECTORS

Provide a phono level input, which can be assigned to any of the eight

RV-8 inputs. A 2-channel analog bypass path is available (with RIAA

curve). A ground connector is also provided. The phono input is

optimized for moving magnet phono cartridges.

Note:

12 TRIGGER OUTPUT CONNECTORS

When using an analog input source, the Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio outputs

are approximately 2dB lower than the Main audio outputs labeled Front L/

R. When using a digital input source, the Zone 2 audio outputs are

approximately 6dB higher than the Main audio outputs labeled Front L/R.

This is to accommodate THX level requirements.

Provide 12V DC output to control connected components. Two

trigger output connectors are available on a removable terminal

block. The PWR connector (the power trigger output connector) is

not configurable. It is activated when the RV-8 is powered on, and

deactivated when the RV-8 is powered off from the rear panel or by

2-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

putting the RV-8 into standby. The trigger output connector

(labeled 1) can be configured for remote or program operation. See

“T r i g ger S e tup” on page 3-70 f o r more information.

17 ZONE 2 DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

(S/ PDIF)

Provides digital audio output in Zone 2. One S/PDIF coaxial and

one S/PDIF optical (Toslink) connector is available.

13 RS-232 CONNECTORS

The RS-232 serial connector (1) provides serial control and is used to

perform configuration downloads and flash m em ory software

up g rad es. Th e RS-232 con n ector (2) is reserved for future

developments.

18 REMOVABLE ACCESS PANEL

Reserved for future developments.

19 AC INPUT CONNECTOR

14 MAIN ZONE AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provides power to the RV-8 through the supplied power cord.

Provide analog audio output in the Main Zone. Eight connectors

labeled Front L/R, Center, Sub, Side L/R and Rear L/R are available.

20 POWER SWITCH

Use the Power switch to connect or disconnect power from the AC

Input connector to the RV-8. The I and O positions represent “on”

and “off” status, respectively. When the RV-8 is powered on, the

front-panel St a n d b y button or remote control On button can be

used to activate and deactivate standby mode. When the RV-8 is

powered off, standby mode is not available.

15 IR IN CONNECTOR

Accepts input of IR signals from infrared distribution equipment.

One 3.5m m jack that accepts a stereo plug (Tip/ Ring/ Sleeve

connection) or mono plug (Tip/Sleeve connection) is available.

In the event of a power outage, the RV-8 will display a BROWNOUT,

CYCLE POWER message. To turn the unit back on, use the rear-

panel power switch. In this instance, the front-panel StandBy switch

has no effect.

16 ZONE 3 AUDIO/ VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS

Provide analog audio/video output in Zone 3. One stereo analog

audio output (variable level) is available and can derive its source from

a variety of analog sources. One composite video output is available

and can derive its source from any composite or S-video source.

2-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

TUNER OVERVIEW

The RV-8 features an AM/FM stereo radio tuner. The front panel

displays the currently selected frequency, band, listening mode and

volume. Forty presets can store AM or FM frequencies, identified by

the preset number/name and station frequency/band. For example:

WABC/ 90.90 FM or Preset 02/ 10.30 AM. Two an ten n as are

supplied with the RV-8: one for AM and one for FM stereo. At a

minimum, use of the supplied antennas is recommended to ensure

consistent tuner performance.

DIRECT STATION ACCESS

To access a specific frequency, use the numeric buttons on either the

front panel or remote control to enter the desired station frequency.

To directly access a station from the front panel or remote control:

1. Press the AM/FM button to select the desired band.

2. Enter the three or four digit station frequency. For example, to

load FM station 90.9, press 9-0-9. To load AM station 1030, press

the AM/FM button to select the AM band, then press 1-0-3-0.

The tuner can be setup to receive elem ents of the Radio Data

System (RDS) broadcasts. Originated in Europe and now with

limited availability in the US, the RDS is a standard for broadcasting

digital data along with an FM radio broadcast. When the RDS

option is active and RDS data is received, the RV-8 tuner displays

the identity of the broadcast station, receipt of alternate station

frequencies and any additional text (referred to as RT or Radio Text)

that the station broadcasts. For more information on RDS features,

see “T u ner S e tup” on page 3-72.

Note:

When digits are first entered, a “Loading Preset” status message appears

in the front-panel (and on-screen) display. When a third digit is entered,

the RV-8 senses a frequency is being entered and changes the status

message to “Setting Frequency.”

TUNE/ SEEK ACCESS

SELECTING A STATION

Press one of the Tune/Seek buttons on the front panel (ꢃ/ꢀ) or

rem ote control (ꢃꢃ / ꢀꢀ) to navig ate to the next availab le

freq uency. For exam p le, if the currently load ed freq uency is

101.7FM, press the Tune/Seek ꢀbutton to load 101.9FM. Press the

Tune/Seekꢀbutton again to load 102.1FM, and so on.

Begin selecting a radio station by activating the built-in tuner input.

To activate the tuner input, press the front-panel TUNER button or

select the TUNER option from the remote-control MAIN screen. See

the “T u ner S e tup” on page 3-72 f o r more information.

Press one of the Tune/Seek buttons on the front panel (ꢃ/ꢀ) or

remote control (ꢃꢃ / ꢀꢀ) for 2 seconds to activate seek mode.

Seek mode searches for the next available radio station. If the tuner

is having difficulty locating stations, raise the sensitivity level. See

“SCAN SENS” on 3-73 for more information.

Next, determine if the desired frequency band is active by pushing the

front-panel or remote-control AM/FM button to toggle between the

AM and FM frequency bands.

Once the frequency band is set, there are several ways to select a radio

station: direct station access, tune/seek access, scan mode and presets.

2-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

SCAN MODE

SAVING PRESETS

Scan Mode scans through all available stations, pausing for two

seconds on each station before scanning to the next one.

The RV-8 has 40 presets available for storing AM or FM stations. The

presets are divided into four banks with ten presets per bank. It is

possible to store a combination of AM and FM stations in each

bank. Storing presets on the RV-8 can be accomplished from either

the front panel or the remote control. The operation is identical.

To enter Scan Mode:

Press and hold the front-panel (ꢃ/ꢀ) or remote-control (ꢃꢃ / ꢀꢀ)

Tun e/ Seek buttons until ꢃSCAN or SCANꢀis displayed.

To save a station as a preset on the RV-8:

To stop scanning:

1. Press the front-panel or remote-control SAVE button. A status

message displaying ”Saving Preset” appears in the front-panel

(and on-screen) display.

Press either Tun e/ Seek button.

2. Enter a number between 1 and 40 to save the currently loaded

frequency as the corresponding preset.

LOADING PRESETS

For example, if the tuner is currently playing 101.7FM, press

the SAVE button, then the 1 button to save 101.7FM as preset

number 1.

To load a preset:

Enter a preset (number between 1 and 40) using the front-panel or

remote-control number buttons.

Press the 1 button followed by the 5 button to save as preset

number 15. Pressing more than two numbers resets the preset

number to the third digit entered.

A “Loading Preset” status message appears in the front-panel (and

on-screen) display. If a third digit is entered, the tuner switches over

to Direct Station Access mode and the front-panel status message

changes to “Setting Frequency.”

Pressing the SAVE button a second time cancels the saving process.

To skip through available presets in order:

NAMING PRESETS

Preset stations use a naming system based on the RDS system. In the

US, each preset channel is identified by the station's call letters, or what

the broadcast information identifies as the call letters. In Europe and

Japan, each preset channel is identified by the station's Program

Service (PS) name.

Press the remote-control ꢄor ꢅbutton. For example, if preset 1 is

loaded and the ꢅ button is pressed, the RV-8 will load preset 2 (or

the next available preset). If preset 1 is loaded and the ꢄ button is

pressed, the RV-8 will load preset 40 (or the next available preset).

Note:

If the RDS information is not available, the preset name defaults to

PresetXX, where XX is the listed number position in the Preset menu.

This feature is only accessible via the remote control.

2-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

For example, if Preset #01 is FM 90.90 and the call letters are WABC,

then the name for that position is WABC. If Preset #23 does not

broadcast their call letters, then that location is identified as Preset23 in

the menu.

AUTOLOAD

The RV-8 can automatically scan and store presets. This can be

accom plished only from the rem ote control. See “T u ner S e tup

(cont i n ued)” on page 3-74 for additional information.

To start autoloading:

EDITING PRESETS

1. Select AUTOLOAD from the MAIN MENU : SETUP : TUNER SETUP

menu.

It is possible to customize the name of each preset on the RV-8.

To edit the preset name:

2. Press menu ꢀto start AUTOLOAD.

1. Select TUNER PRESETS from the MAIN MENU. The TUNER

PRESETS menu contains a list of preset pages. PAGE 1 contains

presets 1 through 10, PAGE 2 contains presets 11 through 20, etc.

2. Select the page containing the desired preset.

A list of presets appears.

3. Select the desired preset.

The EDIT PRESET menu opens and displays the preset call letters

(or PS), frequency, and band.

The EDIT PRESET menu options are as follows:

•

Select LISTEN TO PRESET to load the preset frequency.

Select NAME to customize the preset name. The preset name

can be up to eight characters long.

•

Select CLEAR PRESET to clear the frequency and band informa-

tion from the preset.

See “T u ner Presets” on page 5-2 for add i t i o nal i n f o rmat i o n.

2-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

AMPLIFIER CHANNEL STATUS

AMPLIFIER OVERVIEW

Each channel has a blue Channel Status LED on the front panel that

is illuminated when the unit is powered on. If there is a problem

with an amplifier channel, the LED will turn off.

The RV-8 features a 7-channel power am plifier with 140W per

channel. The RV-8 can be configured so that all amplifier channels

are dedicated to the Main Zone or so that outputs 3 and 7 (labeled

Rear Right and Rear Left) are used for Zone 2 or Zone 3. Heavy duty

g o ld p lated 5 -way b in d in g p o sts are p ro vid ed fo r sp eaker

connections.

MAKING CONNECTIONS WITH THE AMPLIFIER

OUTPUT

The amplifiers feature advanced thermal current and DC protection

for each channel. Thermal protection monitors the temperature of

the chassis and heatsinks and automatically deactivates the specific

channel(s) when they exceed their normal safe operating temper-

ature. Current protection ensures that the output transistors are

protected by limiting the current capability which is determined by

th e outp ut voltag e, wh ile DC p rotection p reven ts DC an d

frequencies below 10Hz from reaching the speakers. Dedicated

channel status LEDs are located on the front panel to provide at-a-

glance viewing of channel status at all times. If the main power

transform er tem perature exceeds 100°C, the transform er will

deactivate, all channel status LEDs will no longer be lit and the red

standby LED will flash rapidly. Once the transformer has cooled, it

autom atically resets and the am plifier operates norm ally; the

channel status LEDs turn back on, and the red standby LED is no

longer lit.

The amplifier output connectors can accept bare speaker wires,

banana plug connectors or certain spade connectors. When using

bare speaker wires, loosen the connector, insert the wire into the

top of the receptacle, then tighten the connector. The sam e

procedure should be used for spade connectors. Banana plugs

should be inserted into the outward-facing receptacle.

Use heavy-gauge speaker cable to ensure low-impedance connec-

tions between the am plifier and the speakers. Observe correct

speaker polarity.

CAUTION! Do n ot con n ect t h e out p ut s of on e ch an n el t o

t h e ou t p ut s of ot h er ch an n els or t o ot h er am p lifiers.

The amplifiers are designed to meet the highest standards of perfor-

m ance and sound quality. In addition, THX Ultra2 certification

ensures that the amplifiers meet the highest standards set forth by

Lucasfilm's Home THX division.

2-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

HEADPHONE OVERVIEW

REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEW

Headphones can be connected to the RV-8 via the Headphone

output on the front panel. The headphone output follows the signal

selected in the Main Zone. If the Main Zone source is multichannel,

a downmix of the source is sent to the headphone output. LOGIC7

headphone processing is also available for stereo or multichannel

sources. To listen to a stereo source without enhanced processing,

set t h e 2 -CH p aram et er in t h e INPUT SETUP m en u t o t h e

2-CHANNEL listening mode. When headphones are plugged into

the headphone output, all amplifier outputs are muted (including

outputs 3 and 7, unless they are assigned to Zone 2 or Zone 3). The

Main Zone pream plifier outputs are also m uted. Pream plifier

outputs for Zone 2 and Zone 3 remain unmuted. Use the front-

p anel volum e knob or the rem ote-control Volum e Up / Down

buttons to adjust the headphone output level.

The RV-8 rem ote control provides full operation of the RV-8,

including com m ands, such as m enu navigation, that are not

available from the front panel. It is also designed to provide control

for the entire home theater system. This section provides a brief

o ve rvie w o f t h e re m o t e co n t ro l. Fo r d e t a ile d o p e ra t io n /

program m ing instructions and m anufacturing codes, refer to

Appendix C.

OPERATION CONSIDERATIONS

The following factors can im prove or im pede rem ote control

operation.

Note the following before operating the RV-8 remote control:

When the headphones are plugged into the headphone output, the

volume defaults to the HEADPHONE parameter value selected in

the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu. When the headphones are

unplugged, the volume defaults to the value of the MAIN PWR ON

parameter in the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu. See page 6-34

for headphone listening mode descriptions.

•

The remote control must be in line-of-sight with the front-panel

IR receiver. Eliminate obstructions between the remote control

and the IR receiver. The remote control may become unreliable

if strong sunlight or fluorescent light shines on the IR receiver.

For optimal performance, position the remote control at a

30-degree angle no more than 40 to 60 feet (12.2m to 18.3m)

from the RV-8. Placing the RV-8 inside a smoked glass cabinet

will reduce the remote control range.

•

Remote controls for different components can interfere with

one another. Avoid using remote controls for different compo-

nents at the same time.

Remote-control batteries should be replaced as needed.

2-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

MAIN MENU

MENU ITEM SELECTION

Use the MAIN MENU to open the four main

m en u b ran ch es: MO DE ADJUST, AUDIO

CONTROLS, TUNER PRESETS and SETUP.

Use the remote-control Menu arrows to navigate menus and to

select menu items.

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

To select a menu item on the open menu:

1. Press the remote-control ꢁ and ꢂ arrows to highlight the desired

MENU NAVIGATION

menu item.

Use the remote-control arrow buttons to navigate the extensive

menu structure starting on page B-2. The table below indicates the

navigation commands that the remote-control buttons perform

when the Main Zone command bank is activated.

2. When the desired menu item is highlighted, press the Menu ꢀ

arrow to select the highlighted item. If an option is selected,

another menu opens. If a parameter is selected, a parameter

drop-down menu or horizontal graph opens.

Note:

The DVD1 device has been preprogrammed to control the Lexicon RT-10

and RT-20 disc players.

Arrow

Navigation Functions

• When a menu is open, press the remote-control Menu ꢀarrow to select the highlighted menu item.

ꢀ

• When no menus are open, press the Menu ꢀarrow to open the MAIN MENU.

• When a menu is open, press the Menu ꢃarrow to close the menu and, in most cases, open the previous menu. Subse-

quent presses continue to close the current menu and open the previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed. When

the MAIN MENU is closed, the menu structure is also closed.

ꢃ

• When no menus are open, pressing the Menu ꢃarrow button performs no function.

• When a drop-down menu is open, press the Menu ꢃarrow to select the current setting and close the drop-down menu.

• When a menu is open, press the Menu ꢁand ꢂarrow buttons to scroll upward and downward through the complete list

of menu items. The highlighted menu item appears in the front-panel display. All menu items appear in the on-screen

display. A scroll bar appears in the left side of the on-screen display when menu items exceed the on-screen display’s top

and bottom margins. The cursor automatically wraps to the next menu item when the first or last menu item is passed.

ꢁ

ꢂ

2-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

2. When the desired setting appears beneath the parameter

name, press the ꢃ arrow to accept the setting and close the

drop-down menu.

MENU OPTIONS

Selecting a menu option opens another menu within the menu

structure. For example, selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opens

the SETUP menu.

HORIZONTAL BAR GRAPHS

SETUP

MAIN MENU

Selecting some menu parameters opens a horizontal bar graph. The

bar graph indicates the position at which the current parameter setting

falls within the entire parameter range.

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

For example, selecting the A/V SYNC DELAY parameter from the

DISPLAY SETUP menu opens the horizontal bar graph shown below,

which is used to adjust the amount of audio delay.

DISPLAY SETUP

OFF, 1 to 60ms

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME

PARAMETER DROP-DOWN MENUS

OFF

Selecting some menu options opens a drop-down menu that contains

a list of available parameter settings. For example, selecting the

CUSTOM NAME parameter from the DISPLAY SETUP menu opens a

drop-down menu which is used to select the ON or OFF setting.

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

To adjust a parameter setting with a horizontal bar graph:

OFF

DISPLAY SETUP

1. When the horizontal bar graph appears, press the remote-control

ꢁ and ꢂ arrows to increase or decrease the setting in the desig-

nated increm ents. The setting appears to the right of the

parameter name in the on-screen and front-panel displays.

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

OFF

2. When the desired adjustments have been made, press the ꢃ

arrow to select the setting and close the horizontal bar graph.

To select a setting in a parameter drop-down menu:

1. When the drop-down menu opens, press the remote-control ꢁ

and ꢂ arrows to scroll upward and downward through the

complete list of available settings. The current setting is displayed

beneath the parameter name in the on-screen and front-panel

displays.

Note:

Menu item selection instructions differ for certain menus. These instances

are noted throughout this user guide.

2-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

REMOTE CONTROL BUTTONS

1. SYSTEM POWER OFF

2. Displays the name of the selected device.

3. POWER ON

4. Device and function buttons

5. Light

6. Displays page number/currently selected device

7. LCD page change

8. FAVORITE

9. HOME menu

10. CHANNEL/Listening Mode (+/-)

11. Previous channel

12. VOLUME (+/-)

13. MUTE

14. TRANSPORT functions (PLAY, STOP, REWIND, PAUSE, REC, SKIP and FF)

for VCR, DVD and CD

15. JOYSTICK (left, right, up, down and center press)

16. DISPLAY/AM/FM

17. ENTER/SAVE

18. MACRO buttons

2-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

COMMAND MATRIX

The command matrix describes the commands that the remote control buttons perform

when each command bank is active.

BUTTON

HOME

MAIN PAGE1 MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2

Enters RV-8 standby mode.

Activates the RV-8.

Displays the MAIN Zone Displays the

command bank, which Main Zone

includes commands

that control the Main

Zone.

Selects the Dolby Displays the Zone 2 Toggles RV8 between

Digital listening

mode family.

Status.

5 speaker and 7

speaker modes.

Status.

Displays the Zone 2

Deactivates the

Selects the DTS

listening mode

family.

Deactivates Zone 2. Adjusts the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu

command bank, which Main Zone.

includes commands that

control Zone 2.

Main Zone BALANCE

to the left.

Displays the Zone 3

Selects the Tuner Selects the THX

Selects the Tuner

input for Zone 2.

Sets the Main Zone

Volume level to

-15dB.

command bank, which input for the

includes commands that Main Zone.

control Zone 3.

listening mode

family.

Displays the DVD1

Selects the

Toggles between

the current

listening mode

and the 2-

Selects the DVD1

input for Zone 2.

Shows status menu

for current Main Zone

input stream.

command bank, which DVD1 input for

includes commands that the Main Zone.

control DVD1.

CHANNEL

listening mode.

STAT2 button: see

page 2-29 f o r more

information.

Displays the DVD2

Selects the

Analog Bypass

Toggle.

Selects the DVD1 Activates the RV-8.

input for Zone 2.

command bank, which DVD2 input for

includes commands that the Main Zone.

control DVD2.

Displays the SAT

command bank, which

includes commands that Main Zone.

control the Satellite box.

Selects the SAT

input for the

Selects the L7 FILM Selects the

listening mode. Satellite input for

Zone 2.

Reserved for future

expansion.

2-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

BUTTON

ZONE3 PAGE1

ZONE3 PAGE2

DVD1 PAGE1

DVD1 PAGE2

Enters RV-8 standby mode.

Reserved for future expansion.

Activates the RV-8.

Toggles RT-10 or RT-20 power.

Displays the Status of

Zone 3.

Resets the AUDIO

Opens and closes the RT-10 or RT-20 disc tray.

CONTROLS menu BASS,

TREBLE, and TILT EQ

parameter to +0.0dB.

Deactivates Zone 3.

Decreases the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone BASS parameter

in.5dB increments.

Opens the RT-10 or

RT-20 Top menu.

Opens and closes the

RT-10 or RT-20 Video

Adjust bar.

Selects the TUNER input Decreases the AUDIO

for Zone 3.

Activates RT-10 or

RT-20 random

Opens the RT-10 or

RT-20 Angle bar.

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone TREBLE parameter playback.

in.5dB increments.

Selects the DVD1 input

for Zone 3.

Decreases the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone TILT EQ parameter

in.2dB increments.

Activates RT-10 or

RT-20 repeat playback.

Activates the RT-10 or

RT-20 condition

memory mode.

Selects the DVD2 input

for Zone 3.

Deactivates AUDIO

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone LOUDNESS

parameter.

Activates RT-10 or

RT-20 A-B repeat

playback.

Activates the RT-10 or

RT-20 last memory

playback.

Selects the Satellite

input for Zone 3.

Reserved for future

expansion.

Opens the RT-10 or

RT-20 Setup menu.

Creates up to five

shortcuts for frequently

adjusted RT-10 or RT-20

Setup menu parameters.

2-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

MAIN

PAGE1

BUTTON

HOME

MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2

Selects the VCR

command bank, which input for the

includes commands

that control the VCR.

Selects the VCR Selects the L7

Selects the VCR

input for Zone 2.

Adjusts the Audio

Controls menu Main

Zone BALANCE

parameter to the

right.

Music listening

mode.

Main Zone.

Selects the TV

command bank, which input for the

includes commands

that control the TV.

Selects the TV

Selects the L7 TV

listening mode.

Selects the TV input Sets the Main Zone

for Zone 2.

volume level to

-30dB.

Main Zone.

Selects the CD

command bank, which input for the

includes commands

that control the CD

player.

Selects the CD

Selects the L7

Selects the CD

input for Zone 2.

Toggles the Setup

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY parameter.

Music Surround

listening mode.

Main Zone.

Selects the Phono

command bank, which Phono input for setting the input

includes commands

that control the

associated device.

Selects the

Toggles between

Selects the Phono

input for Zone 2.

Deactivates the RV-8.

the Main Zone.

to auto, analog or

digital.

N/A

Selects Page 2 of Selects Page 1 of

the Main Zone the Main Zone

command bank. command bank.

Selects Page 2 of

the Zone 2

command bank.

Selects Page 1 of the

Zone 2 command

bank.

Selects the Home command bank.

Scrolls through Favorite Channel pages.

History-dependent*

Increases the Main Zone volume level Increases the Zone 2 volume level in 1dB

in 1dB increments. increments.

* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.

Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.

2-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

BUTTON

ZONE3 PAGE1

ZONE3 PAGE2

DVD1 PAGE1

DVD1 PAGE2

Selects the VCR input

for Zone 3.

Increases the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu BASS menus without saving

Closes certain Setup

Activates and deacti-

vates the RT-10 or

parameter in .5dB

increments.

the changes.

RT-20 rear- panel video

output connectors.

Selects the TV input for

Zone 3.

Increases the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu

TREBLE parameter in

.5dB increments.

Activates the RT-10 or

RT-20 display mode.

Controls the brightness

of front-panel display

characters.

Selects the CD input for Increases the AUDIO

Zone 3.

Opens the RT-10 or

RT-20 Subtitle bar.

Activates the RT-10 or

RT-20 search mode.

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone TILT EQ parameter

level in .2dB increments.

Selects the Phono input

for Zone 3.

Activates the AUDIO

CONTROLS menu Main

Zone LOUDNESS

parameter.

Opens the RT-10 or

RT-20 Audio bar.

Activates the RT-10 or

RT-20 program mode.

Displays Zone 3 Page 2

command bank.

Displays Zone 3 Page 1

command bank.

Displays DVD1 Page 2

command bank.

Displays DVD1 Page 1

command bank.

Displays the Home command bank.

Scrolls through Favorite Channel pages.

Increases Zone 3 volume level in 1dB increments

Increases RV-8 Main volume level in 1dB

increments

2-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

MAIN

PAGE1

BUTTON

HOME

MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2

History-dependent*

Decreases Main Zone volume level in Decreases Zone2 volume level in 1dB

1dB increments.

increments.

History-dependent*

Toggles between fully muting Main

Zone volume level and restoring Main BALANCE and FADER parameters.

Zone volume level to its original level.

Centers the AUDIO CONTROLS menu

Toggles between muting Main Zone

volume level and restoring Main Zone volume level and restoring Zone 2 volume

volume level to its original level.

Toggles between fully muting Zone 2

level to its original level.

Scrolls upward through listening

modes.

Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu

Main Zone FADER parameter towards the

front.

Scrolls downward through listening

modes.

Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu

Main Zone FADER parameter towards the

back.

History-dependent*

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press ꢄto skip back to

next available preset.

Activates the Trigger output connector labeled 1.

If the RV-8’s but-in tuner is the currently selected input, press ꢅto skip forward

to next available preset.

* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.

Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.

2-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

BUTTON

ZONE3 PAGE1

ZONE3 PAGE2

DVD1 PAGE1

DVD1 PAGE2

Decreases Zone 3 volume level in.1dB increments.

Decreases Main Zone volume level in.1dB

increments.

Activates the 5.1 THX, 5.1 THX Ultra2 or the THX

SurEX listening mode when a 5.1-channel THX

source is present. Activates Dolby PLIIx+THX when

a stereo source is present.

Toggles between fully muting the RV-8 Main Zone

volume level and restoring Main Zone volume

level to its original level.

Toggles between fully muting Zone 3 volume level Toggles between muting the RV-8 Main Zone

and restoring Zone 3 volume to its original level.

volume level and restoring Main Zone volume

level to its original level.

Increases Subwoofer output in 1dB increments.

Scrolls upward through RV-8 listening modes.

Decreases Subwoofer output in 1dB increments.

Scrolls downward through RV-8 listening modes.

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected

input, press ꢄto skip back to the next available

preset.

Skips to the beginning of the current chapter or

track. Subsequent presses skip to the beginning of

the previous chapter or track.

Activates the output connector labeled Trigger 1.

Activates playback of the loaded disc at regular

playback speed.

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected

input, press ꢅ to skip forward to the next

available preset.

Skips to the beginning of the next chapter or

track. Subsequent presses skip to the beginning of

the next chapter or track.

2-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

MAIN

PAGE1

BUTTON

HOME

MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2

History-dependent*

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press ꢃꢃ once to tune

to the

next available tuner frequency. Pressing for 2 seconds activates seek mode, which

searches for the next available radio station. To enter Scan Mode, press and hold

History-dependent*

until the display shows ꢃSCAN or SCANꢀ.

When a DTS(-ES) source is present, toggles the ES decoding parameter,

cycling through the AUTO, ON, and OFF settings.

Deactivates the output connector labeled Trigger 1.

Activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or Dolby DIGITAL listening mode when a

5.1- channel Dolby Digital source is present.

When a menu is open, scrolls upward through menu items.

Opens the menu structure and selects the highlighted menu item, which opens

another menu, opens a parameter drop-down menu, or selects the highlighted

parameter setting.

When a menu is open, scrolls downward through menu items.

* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.

Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.

2-24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

BUTTON

ZONE3 PAGE1

ZONE3 PAGE2

DVD1 PAGE1

DVD1 PAGE2

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently

When RT-10 or RT-20 playback is activated, scans

through the disc in reverse direction.

selected input, press ꢃꢃo nce to tune to the next

available tuner frequency. Pressing for 2 seconds

activates seek mode, which searches

for the next available radio station. To enter

Scan Mode, press and hold until the display

shows ꢃSCAN or SCANꢀ.

When RT-10 or RT-20 playback is activated, scans

through the disc in forward direction.

When a DTS(-ES) source is present, toggles the

ES decoding parameter, cycling through the

AUTO, ON and OFF settings.

Opens the RT-10 or RT-20 disc menu.

Stops playback of the loaded disc.

Activates RT-10 or RT-20 pause mode.

Deactivates the output connector labeled

Trigger 1.

Activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or Dolby DIGITAL

listening mode when a 5.1-channel Dolby

Digital source is present. Activates Dolby PLIIx

Movie when a stereo source is present.

When a menu is open, scrolls upward through menu items.

Opens the menu structure and selects the

highlighted item. When no menu is open,

opens the MAIN MENU.

Navigates to the right in the RT-10 or RT-20 menu

structure.

When a menu is open, scrolls downward through menu items.

2-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

MAIN

PAGE1

BUTTON

HOME

MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2

History-dependent*

When a menu is open, closes the menu and (in most cases), opens the previous

menu. Subsequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the

previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed. When no menus are open, shows

the two-line status.

History-dependent*

When a menu is open, closes the menu structure. When no menus are open,

shows the 2-line status.

Numbers 0 to 9, are used to enter the frequency of radio stations or to save/load

presets when the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input.

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, toggles between AM/FM

frequency bands.

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, pressing this button will

save the currently selected tuner frequency into a preset slot. Also use this button

when programming the remote. See page C-4 for additional information.

Macro Buttons: M1 is for Macro 1, M2 is for Macro 2 and M3 is for Macro 3. See

page C-9 for additional information on how to use and program macros.

Activates the remote control backlight that illuminates the buttons and LCD

screen for easier visibility.

* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.

Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.

2-26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

BUTTON

ZONE3 PAGE1

ZONE3 PAGE2

DVD1 PAGE1

DVD1 PAGE2

When a menu is open, closes the menu and, in

most cases, opens the previous menu.

Navigates to the left in the RT-10 or RT-20 menu

structure.

Subsequent presses continue to close the current

menu and open the previous menu until

the MAIN MENU is closed. When no menus are

open, this button performs no function.

When a menu is open, closes the menu structure.

When no menus are open, shows the

two-line status.

Selects the highlighted RT-10 or RT-20 menu item.

Numbers 0 to 9 are used to enter the

frequency of radio stations or to save/load

presets when the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the

currently selected input.

Direct RT-10 or RT-20 title, chapter, group or track

number selection.

If the RV-8 built-in tuner is the currently selected

input, toggles between AM/FM frequency

bands.

Enters values 10 and above on the RT-10 or RT-20.

Press once for numbers in the teens, twice for

numbers in the twenties, and so on. Then press a

number button (0 to 9) to enter a second digit.

If the RV-8’s built-in tuner is the currently

Deletes entries when RT-10 or RT-20 search modes

and certain playback modes are activated.

selected input, saves the currently selected tuner

frequency as a preset. Also used to program the

remote. See page C-4 for additional information.

Macro Buttons: M1 is for Macro 1, M2 is for Macro 2 and M3 is for Macro 3. See page C-9

for additional information on how to use and program macros.

Activates the remote-control backlight to illuminate the buttons and LCD screen for easier

visibility.

2-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

UNDERSTANDING THE ZONES

TWO-LINE STATUS

The RV-8 features three zones of operation: the Main Zone, Zone 2

and Zone 3. The Main Zone controls audio and video signals in the

primary listening space. Zone 2 controls digital and analog audio

and composite or S-Video signals for a second zone or recording

device. Zone 3 is designed to control analog audio and composite

or S-video signals in an additional listening space. The headphone

output follows the source selected in the Main Zone. LOGIC7

Headphone processing is available on this output.

The two-line status opens in the on-screen and front-panel displays

whenever the RV-8 detects a change in input source or listening mode.

The Main Zone two-line status appears when the RV-8 detects a Main

Zone change, and the Zone 2 (or Zone 3) two-line status appears

when a Zone 2 (or Zone 3) status change is detected.

The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY m enu STATUS param eter is used to

control the length of time the two-line status appears in the on-

screen d isp lay. Th e O N-SCREEN DISPLAY m en u PO SITIO N

parameter is used to control the vertical alignment of the two-line

status in the display device screen.

The following are exceptions to independent zone operation:

1. The same Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) input source can be simul-

taneously selected for the Main Zone and Zone 2. However,

different Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) input sources cannot be

present in the Main Zone and Zone 2.

Note:

When the display device is connected to a component video output

connector and the MAIN ADV menu COMPONENT OSD parameter is set

to OFF, the on-screen display does not appear on the associated display.

2. Zone 2 can provide a 2-channel downmix of Main Zone multi-

channel audio when all of the following conditions are met:

•

The same input must be selected in the Main Zone and

Zone 2.

MAIN ZONE TWO-LINE STATUS

Op en s in th e on -screen an d fron t-p an el

displays whenever the RV-8 detects a Main

Zone status change. The Main Zone two-line

status indicates the current input, input source, listening mode and

volume level selected in the Main Zone.

A Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) or 5.1a input source must be

present in the Main Zone.

DVD1

FILM

VOL

-34dB

The INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN parameter must be set to

DMIX. See “ZON E 2 in P a rameter S e tt i n gs” on page 3-22 for

more information.

3. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio output connectors will receive

Front L/R when a 5.1a source is present in the Main Zone and the

ZONE2 IN parameter is set to ANLG.

ZONE 2 TWO-LINE STATUS

Opens in the on-screen and front-panel displays

whenever the RV-8 detects a Zone 2 status

change. The Zone 2 two-line status indicates the

DVD1

ANLG

VOL

4. When 5.1a BYPASS or 2-CH BYPASS is selected, a downmix to

Zone 2 is not available.

ZONE 2

-34dB

current input, input source and volume level selected in Zone 2.

2-28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

button to open the second page. If the STATUS menu does not

include a second page, pressing the STAT2 button closes the

menu. If this occurs, begin again with step 1.

ZONE 3 TWO-LINE STATUS

Opens in the on-screen and front-panel displays

whenever the RV-8 detects a Zone 3 status

change. The Zone 3 two-line status indicates the

DVD1

ZONE3

ANLG

VOL

-34dB

2. When the desired STATUS menu page has been opened, press

the remote-control Menu ꢁ and ꢂ arrows to scroll upward and

downward through the complete list of available parameters.

current input, input source and volume level selected in Zone 3.

Note:

TUNER STATUS

STATUS menu parameters provide information about the current

input source and listening mode. These parameters cannot be

adjusted.

The Tuner status indicates the current frequency,

DVD1

L7 MUSIC

90.9 FM

-34dB

band, listening mode and volume level. The

Tuner status takes the place of the two-line status

display for inputs using the built-in tuner.

3. Press the STAT2 button or the Menu ꢃ arrow to close the

STATUS menu. If the second page of the STATUS menu opens,

press the STAT2 button or the Menu ꢀ arrow again to close the

STATUS menu.

STATUS MENUS

STATUS menu descriptions begin on the next page. The table

beneath each description lists the default and possible settings

for each parameter. STATUS menu parameter descriptions

begin on page 2-34. S TATUS menu level meters are described

on page 2-35.

Pressing the remote control STAT2 button opens the STATUS menu

for the current input source of the Main Zone, which contains

parameters that provide information about the current input source

and listening mode. STATUS menus are available for 2-channel,

Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) and 5.1 analog input sources. Unlike most

other m enus, STATUS m enus cannot be op ened through the

selection of menu options. Rather, the remote control STAT2 button

must be pressed.

To open and navigate the STATUS menu for the current input

source:

1. Under Zone 2 page 2, press “STAT2.” The first page of the

STATUS menu for the current input source appears in the on-

screen and front-panel displays.

If the STATUS menu includes a second page, the PG1 indicator

appears in the top-right corner of the menu. Press the STAT2

2-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

2CH STATUS

D STATUS

Provides information about 2-channel input sources. Features L and

R level meters.

Provides information about Dolby Digital input sources. Features

L, C, R, SL, SR and LFE level meters.

Parameter

Possible Settings

Parameter

Possible Settings

INPUT

The current input

INPUT

The current input

The current listening mode

3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0

32 to 640kbps

MODE

The current listening mode

ANLG, PCM

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

CHANNELS

BIT RATE

44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz

EX ENCODED

SAMPLE RATE

2.0 ENCODING

DIALOG OFFSET

MIX ROOM

CENTER MIX LVL

SURR MIX LVL

MATRIX, NONE

See “S T A T US Menu P a r a meter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

48kHz

MATRIX, NONE

2CH STATUS

–27 to +4dB

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SMALL, LARGE

SAMPLE RATE

–3.0dB, –4.5dB, –6.0dB

+0.0dB, –3.0dB, –6.0dB

-6

-15

-30

See “S T A T US Menu P a r a meter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

-45

D STATUS

INPUT

MODE

CHANNELS

BIT RATE

EX ENCODED

PG1

D STATUS

PG2

SAMPLE RATE

2.0 ENCODING

DIALOG OFFSET

MIX ROOM

CENTER MIX LVL

SURR MIX LVL

LFE

-6

-15

-30

-45

2-30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

STATUS

5.1a BYPASS STATUS

Provides information about DTS(-ES) input sources. Includes L, C, R,

SL, SR, SB and LFE level meters. The SB level meter appears when a

6.1-channel input source is present, or when a 5.1-channel input

source is present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON.

Provides information about 5.1-channel analog input sources when

the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON.

Parameter

Possible Settings

INPUT

The current input

5.1a BYPASS

BYPASS

Parameter

Possible Settings

MODE

INPUT

The current input

INPUT TYPE

MODE

The current listening mode

3/3.1, 3/2.1

See “S T A T US Menu P a r a meter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

CHANNELS

BIT RATE

754.5 to 1509.7 kbps

DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF

16 bits, 20 bits, 24 bits

44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz

5.1a BYPASS STATUS

INPUT

ES ENCODING

WORD LENGTH

SAMPLE RATE

MODE

INPUT TYPE

5.1a BYPASS

BYPASS

See “S T A T US Menu P a r a meter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

STATUS

STATUS PG1

STATUS

INPUT

PG1

PG2

WORD LENGTH

SAMPLE RATE

MODE

CHANNELS

BIT RATE

ENCODING

SL SR SB LFE

-6

-15

-30

-45

2-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

2CH BYPASS STATUS

DIGITAL STATUS

Provides information about 2-channel analog input sources when

the MAIN ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON.

Provides information about digital input sources for which a sample

rate is detected, but no audio is present in the input signal.

Parameter

Possible Settings

Parameter

Possible Settings

INPUT

The current input

2CH BYPASS

BYPASS

INPUT

The current input

MODE

The current listening mode

---

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz

See “S T A T US Menu P a r a meter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

2CH BYPASS STATUS

INPUT

DIGITAL STATUS

MODE

2CH BYPASS

BYPASS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

2-32

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

5.1 ANALOG STATUS

LIVE! STATUS

Provides information about 5.1-channel analog input sources.

Provides information about LIVE! input sources. Features L and R

level meters.

Parameter

Possible Settings

Parameter

Possible Settings

INPUT

The current input

The current listening mode

ANLG

INPUT

The current input

MODE

The current listening mode

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

MIC

96kHz

48kHz

See “S T A T US Menu P a r a meter Descriptions” on page 2-34 for detailed information.

5.1 ANALOG STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

2CH STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

DVD1

LIVE! MED

MIC

ANLG

96kHz

SAMPLE RATE

48kHz

SAMPLE RATE

-6

-15

-30

-45

2-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic Operation

Lexicon

STATUS MENU PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

Possible settings for Dolby Digital input sources include 3/2.1, 3/2,

3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0 and 1/0. Possible settings for DTS(-ES) input

sources include 3/3.1 and 3/2.1.

2.0 ENCODING

MATRIX, NONE

Indicates whether or not a m atrix-encoded source is detected.

When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a matrix-encoded source is

detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a matrix-encoded

source is not detected. The RV-8 cannot automatically detect matrix

encoding in non-flagged input sources.

DIALOG OFFSET

–27 to +4dB

Indicates the dialog normalization value applied to the input signal.

Dolby Digital input sources reproduce dialog at 27 decibels below full-

scale (–27dBFS). When the dialog normalization value of the incoming

signal is higher or lower, the DIALOG OFFSET parameter indicates the

amount of adjustment the RV-8 makes to normalize dialog to –27dBFS.

BIT RATE

32 to 640 kbps or 754 to 1509.7kbps

Indicates the rate at which the input signal is encoded. A higher bit

rate indicates that less compression was used during the encoding

process. Possible settings for Dolby Digital sources range from 32 to

640 kbps. Possible settings for DTS(-ES) sources range from 754 to

1509.7 kbps.

ES ENCODING

DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF

Indicates whether or not a DTS-ES-encoded source is detected.

When the parameter setting is DISCRETE, a discrete 6.1-channel

DTS-ES source is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX,

a 5.1-channel DTS-ES source with a surround -encod ed b ack

channel is detected. When the param eter setting is NONE, a

standard DTS source with no DTS-ES encoding is detected.

CENTER MIX LVL

–3.0dB, –4.5dB, –6.0dB

Indicates the relative level of the center channel that was used

during the mixing process.

CHANNELS

3/3.1, 3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0

EX ENCODING

MATRIX, NONE

Indicates the number of channels present in the input source. The

first digit indicates the number of front channels present. The digit

after the slash indicates the number of surround channels present.

The digit after the decimal point indicates the presence of LFE (low-

frequency effects) information. For instance, if the parameter setting

is 3/2.1, an input source with three front channels, two surround

channels and LFE information is present. LFE information is sent to

the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Sub.

Indicates whether or not a Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded source

is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a 5.1-channel

Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX is

detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a standard 5.1-

channel Dolby Digital source recorded without Dolby Digital Surround

EX encoding is detected. The RV-8 cannot automatically detect Dolby

Digital Surround EX encoding in non-flagged input sources.

2-34

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Basic Operation

INPUT

SURR MIX LVL

+0.0dB, –3.0dB, –6.0dB

Indicates the selected input (e.g., DVD1).

Indicates the relative surround channel level that was used during

the mixing process.

INPUT TYPE

ANLG, BYP, PCM, MIC, ---

WORD LENGTH

16 bits, 20 bits, 24 bits

Indicates the input source that is present. When the parameter

setting is ANLG, a 2-channel analog audio source is present and the

MAIN ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to OFF. When

the parameter setting is BYP (Bypass), a 2-channel analog audio

source is present and the 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON.

When the param eter setting is PCM, a 2-channel digital audio

source is present. When the parameter is set to MIC, a microphone

source is present. When the parameter setting is ---, an unknown

digital audio source is present.

Indicates the word length of the audio data present in the input signal.

STATUS MENU LEVEL METERS

Most STATUS menus contain level meters that indicate fluctuating

input levels in the front left (L), center (C), front right (R), surround left

(SL), surround right (SR), surround back (SB) and subwoofer (SUB)

channels. These level meters indicate input levels for both analog and

digital input sources. For instance, the level meters indicate digital

audio input levels when a digital audio source is present.

MIX ROOM

SMALL, LARGE

Indicates the size of the mixing room that was used during the

mixing process. When the parameter setting is LARGE, setting the

RE-EQUALIZATION parameter to ON for THX listening modes is

recommended.

Different combinations of level meters appear on each STATUS menu,

depending on the source that is present. The SB level meter appears

when a 6.1-channel source is present, or when a 5.1-channel source

is present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON.

MODE

Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow and red when

the on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen background.

Green indicates low levels, yellow indicates normal levels, and red

indicates high levels and the onset of overload. Level meters appear

in white when the on-screen display is not configured for a blue-

screen background.

Indicates the activated listening mode (e.g., L7 FILM).

SAMPLE RATE

44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz

Indicates the sample rate of the input source that is present.

2-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Setup ..........................................................................................3-2

Input Setup .................................................................................3-4

Changing Input Names............................................................................. 3-5

Assigning Audio and Video Input Connectors ........................................... 3-7

Selecting Preferred Listening Modes........................................................ 3-12

Configuring Advanced Input Settings...................................................... 3-17

INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings........................................................... 3-19

ZONE2 in Parameter Settings.................................................................. 3-22

Speaker Setup ...........................................................................3-25

Setting Crossover Points.......................................................................... 3-25

Speaker Setup Parameters....................................................................... 3-29

Automatic Calibration ............................................................................. 3-36

Manual Calibration ................................................................................. 3-53

I/O Config.................................................................................3-60

Display Setup ............................................................................3-63

On-Screen Display Setup ........................................................................ 3-64

Front-panel Display Setup ....................................................................... 3-66

Volume Control Setup...............................................................3-68

Trigger Setup ............................................................................3-70

Tuner Setup ..............................................................................3-72

Tuner Region Band Limit And Increments ............................................... 3-73

Lock Options.............................................................................3-79

LIVE! CALIBRATION ...................................................................3-80

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

SETUP

Selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opens the SETUP menu.

I/O CONFIG

SETUP

I/O CONFIG

MAIN MENU

SETUP

Opens the I/O CONFIG menu, which is used to configure the analog

audio input connectors as eight stereo connectors, one 5.1-channel

and five stereo connectors, or two stereo and two 5.1-channel

connectors. It can also be used to configure the amplifier outputs.

See “I/O CONFIGURATI O N” 3-60 for more information.

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

DISPLAYS

SETUP

DISPLAYS

Opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which is used to customize the on-

screen and front-panel displays, restore audio/video synchronization,

and create and activate a custom unit name. See “DISPLAY SETUP”

on page 3-63 f o r more i n f o rmat i o n.

INPUTS

SETUP

INPUTS

Prompts the selection of a desired input (e.g., DVD1) and opens the

corresponding INPUT SETUP menu, which is used to change input

names, assign audio and video input connectors, select preferred

listening modes and configure Main Zone and Zone 2 input settings.

See “INPUT SETUP” on page 3-4 for more information.

VOLUME CONTROLS

SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, which is used to configure

Main Zone, Mute, Zone 2, Zone 3 and Headphone volume levels. See

“VOLUME CONTROL SETUP” on page 3-68 for more information.

SPEAKERS

SETUP

SPEAKERS

TRIGGER

Opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the

Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup,

set speaker distances and calibrate output levels. See “SPEAKER

SETUP” on page 3-25 for more information.

SETUP

TRIGGER

Opens the TRIGGER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the

trigger output connector labeled 1. See ”TRIGGER SETUP” on page

3-70 for more information.

3-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

TUNER SETUP

POWER MANAGEMENT

ON, OFF

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

SETUP

POWER MANAGEMENT

Opens the TUNER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the AM/

FM tuner. See “TUNER SETUP” on page 3-72 f o r more information.

Opens the POWER MANAGEMENT menu, which is used to automat-

ically put the RV-8 into standby mode during brownouts.

When set to ON, the RV-8 detects low voltage levels or a momentary

loss of power and puts the device in standby mode. In the event of a

power brown out, the RV-8 will display a BROWN OUT!! PRESS

STANDBY message. To turn the unit back on, use the front panel

STANDYBY button.

LOCK OPTIONS

SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

Opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu, which is used to protect MODE

ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS and SETUP menu branch settings from

accidental changes. For more information, see “L o ck Opt i o ns” on

page 3-79.

When set to OFF, the RV-8 will attem p t to function during a

momentary power loss, however software settings may become

corrupt and need to be reset.

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

When the RV-8 is in standby mode, pressing the button turns the

unit on and activates all zones that were active in the previous

operating session.

Opens the LIVE! CALIBRATION menu, which is used to perform the

necessary calibration before using the LIVE! m odes. See “L IVE!

C A LIBRATI O N” on page 3-80 f or more information.

3-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

INPUT SETUP

SETUP

INPUTS

(INPUT)

INPUT SETUP

Selecting the SETUP menu INPUTS option prompts the selection of a desired input (e.g., DVD1). Selecting an input opens the corresponding

INPUT SETUP menu, which is used to change the input name, assign audio and video input connectors, select preferred listening modes and

configure advanced Main Zone and Zone 2 input settings.

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

NAME

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

DVD1

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a

MIC

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section. Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP

menu can be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a menu path, any other input can be substituted.

All INPUT SETUP menus are shown in the Appendix on page A-6. The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical,

regardless of which input is selected. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter settings differ from input to input.

The INPUT SETUP menus shown in the Appendix indicate factory-default parameter settings for each input.

3-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

CHANGING INPUT NAMES

Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu NAME parameter opens the INPUT NAME menu, which is used to customize or restore the factory-default name

of the selected input. Factory-default input names correspond to front-panel and remote-control input selection button labels.

EDIT INPUT NAME

DVD1

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT NAME

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

NAME

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

EDIT INPUT NAME

RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 8 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

AUTO

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a

MIC

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

EDIT INPUT NAME

SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

NAME

EDIT INPUT NAME

Opens the EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down menu, which is used to

customize the name of the selected input. Custom input names can

include up to eight characters.

automatically wrap to the first character space when the last

character space is passed.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter all characters in the new name.

5. When the desired input name has been entered, press the ꢃarrow

To customize the name of the selected input:

button to close the menu and return to the INPUT NAME menu.

1. Follow the EDIT INPUT NAME menu path to open the EDIT INPUT

NAME drop-down menu.

The custom input name appears in the on-screen and front-panel

displays. Both the custom and factory-default input names appear in

the INPUT SETUP menu. The custom input name appears against the

left margin of the on-screen display, and the factory-default input

name appears in parentheses against the right margin.

2. When the EDIT INPUT NAME menu opens, the current input

name appears on the second line. Using the remote-control ꢁ

and ꢂarrow buttons, change the character above the cursor (^).

3. When the desired character has been changed, press the ꢀarrow

button to advance to the next character space. The cursor will

3-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

DVD1 INPUT NAME

PRESS MENU V TO

RESTORE INPUT NAME

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

EDIT INPUT NAME

RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

NAME

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

AUTO

VCR

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

S-VIDEO-1

TUNER

PHONO

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a

MIC

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

DVD1

RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

SETUP

INPUTS

NAME

Restores the factory-default name of the selected input. Factory-

default input names correspond to front-panel and remote-control

input selection button labels.

3. When the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME option is highlighted, press

the ꢀ arrow button to select this option. The message “PRESS

MENU V TO RESTORE INPUT NAME” appears in the on-screen

and front-panel displays.

To restore the factory-default name of the selected input:

4. When this message appears, press the ꢀarrow button to restore

the factory-default name of the selected input and close the

m essage. (Press the ꢃ arrow button to close the m essage

without restoring the factory-default name of the selected input.)

1. Follow the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME menu path to open the

INPUT NAME menu.

2. When the INPUT NAME menu opens, press the remote control ꢁ

and ꢂ arrow buttons to highlight the RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

option.

3-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

ASSIGNING AUDIO an d VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS

The RV-8 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to its eight digital audio, eight analog audio, the built-in tuner, the phono

input, five composite video, five S-Video or three component video input connectors.

DVD1 DIGITAL IN

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

COAX-1

COAX-2

COAX-3

COAX-4

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

NAME

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VCR

AUTO

OPTICAL-1

OPTICAL-2

OPTICAL-3

OPTICAL-4

NONE

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

TUNER

PHONO

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a

MIC

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

The table below indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that

can be used to assign audio and video input connectors. The ANLG

IN LVL parameter can be used to adjust 2-channel analog audio input

levels for the selected input.

DIGITAL IN

COAX-1 TO 4, OPTICAL-1 TO 4, NONE

DVD1

DIGITAL IN

SETUP

INPUTS

Opens the DIGITAL IN menu, which is used to assign a digital audio

input connector for the selected input. The RV-8 has eight config-

urable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its eight digital

audio input connectors.

Parameter

Possible Settings

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

COAX-1 to 4, OPTICAL-1 to 4, NONE

ANALOG-1 to 8, 5.1 ANLG (3-5) or (6-8), PHONO,

TUNER, NONE, LIVE!

Please note the following:

•

When no digital audio input connector is assigned, the RV-8 will

au t o m at ically set t h e MAIN ADV m e n u INPUT SELECT

parameter to ANALOG (see page 3-17).

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

AUTO, –18dB to +12dB

COMPOSITE-1 to 5, S-VIDEO-1 to 5, NONE

COMPONENT IN COMPONENT-1 to 3, VIDEO, NONE

•

A digital audio input connector must be assigned when no

analog audio input connector is assigned. Refer to the next page

for in form ation ab out assig n in g an an alog aud io in p ut

connector.

Note:

The digital audio input connectors are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48,

88.2 and 96kHz), Dolby Digital and DTS (-ES) sources. The digital audio

input connectors are not compatible with MPEG or MP3 sources.

3-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

ASSIGNING AUDIO a nd VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS (continued)

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 ANALOG IN

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

NAME

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

ANALOG-1

ANALOG-2

ANALOG-3

ANALOG-4

ANALOG-5

ANALOG-6

ANALOG-7

ANALOG-8

PHONO

ANALOG-1

ANALOG-2

ANALOG-3

ANALOG-4

ANALOG-5

5.1 ANLG (6-8)

PHONO

TUNER

NONE

LIVE!

ANALOG-1

ANALOG-2

5.1 ANLG (3-5)

5.1 ANLG (6-8)

PHONO

TUNER

NONE

LIVE!

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

5.1a

MIC

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

TUNER

NONE

LIVE!

DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

ANALOG IN

ANALOG-1 to 8, 5.1 ANLG (3-5) or (6-8), PHONO, TUNER, NONE, LIVE!

INPUTS

DVD1

ANALOG IN

SETUP

Opens the ANALOG IN menu, which is used to assign an analog

audio input connector for the selected input. The RV-8 has eight

configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its eight

analog audio input connectors.

Please note the following:

•

When no analog audio input connector is assigned, the RV-8

autom atically sets th e MAIN ADV m en u INPUT SELECT

parameter to DIGITAL (see page 3-17).

The appearance of the ANALOG IN menu depends on the configu-

ration of the analog audio input connectors.

•

An analog audio input connector must be assigned when no

digital audio input connector is assigned. Refer to the previous

page for inform ation about assigning a digital audio input

connector.

•

The ANALOG IN menu (A above) appears when the I/O CONFIG

menu 8 STEREO INPUTS option is selected (see page 3-60).

•

The PHONO input corresponds to the built-in phono

connector.

The ANALOG IN menu (B above) appears when the I/O CONFIG

menu 5 ST. & 5.1 ANLG option is selected (see page 3-61).

The TUNER input corresponds with the internal AM/FM radio

tuner.

The ANALOG IN menu (C above) appears when the I/O

CONFIG menu 2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG option is selected (see

page 3-61).

LIVE! cannot be selected until LIVE! CALIBRATION is run. When

the ANALOG IN selection is LIVE!, the digital input selection is

disabled for this input until a different analog input is selected.

3-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

DVD1 ANLG IN LVL

OFF

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

+0.dB

AUTO

MANUAL

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

NAME

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

-18 to +12dB

VCR

AUTO

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

TUNER

PHONO

AUTO GAIN

-6

-15

-30

+0.0dB

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

-45

5.1a

MIC

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

ANLG IN LVL

AUTO, –18dB to +12dB

SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

ANLG IN LVL

Opens the ANLG IN LVL menu, which is used to adjust the 2-channel

analog audio input levels for the selected input. Despite attempts at

standardization, analog audio sources have a wide range of levels. To

com pensate for this, the RV-8 allows independent input level

adjustment for each of its stereo and multichannel analog audio

input connectors, phono input and the internal tuner. In p ut level

ad just m en t is n ot availab le w h en an alog b yp ass is on .

Note:

Adjustments made in the ANLG IN LVL menu are applied to the analog

audio input connector assigned for the selected input, these adjustments

are automatically applied to the new connector.

Parameter

Possible Settings

AUTO

ON, OFF

MANUAL

AUTO GAIN*

–18 to +12dB

* This parameter cannot be adjusted.

3-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

ASSIGNING AUDIO a nd VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS (continued)

AUTO

ON, OFF

AUTO GAIN

DVD1

AUTO GAIN

SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

ANLG IN LVL

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTS

ANLG IN LVL

Provides automatic adjustment of analog audio input levels. When

set to ON, the RV-8 automatically monitors and optimizes input

levels. When the input signal is too high, the RV-8 quickly decreases

input levels to avoid overload. When the input signal is too low, the

RV-8 slowly increases input levels to maximize signal-to-noise ratio

and dynamic range.

Indicates the current am ount of input level adjustm ent for the

selected analog audio input connector. When the ANLG IN LVL menu

AUTO parameter is ON, the AUTO GAIN parameter indicates the

am ount of autom atic input level adjustm ent. When the AUTO

parameter is OFF, the AUTO GAIN parameter indicates the amount of

manual input level adjustment. (In other words, the AUTO GAIN

parameter reflects the setting of the ANLG IN LVL menu MANUAL

parameter.)

When OFF is selected, the RV-8 does not automatically monitor and

optimize analog audio input levels. Rather, input levels must be

adjusted with the MANUAL parameter (see below).

When the AUTO param eter is ON, the AUTO GAIN param eter

continues to indicate the amount of manual input level adjustment

until automatic adjustments have been made.

MANUAL

–18dB to +12dB

DVD1

ANLG IN LVL

MANUAL

SETUP

INPUTS

LEVEL METERS

DVD1

ANLG IN LVL

SETUP

INPUTS

Provides manual adjustment of analog audio input levels. When

manual adjustments are made, the RV-8 automatically sets the ANLG

IN LVL menu AUTO parameter to OFF, deactivating automatic input

level adjustment. Manual input level adjustments are retained when

the AUTO parameter is ON.

Indicate fluctuating input levels for the selected input. Like the

STATUS menu level meters, ANLG IN LVL menu level meters indicate

input levels for both analog and digital audio sources. However,

ANLG IN LVL menu input level adjustments affect only analog audio

sources.

Note:

When the AUTO parameter is ON, the RV-8 will not make adjustments

that exceed the ANLG IN LVL menu MANUAL parameter setting.

Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow and red when

the on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen background.

Green indicates low levels; yellow indicates normal levels; and red

indicates the onset of overload. Level meters appear in white when

the on-screen display is not configured for a blue-screen background.

3-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

VIDEO IN

COMPOSITE-1 TO 5, S-VIDEO-1 TO 5, NONE

COMPONENT IN

COMPONENT-1 to 3, VIDEO, NONE

DVD1

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

SETUP

INPUTS

SETUP

INPUTS

Opens the VIDEO IN menu, which is used to assign a composite or

S-Video input connector for the selected input. The RV-8 has eight

configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its five

composite or five S-Video input connectors.

Op ens the COMPONENT IN m enu, which is used to assign a

component video input connector for the selected input. The RV-8

has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any

of its three component video input connectors.

Note:

Alternatively, COMPONENT IN can be assigned to VIDEO. This will

cause the composite or S-Video signal selected for the VIDEO IN

parameter to be converted to component input. The NONE setting

shuts off the component output.

Composite video output connectors are available when a composite or

S-Video source is present.

S-Video output connectors are available when an S-Video source is

present.

Note:

When the component is set to NONE, black and blue lines appear on the

screen if the monitor does not have auto-sense.

DVD1 VIDEO IN

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

COMPOSITE-1

COMPOSITE-2

COMPOSITE-3

COMPOSITE-4

COMPOSITE-5

S-VIDEO-1

S-VIDEO-2

S-VIDEO-3

S-VIDEO-4

S-VIDEO-5

NAME

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

5.1a

MIC

NONE

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIGITAL

DVD1 COMPONENT IN

COMPONENT-1

COMPONENT-2

COMPONENT-3

VIDEO

NONE

3-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES

Preferred listening m odes can be pre-selected so that when a

particular type of input source is played, the pre-selected listening

mode is activated.

Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters

2-CH Selects a preferred listening mode for 2-channel sources

Selects a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources

Selects a preferred listening mode for DTS(-ES) sources

Selects a preferred listening mode for 5.1 analog sources

Selects a preferred listening mode for microphone sources (LIVE!)

The RV-8 allows five preferred listening modes for each Main Zone

input: one listening m ode each for 2-channel, Dolby Digital,

DTS(-ES), 5.1a and MIC (LIVE!) sources. The table to the right

indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that can be used to

select preferred listening modes.

5.1a

MIC

Menus showing DVD1 parameters selected as preferred listening modes.

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

NAME

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

DVD1 2-CH MODE

VCR

AUTO

FILM

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLII +

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PL +

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

TUNER

PHONO

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a

MIC

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

PRO LOGIC

DVD1

D MODE

DIGITAL

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HALL

CHURCH

5.1 FILM

5.1 TV

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

2-CH SURROUND

2-CHANNEL

MONO LOGIC

MONO SURROUND

MONO

5.1 MUSIC

DVD1 5.1a MODE

DVD1

MODE

FILM

5.1a

FILM

DIGITAL

5.1a

MUSIC

5.1 2-CHANNEL

5.1 MONO LOGIC

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

HEADPHONE 5.1

USE LAST

MUSIC

DVD1 MIC MODE

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

USE LAST

5.1a STANDARD

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

HEADPHONE 5.1a

USE LAST

2-CHAN

HEADPHONE

USE LAST

HEADPHONE

USE LAST

3-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

When a preferred listening mode is selected, that listening mode is

automatically activated whenever a new input is selected or an

appropriate input source is present. For example, the following can

occur when a preferred listening mode is activated (also refer to the

corresponding menus on 3-12):

Dynamic Listening Modes

Dynamic listening modes are only available under certain conditions.

For example, many of the dynamic modes are only available when

the RV-8 is configured for seven main output channels and source

material with specific encoding is played. All Dynamic Listening

Modes are available through the remote control or front panel Mode

button. The dynamic listening modes are listed in the table below.

If the DVD1 input is selected and a 2-channel source is played, the

L7 FILM listening mode is activated. If a Dolby Digital source is

played, the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode is activated. If a DTS(-ES)

source is played, the DTS(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode is activated.

Dynamic modes

2-Channel

Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby PLIIx + THX

Dolby PLIIx MOV

Dolby PLIIx MUS

DTS NEO:6 + THX

DTS NEO:6 CIN

Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital EX

THX or THX UL2Cin or THX SurEX

THX MUSIC

DTS THX or DTS THX UL2Cin or DTS ES THX

DTS or DTS ES MATRIX or DTS ES DISCR

DTS THX MUSIC

5.1 PLIIx MOV

5.1 PLIIx MUS

DTS L7 FILM or DTS ES L7 FILM

DTS L7 MUSIC or DTS ES L7 MUSIC

DTS 2-CHAN or DTS ES 2-CHAN

DTS NEO:6 MUSIC

Modes that Do Not Appear in the Input Setup Menu

The RV-8 features the ability to assign preferred listening modes for

each input and incoming audio format. However, not all listening

modes will appear in the Input Setup Menu. Listening modes that do

not appear in the Input Setup menu as preferred listening modes

under any circumstances are listed in the table below.

Modes that do not appear in the Input Setup menu

2-Channel

Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby PLIIx + THX

Dolby PLIIx MOV

Dolby PLIIx MUS

DTS NEO:6 + THX

DTS NEO:6 CIN

THX MUSIC

5.1 PLIIx MOV

5.1 PLIIx MUS

DTS THX MUSIC

5.1 MONO LOGIC

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

DTS NEO:6 MUSIC

3-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES (continued)

and a dynamic listening mode (or mode that does not appear in the

input setup menu) is active, the selected dynamic mode is lost when

switching between inputs.

The Use Last Parameter

When the RV-8 is set to use a preferred listening mode for a selected

input, selecting another mode from the Mode scroll list replaces the

preferred selection. However, this newly selected mode will be lost

when switching between inputs.

When USE LAST is selected as the preferred listening mode, and a

dynamic listening mode (or mode that does not appear in the input

setup menu) is active, the selected listening mode is retained when

switching between inputs, even when the RV-8 is set to standby as in

the following example:

The USE LAST parameter was designed to allow the RV-8 software to

“remember” the last used listening mode for a given input source.

Once selected, that mode will always be active on the corresponding

input until another listening mode is selected as demonstrated in the

following example:

1. Select Main Menu

ꢀ

SETUP

ꢀINPUTS

ꢀ

DVD1ꢀ2-CHꢀUSE LAST

2. Press the MENU button.

1. Select Main Menu

ꢀ

SETUP

ꢀINPUTSꢀ

DVD1

ꢀ

USE LAST

3. Press the DVD-1 button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Press the DVD-1 button.

4. Play a DTS input source.

4. Play a 2-channel input source.

5. Press the MODE + button until you reach

PLIIx MOV.

PLIIx MOV is a dynamic listening mode.

5. Press the MODE + button until you reach DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN.

6. Press the TV button

The RV-8 switches to the TV input and the on-screen display

identifies the preferred listening mode.

The RV-8 switches to the TV input and the on-screen display

identifies the preferred listening mode.

7. Press the DVD-1 button.

The on-screen display should identify that the active listening mode

for the DVD1 input is still PLIIx MOV. This is the only method of

setting up a dynamic mode (or mode that does not appear in the

input setup menu) to behave like a preferred listening mode.

The on-screen display should identify that the active listening mode

for the DVD1 input is still DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN. As the DTS(-ES)

2-CHAN mode is a preferred listening mode, it can also be set in

the SETUP menu.

Note:

When seven speakers are selected in the SPEAKER SETUP menu, and

the appropriate source material is played, the dynamic listening

mode (or mode that does not appear in the input setup menu) can

always be accessed using the MODE + or MODE - buttons whether

or not a preferred mode is set. When a preferred listening mode is set

When a dynamic mode (or mode that does not appear in the input setup

menu) is set as in the above example, the setting is retained even when

the RV-8 is set to standby.

3-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

2-CH

DOLBY D

DVD1

SETUP

INPUTS

SETUP

INPUTS

2-CH

Opens the 2-CH MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred

listening mode for 2-channel input sources. The RV-8 activates the

selected listening mode whenever a 2-channel source is present.

Opens the DOLBY DIGITAL MODE menu, which is used to select a

preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital input sources. The RV-8

activates the selected listening m ode whenever a new input is

selected or a new Dolby Digital source is present.

When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST:

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST:

The RV-8 activates the listening mode that was activated the last time

a 2-channel source was present

The RV-8 activates the listening mode that was activated the last time

a Dolby Digital source was present

The remote control 2 CH button toggles between the 2-CHANNEL

listening mode and the previous listening mode, and ignores the USE

LAST setting. Instead, it uses the listening mode (for example, L7

FILM) that was activated before the 2-CHANNEL listening mode.

The RV-8 activates the Dolby PLIIx MOV (Movie) listening mode if

this listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source

was present. Since Dolby PLIIx MOV is a dynamic listening mode, it

cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital

sources.

The RV-8 activates a DTS NEO:6 listening mode if a DTS NEO:6

listening mode was activated the last time a 2-channel source was

present, and a 44.1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source is present. Since

the DTS NEO:6 listening m odes are dynam ic, they cannot be

selected as the preferred listening mode for 2-channel sources.

3-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES (continued)

5.1a

DVD1

5.1a

SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

SETUP

INPUTS

Opens the 5.1a MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred

listening mode for 5.1-channel analog sources. The RV-8 automatically

activates the preferred listening mode whenever a 5.1-channel analog

source is present.

Opens the DTS(-ES) MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred

listening mode for DTS(-ES) input sources. The RV-8 automatically

activates the selected listening mode whenever a new input is selected or

a new DTS(-ES) source is present.

When the 5.1a parameter is set to USE LAST:

When the DTS-ES parameter is set to USE LAST:

The RV-8 activates the 5.1-channel analog listening mode that was

activated the last time a 5.1-channel analog source was present. 5.1a

MUSIC cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for 5.1-

channel analog sources. However, when the 5.1a parameter is set to

USE LAST, the RV-8 will activate 5.1a MUSIC if this listening mode

was activated the last time a 5.1-channel analog source was present.

•

The RV-8 activates the listening mode that was activated the

last time a DTS(-ES) source was present

The RV-8 activates the DTS THX MUSIC listening mode if it was

activated the last time a DTS(-ES) source was present. Since

DTS THX MUSIC is a dynam ic listening m ode, it cannot be

selected as the preferred listening mode for DTS(-ES) sources.

MIC

DVD1

MIC

SETUP

INPUTS

Opens the MIC MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred

listening mode for the LIVE! source. The RV-8 automatically activates

the preferred listening mode when a LIVE! input is selected.

When the MIC parameter is set to USE LAST:

The RV-8 activates the listening mode (LIVE! SMALL, LIVE! MED or

LIVE! LARGE) that was activated the last time a MIC source was

present.

3-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

CONFIGURING ADVANCED INPUT SETTINGS

DVD1 MAIN ADV

DIGITAL

ANALOG

AUTO

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

DIGITAL

OFF

AUTO

OFF

FAST

INPUT SELECT

ANALOG BYPASS

S-VIDEO 16:9

S-VIDEO OSD 4:3

COMPONENT OSD

LEGACY VIDEO

FORMAT DETECT

NAME

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

AUTO

OFF

AUTO

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

OFF

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a

MIC

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIGITAL

ANGL

DMIX

NORMAL

FAST

DIGITAL

MAIN ADVANCED

INPUT SELECT

DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTO

DVD1

MAIN ADVANCED

SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

MAIN ADVANCED

INPUT SELECT

SETUP

INPUTS

Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu MAIN ADVANCED option opens

the MAIN ADV menu shown above. The parameters on the left side

of this menu are identical, regardless of which input is selected. The

settings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter settings

differ from input to input.

Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input

connectors assigned to the current Main Zone input. The INPUT

SETUP menu is used to assign one digital and one analog audio input

connector for the selected input. The tab l e o n page 3-19 describes

INPUT SELECT parameter settings.

Note:

Parameter

Possible Settings

When the INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO, the RV-8 will not select

the assigned analog audio input connector when a valid digital audio

input source is present. Some DVD and CD players output digital signals

(data) when the player is paused or stopped or when the player is

powered on and the disc drawer is empty. When this occurs, the RV-8

automatically selects the assigned digital audio input connector.

INPUT SELECT

DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTO

ON, OFF

ANLOG BYPASS

S-VIDEO 16:9

AUTO, OFF

ON, OFF

S-VIDEO OSD 4:3

COMPONENT OSD

LEGACY VIDEO

FORMAT DETECT

ON, OFF

A, B

NORMAL, FAST

3-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

CONFIGURING ADVANCE INPUT SETTINGS (continued)

ANALOG BYPASS

ON, OFF

S-VIDEO 16:9

AUTO, OFF

SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

MAIN ADVANCED

ANALOG BYPASS

SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

MAIN ADVANCED

S-VIDEO 16:9

When set to ON, the RV-8 passes the analog input signal to the Main

Zone audio output connectors. For stereo analog sources, the input is

sent to the FRONT L/R outputs. For a 5.1-channel analog source, the

(L) input is sent to the FRONT L output. The (R) input is sent to the

FRONT R output. The (C) input is sent to the center output. The

(SUB) input is sent to the SUB output. The (LS) input is sent to the

SIDE L and REAR L outputs. The (RS) input is sent to the SIDE R and

REAR R outputs. When ANALOG BYPASS is set to OFF, the unit routes

the analog input signal through A/D conversion. This m akes it

possible to utilize internal processing, including listening modes,

crossovers and equalization. Neither Zone 2 nor Zone 3 provide

multichannel outputs. If the 5.1-channel analog input is selected for

Zone 2 or Zone 3, only the front left and right (L)/(R) inputs will be

available.

Controls the passage of anamorphic trigger signals present in some

video sources. When set to AUTO, the RV-8 allows anamorphic video

input signals to pass through the S-Video switcher, enabling

com p atib le d isp lay d evices to autom atically switch b etween

anamorphic and non-anamorphic display modes.

When OFF, the RV-8 prevents anamorphic video input signals from

passing through the S-Video switcher, preventing com patible

display devices from automatically switching between anamorphic

and non-anamorphic display modes.

When LIVE! is the selected analog input, the MAIN ADVANCED ꢀ

INPUT SELECT param eter is forced to ANALOG, and ANALOG

BYPASS is disabled.

Note:

If the Main Zone source is 5.1 analog, only the Front L/R channels will be

sent to the Zone 2 S/PDIF outputs.

3-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

INPUT SELECT PARAMETER SETTINGS

DIGITAL

ANALOG

AUTO

The RV-8 sends the assigned digital audio The RV-8 sends the assigned analog audio input The RV-8 toggles between sending the assigned

input connector to the Main Zone audio connector to the Main Zone audio output digital and analog audio input connectors to the

output connectors. The RV-8 ignores the connectors. The RV-8 ignores the digital audio Main Zone audio output connectors, based on the

assigned analog audio input connector.

input connector.

input source that is present.

Note the following:

For example:

•

The digital audio input connectors

are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48,

88.2 and 96kHz), Dolby Digital and

DTS(-ES) sources.

•

The RV-8 automatically sets the INPUT

SELECT parameter to ANALOG when the

DIGITAL IN parameter is set to NONE.

•

When a 2-channel PCM, Dolby Digital or

DTS(-ES) so u rce is p re se n t , t h e RV-8

automatically selects the assigned digital

audio input connector.

•

The ANALOG IN parameter can be used to

assign an analog audio input connector

for the selected input.

When an SACD^TMsource is present, the RV-

8 automatically selects the assigned analog

audio input connector.

The digital audio input connectors

are not com patible with MPEG or

MP3 sources. If an in com p atib le

digital audio source (e.g., MPEG or

MP3) is present, the RV-8 automati-

cally selects the assig ned analog

audio input connector.

Note the following:

•

The RV-8 automatically sets the INPUT SELECT

parameter to AUTO when both digital and

analog audio input connectors are assigned.

•

The RV-8 automatically sets the

INPUT SELECT parameter to DIGITAL

when the ANALOG IN parameter is

set to NONE.

When no compatible digital source is

present, the RV-8 automatically selects the

assigned analog audio input connector.

•

If ANALOG IN is set to NONE, the

RV-8 will mute.

The AUTO setting is recommended for

components that generate both digital and

analog input signals, such as DVD/SACD

players.

The DIGITAL IN parameter can be

used to assign a digital audio input

connector for the selected input.

3-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

CONFIGURING ADVANCE INPUT SETTINGS (continued)

S-VIDEO OSD 4:3

ON, OFF

COMPONENT OSD

ON, OFF

DVD1

S-VIDEO OSD 4-3

DVD1

COMPONENT OSD

MAIN ADVANCED

SETUP

INPUTS

SETUP

INPUTS

Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display

device is connected to an S-Video output connector. When set to

ON, the display device shows the on-screen display in a 4:3 aspect

ratio, regardless of the incoming signal.

Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display

device is connected to the component video output connector.

When ON, the display device shows the on-screen display as a 480i

video signal on a full blue-screen background. To minimize viewing

distractions, the two-line status does not appear in the on-screen

display. When OFF, the display device does not show the on-screen

display, including the two-line status.

Aspect ratio refers to the ratio between the height and width of the

picture on the display device or to the ratio between the height and

width of the display device. A 4:3 aspect ratio is almost square. A

16:9 aspect ratio, often referred to as “widescreen,” is almost twice as

wide as it is high.

Note:

When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu BACKGROUND parameter is OFF,

the display device using the component video output connector will not

show the on-screen display.

When OFF, the display device shows the on-screen display in the

same aspect ratio as the incoming video input signal.

Note:

The on-screen display appears horizontally stretched across the display

device screen when all of the following conditions are present:

•

The S-VIDEO OSD 4:3 parameter is OFF.

An anamorphic video input signal is present.

A 16:9 display device (widescreen) is connected to an S-Video

output connector.

3-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

LEGACY VIDEO

A, B

ZONE2 IN

DIGITAL, ANLG, DMIX

DVD1

LEGACY VIDEO

SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

ZONE2 IN

SETUP

INPUTS

MAIN ADVANCED

When video played back from a VCR is converted to component

video by the RV-8, the resulting picture quality depends on both the

quality of the VCR playback and the capabilities of the component

display device. The LEGACY VIDEO menu item has two selections, A

and B. Use the one that gives the best picture for the Combination of

the VCR and display device.

Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input

connectors assigned to the current Zone 2 inputs. The INPUT SETUP

m enu can be used to assign one digital and one analog input

connector for the selected input. See page 3-7 for more information.

The table on the next page describes ZONE2 IN parameter settings.

Note:

Not e

Some combinations of VCR and display device may not produce a

satisfactory picture with either setting. In such cases, better results may be

achieved by connecting to the display device via composite or S-video.

When using DTS-encoded discs, set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX.

When the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DIGITAL, the unit recognizes

DTS-encoded discs as audio signals (not data signals) and outputs

loud digital noise from the ZONE2 analog and digital audio outputs.

For maximum flexibility with Dolby Digital and DTS (-ES) sources:

FORMAT DETECT

NORMAL, FAST

DVD1

FORMAT DETECT

SETUP

INPUTS

MAIN ADVANCED

1. Select a Main Zone DIGITAL IN connector.

2. Set the ZONE2 IN parameter to ANLG.

Controls how the RV-8 reacts when it detects silence in the digital

audio stream. Digital sources typically output a short period of silence

when switching between sources.

3. Connect the digital and analog outputs on the DVD player to the

corresponding digital and analog inputs on the RV-8.

When set to NORMAL, the RV-8 will not m ute when silence is

detected. This setting is appropriate for most sources.

The unit will use the digital connector for the Main Zone, and the

analog connectors for Zone 2.

When set to FAST, the RV-8 will mute when approximately 2ms of

continuous digital silence is detected. Once valid audio is received,

the RV-8 will configure its processing and deactivate mute. This

prevents digital noise from occurring during digital audio signal

changes. For example, when switching from Dolby Digital to DTS.

Use this setting if audible noise occurs during input digital format

changes.

3-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

ZONE2 IN PARAMETER SETTINGS

DIGITAL

ANLG (Analog)

DMIX (Downmix)

•

The RV-8 automatically sets

the ZONE2 IN parameter to

DIGITAL when the ANALOG

IN parameter is set to NONE.

•

The ANALOG IN connector

specified in the INPUT SETUP

m enu is sent to the ZONE 2

ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO

OUTPUTS.

•

Set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX to send a downmixed

version of Main Zone audio to the Zone 2 audio output

connectors. Downmixes can be generated for Dolby Digital,

DTS(-ES) and 5.1a sources.

The RV-8 sends the assigned

DIGITAL IN c o n n e c t o r

specified in the INPUT SETUP

m e n u t o t h e ZO N E 2

ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO

OUTPUTS.

•

To generate a downmix, the same input must be selected in

the Main Zone and Zone 2. Otherwise, the Zone 2 audio

output connectors will mute.

•

Only Front L/R Audio will be

available in Zone 2 when one

o f th e 5 .1 an alo g in p uts is

selected for the Main Zone.

Main Zone listening mode activation affects the Zone 2 audio

output connectors. For instance, when the MONO listening

mode is activated in the Main Zone, the Zone 2 audio output

connectors will generate mono output signals.

•

Only PCM digital input

sources are compatible with

ZO N E 2 a n a lo g a u d io

outputs. Dolby Digital and

DTS sources are compatible

with the Zone 2 digital audio

output when the DIG BYPASS

parameter is set to ON.

•

It is recommended that you set the ZONE2 IN parameter to

DMIX when recording from a DVD player without built-in

Dolby Digital or DTS-ES decoding to a VCR or PVR (e.g. Tivo®

or Replay TV®).

A 2-channel downmixed version of Main Zone audio is sent to

th e ZO NE 2 ANALO G an d DIGITAL AUDIO O UTPUTS.

Downmixes can be generated for Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) and

5.1 analog input sources. To generate a downmix, the input

that is selected in Zone 2 must also be selected in the Main

Zone (e.g., DVD1). Otherwise, the ZONE 2 ANALOG and

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTS will mute. Downmixes cannot be

generated when the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is selected in

the Main Zone.

Audio will not be available in

Zone 2 analog outputs when

a Dolby Digital, DTS (-ES) or

unknown digital input source

is present.

3-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

ZONE2 ADVANCED

SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

ZONE2 ADVANCED

Opens the ZONE2 IN menu, which is used to configure advanced

DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

+0dB

ANLG IN LVL

DIGITAL BYPASS

DIG OUT RATE

RECORD

NAME

DVD1

COAX-1

NONE

OFF

44.1kHz

ENABLED

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VCR

AUTO

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

TUNER

PHONO

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1a

MIC

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

DIGITAL

ZONE2 ADVANCED

ANLG IN LVL

-18 to +12dB

Parameter

Possible Settings

SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

ZONE2 ADVANCED

ANLG IN LVL

DIGITAL BYPASS

DIG OUT RATE

RECORD

-18dB to + 12dB

ON, OFF

Allows adjustment of analog audio input levels for input signals sent

to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors. The RV-8 applies these

adjustments to input signals before passing them to the Zone 2

digital audio output connectors. This parameter can be adjusted

when an input source is present to prevent the internal A/D converter

from overloading.

96kHz, 88.2kHz, 48kHz, 44.1kHz

BLOCKED, ENABLED

3-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

DIGITAL BYPASS

ON, OFF

RECORD

BLOCKED, ENABLED

SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

ZONE2 ADVANCED

SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIGITAL BYPASS

RECORD

Allows digital sources to bypass decoding for direct digital recording.

When ON is selected, the RV-8 passes digital input signals directly to

the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors, preserving the original

format of the input signal. This would be useful if you want to send a

multichannel-encoded signal to a second device for decoding. When

OFF is selected and the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DIGITAL, Dolby

Digital and DTS sources will not be passed to the Zone 2 digital audio

outputs. When OFF is selected and a PCM source is present, the RV-8

will send the PCM aud io to the Zone 2 d ig ital aud io outp ut

connectors. If a Dolby Digital or DTS source is present and the

ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DMIX, a downmix of the source will be

sent to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors.

Prevents recording device feedback loops. When BLOCKED is

selected, the RV-8 blocks the Zone 2 audio output connectors to

prevent feedback loops. However, the RV-8 still passes video input

signals to the Zone 2 video output connectors. When ENABLED is

selected, the RV-8 passes audio and video input signals to the Zone 2

audio and video output connectors.

DIG OUT RATE

96kHz, 88.2kHz, 48kHz, 44.1kHz

SETUP

INPUTS

DVD1

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DIG OUT RATE

Controls the sample rate of analog input signals sent to the Zone 2

digital audio output connectors.

When a value is selected, the RV-8 runs the Zone 2 A/D converters at

the selected sample rate. It is recommended to set the DIG OUT RATE

parameter to the appropriate value when using a recording format

that operates on a single sample rate, such as CD-R format (44.1kHz).

Note:

DIG OUT RATE only affects analog input signals. It does not change the

sample rate of digital input signals, or downmixed signals.

3-24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

SPEAKER SETUP

SETUP

SPEAKERS

Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu to configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup. The Main Zone includes eight

audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R.

CROSSOVER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

MANUAL

80Hz

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

80Hz

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

80Hz

SUB

80Hz

Note:

SETTING CROSSOVER POINTS

It is important to set crossover points before calibrating output levels or

LIVE!. Setting crossover points afterwards could invalidate calibrated out-

put levels and will invalidate the LIVE! calibration.

SETUP

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu SET CROSSOVERS option opens

the CROSSOVER SETUP menu, which is used to configure a custom

or THX setup.

3-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

CUSTOM SPEAKER SETUPS

Selecting the CROSSOVER SETUP menu CUSTOM SETUP option opens the CUSTOM SETUP menu, which assigns independent crossover points for

each Main Zone audio output connector. Possible crossover settings include FULL, FULL + SUB, and 10Hz increments within a 30Hz to 120Hz

range. The graphs shown on the next page indicate the frequency response of each crossover point.

CUSTOM SETUP

CROSSOVER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

SUBWOOFER

ULTRA2 SUB

BGC

40 Hz

60 Hz

40 Hz

OFF

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGES

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

MANUAL

80Hz

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

N/A

APART

80Hz

ASA

SUB

SL RL

80Hz

To configure a custom speaker setup:

In a custom setup, low frequencies are generally redirected from

speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the

lowest crossover points. Signals lower than the lowest crossover point

are redirected to the subwoofer. If the lowest crossover point is FULL,

low-frequency signals, excluding LFE information, are not redirected

to the subwoofer.

•

Select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of

the associated speakers. For exam ple, set the FRONT L/ R

parameter to the crossover point closest to the low-frequency

rating of the front speakers.

•

Select the subwoofer crossover point equal to the lowest

crossover point of any of the other speakers. For example, if

CUSTOM SETUP menu parameters are set as shown above, set

the SUBWOOFER parameter to 40Hz – the lowest crossover

point of the other speakers.

Low frequencies between the Subwoofer and any or all of the other

speaker channels can be duplicated. To do this, select the FULL + SUB

crossover setting for the front, center, side or rear speakers. Making

this selection can result in excessive bass.

3-26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

In general, low frequencies will be redirected from speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the lowest crossover points. Low-

frequency signals lower than the lowest crossover point will be redirected to the subwoofer. If the lowest crossover point is FULL, low frequency

signals, excluding LFE information, will not be redirected to the subwoofer.

High-Pass Filter

Low-Pass Filter

High-pass filters attenuate low frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph

above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the

curves represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz. The graph above does not

show the THX 80Hz crossover point, which is 12dB per octave.

Low-pass filters attenuate high frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph

above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the

curves represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz.

3-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

THX SPEAKER SETUPS

Selecting THX SETUP opens the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen, which indicates that pressing the ꢀarrow button will automatically configure the Main

Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup. Use THX-certified speakers in a THX speaker setup.

THX SPEAKER SETUP

THX SETUP

CROSSOVER SETUP

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

!CAUTION!

FRONT L/R*

CENTER*

SIDE L/R*

REAR L/R

THX 80 Hz

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

PRESSING THE RIGHT

BUTTON WILL

AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE

THE OUTPUTS TO A THX

SPEAKER

MANUAL

80Hz

SUBWOOFER* THX 80 Hz

80Hz

ULTRA2 SUB

BGC

ASA

OFF

N/A

APART

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

CONFIGURATION

80Hz

SUB

SL RL

80Hz

SL RL

80Hz

* These parameters cannot be

adjusted.

80Hz

Selecting THX SETUP opens the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen, which

indicates that pressing the ꢀarrow button will automatically configure

the Main Zone audio output connectors for a THX speaker setup. Use

THX-certified speakers in a THX speaker setup.

When a THX speaker setup is selected, the RV-8 applies a THX 80Hz

crossover point with a 12dB-per-octave filter to the Front L/R, Center,

Side L/R and Rear L/R output connectors. The RV-8 applies a THX

80Hz crossover point with a 24dB-per-octave filter to the Subwoofer

output connector.

When the THX SPEAKER SETUP screen opens:

Notes:

•

Press theꢀarrow button to configure the Main Zone audio

output connectors for a THX speaker setup. The THX SETUP

menu will open on the in-screen display.

•

A THX speaker setup is not required to activate THX listening

modes.

•

In the THX SETUP menu, only the REAR L/R, THX ULTRA2 SUB,

BGC and ASA parameters can be changed.

•

Press theꢃarrow button to close the message without config-

uring the Main Zone aud io outp ut connectors for a THX

speaker setup.

3-28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS

SETUP

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

SETUP

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

The table below indicates the speaker setup parameters for config-

uring the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker

setup. These parameters are available in the CUSTOM SETUP and

THX SETUP menus.

Speaker setup parameters perform the same function regardless of

the selected speaker setup. When a parameter setting is adjusted on

one menu, the corresponding parameter setting is automatically

adjusted on the other menu. For example, when a THX speaker setup

is selected, the crossover settings on the CUSTOM SETUP menu are

set to THX 80Hz.

CUSTOM SETUP Menu

THX SETUP Menu

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

Default Setting

Possible Settings

THX 80Hz

FRONT L/R*

CENTER*

SIDE L/R*

REAR L/R

SUBWOOFER*

THX ULTRA2 SUB

BGC

80Hz

OFF

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE

FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE

ON, OFF

THX 80Hz

OFF

THX 80Hz

THX 80Hz, NONE

THX 80Hz

ON, OFF

N/A†

APART

ON, OFF

N/A†

ON, OFF

ASA

APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER

APART

APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER

* These parameters cannot be adjusted on the THX SETUP menu.

† When the THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF, the BGC parameter is not available (N/A).

3-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS (continued)

CUSTOM SETUP

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

CROSSOVER SETUP

MAIN MENU

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

SUBWOOFER

ULTRA2 SUB

BGC

40Hz

60Hz

40Hz

OFF

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

MANUAL

80Hz

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

80Hz

N/A

APART

ASA

80Hz

SUB

SL RL

80Hz

SUBWOOFER

REAR L/R SPEAKERS

SIDE L/R SPEAKERS

CENTER SPEAKER

FRONT L/R SPEAKERS

FULL

30Hz

40Hz

50Hz

FULL + SUB

30Hz

40Hz

FULL + SUB

30Hz

40Hz

FULL + SUB

30Hz

40Hz

FULL + SUB

30Hz

40Hz

50Hz

60Hz

70Hz

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

80Hz

THX80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

3-30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

FRONT L/R

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120HZ, THX 80HZ

CENTER

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120HZ, THX 80HZ, NONE

SETUP

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

CUSTOM SETUP

CENTER

SETUP

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

CUSTOM SETUP

FRONT L/R

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector

labeled CENTER when a custom speaker setup is selected. Opens the

CENTER SPEAKER menu to select a crossover point for the CENTER

output connector.

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors

labeled Front L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected. Opens the

FRONT L/R SPEAKERS menu to select a crossover point for the Front

L/R output connectors.

•

Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the front speakers.

Otherwise, select the crossover p oint closest to the low-

frequency rating of the front speakers.

•

Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the center speaker.

Otherwise, select the crossover p oint closest to the low-

frequency rating of the center speaker.

•

Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the front

speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.

(The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the

upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB

option can result in excessive bass.

•

Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the center

speaker and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output. (The

set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the upper

range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB option can

result in excessive bass.

•

When the speaker setup does not include a center speaker, select

NONE to redirect center channel signals to the Front L/R output

connectors – unless the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated. In

this case, configure the speaker setup with the associated DVD-A/

SACD player to redirect center channel signals.

SET CROSSOVERS

THX SETUP

SETUP

SPEAKERS

When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point is

applied to the Front L/R output connectors, and the FRONT L/R

parameter cannot be adjusted.

SET CROSSOVERS

THX SETUP

SETUP

SPEAKERS

When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point is

applied to the Center output connector, and the CENTER parameter

cannot be adjusted.

3-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS (continued)

SIDE L/R

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE

REAR L/R

FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE

SETUP

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

CUSTOM SETUP

SIDE L/R

SETUP

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

CUSTOM SETUP

REAR L/R

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors

labeled SIDE L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected.

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors

labeled REAR L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected.

•

Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the side speakers.

Otherwise, select the crossover p oint closest to the low-

frequency rating of the side speakers.

•

Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the rear speakers.

Otherwise, select the crossover p oint closest to the low-

frequency rating of the rear speakers.

•

Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the side

speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.

(The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the

upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB option

can result in excessive bass.

•

Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the rear

speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.

(The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the

upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB option

can result in excessive bass.

•

When the speaker setup does not include side speakers, select

NONE to redirect side channel signals to the Rear L/R output

connectors. If the REAR L/R parameter is also set to NONE, the

RV-8 will redirect surround channel signals to the Front L/R

output connectors.

•

When the speaker setup does not include rear speakers, select NONE

to redirect rear channel signals to the Side L/R output connectors. If

the SIDE L/R parameter is also set to NONE, the RV-8 redirects

surround channel signals to the Front L/R output connectors.

Note:

When the REAR L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby Digital Surround EX,

THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, PLIIx modes, DTS(-ES) decoding and the ASA

parameter are not available.

When the SIDE L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby Digital Surround

EX, THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, DTS(-ES) decoding, the ASA

parameter and PLIIx modes are not available.

SETUP

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

THX SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

THX SETUP

SETUP

SPEAKERS

When THX speaker setup is selected, the THX REAR SPEAKERS menu opens

which is used to activate or deactivate the REAR L/R output connectors.

When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point is

app lied to the SIDE L/ R output connectors, and the SIDE L/ R

parameter cannot be adjusted.

To activate and configure the Rear L/R output connectors for a

7.1-channel THX speaker, setup select THX 80Hz. To deactivate the

Rear L/R output connectors and configure the Main Zone audio output

connectors for a 5.1-channel THX speaker setup, select NONE.

3-32

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

SPEAKER SETUP

CROSSOVER SETUP

SUBWOOFER

SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

MAIN MENU

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

SUBWOOFER

ULTRA2 SUB

BGC

40Hz

60Hz

40Hz

OFF

FULL

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

30Hz

40Hz

50Hz

60Hz

70Hz

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

MANUAL

60Hz

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

60Hz

40Hz

N/A

APART

ASA

60Hz

SUB

SL RL

60Hz

40Hz

SUBWOOFER

FULL, 30 TO 120 Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE

SETUP

SPEAKERS

SET CROSSOVERS

THX SETUP

SUBWOOFER

Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector

labeled Subwoofer. When set to FULL, the RV-8 sends a full-range

audio output signal to this connector. Otherwise, the RV-8 activates a

crossover point at the selected setting. Choose the setting equal to

the lowest setting of the other speakers.

Note:

When the SUBWOOFER parameter is set to NONE, subwoofer signals

will not be redirected if the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated. To

redirect subwoofer signals, configure the speaker setup with the

associated DVD-A/SACD player.SETUP

MAIN MENU

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

SETUP

INPUTS

3-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS (continued)

SPEAKER SETUP

CROSSOVER SETUP

SETUP

MAIN MENU

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

INPUTS

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGERS

MANUAL

60Hz

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

60Hz

40Hz

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

60Hz

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

SUB

40Hz

SL RL

60Hz

40Hz

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SPEAKER SETUP

THX SETUP

FRONT L/R*

CENTER*

SIDE L/R*

REAR L/R

OFF

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

SUBWOOFER

ULTRA2 SUB

BGC

40 Hz

60 Hz

40 Hz

OFF

THX 80Hz

!CAUTION!

PRESSING THE

BUTTON WILL

APART

TOGETHER

AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE

THE OUTPUTS TO A THX

SPEAKER CONFIGURATION

SUBWOOFER* THX 80Hz

ULTRA2 SUB

BGC

ASA

OFF

N/A

APART

N/A

APART

ASA

* These parameters cannot be

adjusted.

THX ULTRA2 SUB

ON, OFF

SETUP

SPEAKERS

CUSTOM SETUP

ULTRA2 SUB

SETUP

SPEAKERS

THX SETUP

ULTRA2 SUB

Indicates whether or not the subwoofer connected to the Main Zone

audio output connector labeled Subwoofer is Ultra2-certified. Select

the ON setting if the connected subwoofer is Ultra2-certified and the

OFF setting if the connected subwoofer is not Ultra2-certified. When

set to ON, the CUSTOM and THX SETUP menu BGC parameter can

be used to adjust boundary gain compensation. When set to OFF, the

BGC parameter is not available (N/A).

3-34

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

BGC (BOUNDARY GAIN COMPENSATION)

ON, OFF

ASA (ADVANCED SPEAKER ARRAY) APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER

SETUP

SPEAKERS

SETUP

SPEAKERS

BGC

ASA

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

Adjusts boundary gain compensation when the CUSTOM and THX

SETUP menu THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to ON. When the

BGC parameter is set to ON, a highpass 55Hz filter is applied to all

audio output connectors for all Main Zone listening modes. When set

to OFF, no filter is applied to Main Zone listening modes and audio

output connectors. When the parameter setting is N/A, the THX

ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF, and boundary gain compen-

sation cannot be adjusted.

A proprietary THX technology that processes signals sent to the rear

speakers, optimizing the listening experience for THX Ultra2 listening

modes. To maximize the effectiveness of ASA processing, it is recom-

mended that you configure a 7-channel speaker setup in which the

rear speakers are placed close together facing the center of the

listening space. The ASA parameter is not available unless the 5.1

THX ULTRA2, 5.1 THX MUSIC, DTS THX ULTRA2 or DTS THX

MUSIC listening mode is activated.

Note:

Select the TOGETHER setting if the distance between the rear

speakers is less than 1 foot (0.3m). Select the CLOSE setting if the

distance between the rear speakers is greater than 1 foot (0.3m), but

less than 4 feet (1.2m). Select the APART setting if the distance

between the rear speakers is greater than 4 feet (1.2m).

BGC compensates for increased bass energy that is caused by the

proximity of the speakers to the listening room walls.

Note:

ASA processing is only available when both side and rear speakers are

present.

When the remote control 7/5 button is used to toggle between 7 and

5-channel playback:

•

ASA processing is not available during 5-channel playback.

The RV-8 automatically switches between the 5.1 THX ULTRA2

and 5.1 THX or DTS THX ULTRA2 and DTS THX listening modes.

3-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION

The RV-8 offers automatic calibration of speaker distances, output level, or both. The table below indicates available automatic calibration options.

A successful microphone check is required before automatic calibration can be performed.

Automatic Options

Details

MICROPHONE CHECK

•

Confirms that the microphones are properly connected and functioning.

Calculates an average level for the microphones connected to the microphone input connectors,

allowing the RV-8 to compensate for individual microphone sensitivities during automatic calibration.

•

Ensures that microphone levels are consistent, eliminating automatic calibration errors from individual

microphone levels.

DISTANCES & LEVELS

•

Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances and output levels.

Offers accurate calibration with minimal interaction, automatically applying calibrated speaker distances

and output levels.

•

Calibrates speaker distances within 0.5 foot (.15m) of the physical distance between the primary listening

position and the speaker.

Calibrates individual speaker output levels within +/–0.5dB of each other and overall speaker output

levels within +/–3.0dB of THX reference levels (75dB).

DISTANCES

LEVELS

•

Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances.

Provides a comparison between original and calibrated speaker distances, allowing selection of the

desired values.

•

Calibrates speaker distances within 0.5 foot (.15m) of the physical distance between the primary listening

position and the speaker.

•

Activates automatic calibration of output levels.

Provides a comparison between original and calibrated output levels, allowing selection of the desired

values.

•

Calibrates individual speaker output levels within +/–0.5dB of each other and overall speaker output

levels within +/–3.0dB of THX reference levels (75dB).

3-36

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

CONNECTING THE MICROPHONES

To connect the microphones:

CAUTION!

•

The microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit

require careful handling. Dropping or otherwise physically

abusing the microphones might cause errors during use or

irreparable damage to the microphones.

4. Make sure the RV-8 is powered off OR in standby mode.

5. Connect the microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit

to the microphone input connectors on the RV-8 rear panel. Make

sure the m icrophone cable plug is fully inserted for a solid

connection.

•

The microphone wires also require careful handling. Do not

sharply bend the wires or place objects on them.

During the microphone check, the microphones will be

referred to as 1 or 2, based on the input connector to which

the microphone is connected. You should label the micro-

phones for troubleshooting purposes.

Never make or break microphone input connections unless

the RV-8 is powered off with the rear-panel power switch,

OR st an d b y m o d e is act ivat e d w it h t h e fro n t -p an e l o r

remote control standby button.

6. Power on the RV-8 or deactivate standby mode.

Note the following:

•

Automatic calibration requires the microphones included in the

Lexicon Microphone Kit, available at authorized Lexicon dealers.

Performing automatic calibration with microphones other than

those in the kit will produce unpredictable results.

•

Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving the

desired automatic calibration results. Pay particular attention to

the microphone placement instructions and illustrations included

in this section.

•

It is important to read and observe the care and handling

documentation included with the Lexicon Microphone Kit to

ensure optimal microphone performance.

If power is lost during automatic calibration of speaker levels or

speaker distances, previous settings may be lost and recali-

bration of speaker levels and speaker distances is required.

3-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR THE MICROPHONE CHECK

Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin below to position the microphones for the microphone check.

PROPER

microphone positioning for the microphone check

During the m icrophone check, position

the microphones:

3 As close together as possible

3 Relatively centered between and equidistant from

the front left and right speakers

Rear

Left

3 In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers

Side

Left

Rear

3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other

fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration

noise signals

Right

3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and

Side

Right

walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers

The illustration to the right provides an example of

proper microphone placement during the microphone

check. All of the microphones are positioned as close

together as possible in an unobstructed location that is

equidistant from the front left and right speakers.

Front

Left

Microphone

Center

Subwoofer

Front

Right

3-38

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

IMPROPER

microphone positioning for the microphone check

During the microphone check, DO NOT:

Separate the microphones

Scatter the microphones throughout the listening

space

Obstruct the line-of-sight path between the micro-

phones and the speakers

Rear

Left

Position the microphones on the floor, on seat

cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture and

other fixtures, where echoes m ight obscure

calibration noise signals

Side

Left

Rear

Right

Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of

speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)

from any one speaker

Side

Right

Front

Left

The illustration to the right provides an example of

improper microphone placement during the microphone

check. The microphones are scattered throughout the

listening space rather than positioned as close together as

possible in a location that is equidistant from the front left

and right speakers.

Microphone

Center

Subwoofer

Front

Right

3-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

CHECKING THE MICROPHONES

GROUP MI

INTO A BU

MIDDLE O

60 Hz

PRESS 40TO EGIN

MIC C CK

HONES

OPHONES

DL IN THE

TH ROOM

SPEAKER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

N/A

APART

Note the following:

•

The RV-8 outputs calibration noise signals between 55dB and

2. The first CHECK MICROPHONES screen opens in the on-screen

display, indicating the im portance of prop er m icrophone

placement to achieve accurate automatic calibration results.

95dB, beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB increments

un til th e m icrop h on es d etect th e req uired level. If th e

calibration noise signal becomes too loud, press the ꢃ arrow

button to cancel the microphone check.

3. Press the ꢀ arrow button to begin the microphone check. The

following screens appears in the on-screen display as the micro-

phone check is performed:

•

Although the calibration noise signal is output at a fixed volume

level, you should set all volume controls for associated compo-

nents (i.e., speakers, subwoofers and power amplifiers) to a

reasonable level before perform ing autom atic calibration.

When the procedure is finished, the RV-8 automatically reverts

to the last volume level that was selected before automatic

calibration began.

CHECKING FOR SILENCE

Appears in the on-screen display while

HONES

the RV-8 determines the relative noise

level of the listening space and the

internal noise level of the microphones.

After eliminating microphones that are

CHECKING FOR SILENCE

PLEASE WAIT

•

During automatic calibration, you should refer to the on-screen

display instead of the front-panel display, as additional infor-

mation and instructions are available in the on-screen display.

not detected or not functioning, the RV-8 calculates an average

level for all microphones.

1. Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu CHECK MICROPHONES option,

as shown above.

3-40

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

CHECKING MICROPHONES

4. Press the ꢁ and ꢂarrow buttons to highlight the desired micro-

phone parameter. The RV-8 refers to the microphones according

to the input connector to which the microphone is connected.

Appears in the on-screen display while

the RV-8 confirms the microphone level

calculated during the silence check. To

do this, the RV-8 sends alternating

calibration noise signals to the front left

and right speakers. These signals are output between 55dB and

95dB, beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB increments

until the microphones detect the required level. If the signal

becomes too loud, press the ꢃ arrow button to cancel the

microphone check.

HONES

CHECKING MICROPHONES

5. Press the ꢀ arrow button to view more detailed results for the

selected microphone. A message similar to the one shown at the

bottom of the previous column opens in the on-screen display.

Refer to the table on the next page for information about all

possible microphone check messages.

PLEASE WAIT

Note the following:

•

The RV-8 retains the calculated microphone level until the

SPEAKER SETUP m enu is closed. Once this m enu is closed,

another m icrop hone check is req uired b efore autom atic

calibration can be performed.

The RV-8 uses the calibration noise signal to eliminate micro-

phones that register the signal at a level that is too low or too

high. Then, the RV-8 determines the appropriate output level for

the calibration noise signal used during automatic calibration.

Optional microphone kits that include two microphones are

available. Perform automatic calibration with two microphones

that have passed the microphone check.

CHECK MICROPHONES Results

However, the RV-8 will perform automatic calibration as long as

at least one microphone passes the microphone check. In this

circumstance, place the successfully checked microphone in the

primary listening position.

Appears in the on-screen display when the RV-8 is finished

checking the microphones. This display indicates the individual

check results for each microphone.

•

If a microphone check was successful, do not disconnect the

microphones from the microphone input connectors. If the

microphones are disconnected, you should perform the micro-

phone check again before proceeding to automatic calibration.

•

An OK result indicates that the microphone passed the

microphone check.

An ERROR result indicates that the microphone did not pass

the microphone check.

CHECK MICROPHONES

(MICROPHONE)

MIC 1

MIC 2

ERROR

PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

3-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

CHECKING THE MICROPHONES (continued)

Message

Description

Troubleshooting

The microphone detected the calibration

noise signal without error.

•

N/A

(MICROPHONE)

The RV-8 did not detect the microphone

during the silence check.

•

Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con-

nected to the RV-8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.

(MICROPHONE)

NOT DETECTED

The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.

The RV-8 detected the microphone dur-

ing the silence check. However, the

microphone level determined during the

silence check was not confirmed during

the microphone check.

Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con-

nected to the RV-8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.

(MICROPHONE)

SIGNAL TOO LOW

The microphones may be positioned too far from the front speakers. Refer to the microphone

placement examples that begin on page 3-38 to confirm that the microphones are appropri-

ately positioned for the microphone check.

•

The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.

The microphone level is more than 20dB

below the highest microphone level.

Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con-

nected to the RV-8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.

(MICROPHONE)

OUT OF RANGE

The microphones might be positioned too far from the front speakers. Refer to the micro-

phone placement examples that begin on pag e 3-38 to confirm that the microphones are

appropriately positioned for the microphone check.

•

The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.

The microphone level could not be

determined because of excessive room

noise in the listening space.

Eliminate extraneous noises in the listening space, including conversations, air conditioners

and sounds that filter in through open doors and windows.

(MICROPHONE)

TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE

The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION

Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving the desired

automatic calibration results. Microphone placement determines

whether the RV-8 calibrates optimal speaker distances and output

levels for a single listening position, several listening positions in a

single row, or several listening positions in the listening space.

•

Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin on the

n ext p ag e t o p o sit io n t h e m icro p h o n e s fo r au t o m at ic

calibration. Select the microphone placement that best meets

the needs of the listening space.

3-42

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

PROPER

microphone placement to achieve the best results for a single listening position

When calibrating for a single listening

position, place the microphones:

3 As close together as possible in a single listening

position (the primary listening position)

3 At the approximate spot where the listener’s head

will be during listening

Rear

Left

3 In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers

Side

Left

Rear

Right

3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other

fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration

noise signals

Side

Right

3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and

walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers

Front

Left

The illustration to the right provides an example of

proper microphone placement when calibrating for a

single listening position. The microphones a re

positioned as close together as possible in a single

listening position, allowing the RV-8 to calibrate optimal

speaker distances and output levels for that position.

Microphone

Center

Subwoofer

Front

Right

3-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (continued)

PROPER

microphone placement to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in a single row

When calibrating for m ultiple listening

p osition s in a sin g le row, p osition th e

microphones:

3 At the approximate spot where the listener’s head

will be during listening

Rear

Left

3 In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers

Side

Left

3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other

fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration

noise signals

Rear

Right

3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and

Side

Right

walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers

The illustration to the right provides an example of

proper microphone placement when calibrating for

multiple listening positions in a single row. Each micro-

phone is positioned in a single listening position within a

single row, allowing the RV-8 to calibrate optimal

speaker distances and output levels for that row at the

expense of a single listening position.

Front

Left

Microphone

Center

Subwoofer

Front

Right

3-44

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

PROPER

microphone placement to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in multiple rows

When calibrating for m ultiple listening

positions in m ultiple rows, position the

microphones:

3 At the approximate spot where the listener’s head

will be during listening

Rear

Left

3 In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers

Side

Left

3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other

fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration

noise signals

Rear

Right

3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and

Side

Right

walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers

The illustration to the right provides an example of

proper microphone placement when calibrating for

multiple listening positions in multiple rows. Each micro-

phone is positioned in a single listening position within a

row, allowing the RV-8 to calibrate optimal speaker

distances and output levels for a larger listening area at

the expense of a single listening position.

Front

Left

Microphone

Center

Subwoofer

Front

Right

3-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (continued)

IMPROPER

microphone positioning for automatic calibration

During the automatic calibration, do not:

Arrange the microphones along the perimeter of

the listening positions or space

Position the microphones in spots where the

listeners’ heads will not be during listening

Rear

Left

Obstruct the line-of-sight path between the

microphones and the speakers

Side

Left

Rear

Right

Position the microphones on the floor, on seat

cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture

and other fixtures, where echoes might obscure

calibration noise signals

Side

Right

Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of

speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)

from any one speaker

Front

Left

Microphone

Center

The illustration to the right provides an example of

improper microphone placement during the microphone

check. The microphones are positioned on the floor

along the perimeter of the listening space, making it

difficult for the RV-8 to calibrate optimal speaker

distances and output levels for the actual listening

positions.

Subwoofer

Front

Right

3-46

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

IMPROPER

microphone positioning for automatic calibration

During the automatic calibration, do not:

Arrange the microphones along the perimeter of

the listening positions or space

Position the microphones at spots where the

listeners’ heads will not be during listening

Rear

Left

Obstruct the line-of-sight path between the

microphones and the speakers

Side

Left

Rear

Right

Position the microphones on the floor, on seat

cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture

and other fixtures, where echoes might obscure

calibration noise signals

Side

Right

Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of

speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)

from any one speaker

Front

Left

Microphone

Center

The illustration to the right provides an example of

improper microphone placement during the microphone

check. The microphones are positioned on seat cushions

rather than in spots where the listener’s heads will be

during listening.

Subwoofer

Front

Right

3-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION

SPEAKER SETUP

OMSPE

DISTANCES

DISTANCES 60 Hz

OUTPUT LEV LSHz

60 Hz

PLACE MIC PHONES

AROUND PREFERRED

SETUP

OMSPE

!CA

HIGH AU

60 Hz

AV 10 SEC

OOM OR

SETUP

EVELS

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

HEVELS

TEST WILL BEGIN IN

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

0IO

MANUAL

YOU WILL

TO LEAVE T

SIT QU

PRESS TO SKIP

COUNTDOWN

OFF

OIEF

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

LISTENING POSITIONS

N/A

PRESSAPATORTBEGIN

COUNTDOWN

APART

Follow the procedures in the appropriate table column for the desired type of automatic calibration.

STEP

DISTANCES

DISTANCES & LEVELS

LEVELS

Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu AUTOMATIC option, as shown in the menu illustration above.

•

If a microphone check is successful, the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu appears in the on-screen display. Press

the ꢁ or ꢂ arrow button to highlight the automatic calibration option you want. Then press the ꢀ arrow button to select

this option. Refer to the table on page 3-36 for more information about automatic calibration options.

MIC CHECK REQUIRED

FOR AUTO CALIBRATION

•

If a microphone check is unsuccessful, one of the error messages shown to the right appears in the on-screen display, indicat-

ing that a successful microphone check is required before automatic calibration, and also the reason the previous check failed.

If this occurs, go back to “Connect i n g the M i crophones” on page 3-37 and work your way back to this page.

NO MICROPHONE

DETECTED

The following AUTO SPEAKER SETUP messages are displayed before automatic calibration begins:

•

The !CAUTION! HIGH AUDIO LEVELS message indicates that the RV-8 generates loud calibration noise signals during automatic calibration. If the sig-

nals become too loud, press the ꢃ arrow button to cancel automatic calibration. Press the ꢀ arrow button to open the next AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

menu.

•

The countdown display notifies you that automatic calibration will begin in 10 seconds. The primary reason for the 10 second delay is to give you time

to leave the listening space before automatic calibration begins. If you choose to remain in the room, your movements could affect the calibration

results. If you leave the room, you can return in about 10 minutes (the calibration procedure should be completed). Press the ꢀ arrow button to

skip the countdown and begin automatic calibration. The RV-8 automatically activates automatic calibration when the countdown ends.

3-48

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

SETTING DISTANCES

CUSTOM SETUP

SETTING DISTANCES

CUSTOM SETUP

SETTING LEVELS

CUSTOM SETUP

SETTING LEVELS

CUSTOM SETUP

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

0.0ft

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

12.0ft

10.5ft

12.0ft

4.5ft

ERROR

6.0ft

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

0.0dB

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

-2.0dB

ERROR

-2.0dB

-4.5dB

-3.0dB

-4.5dB

N/A

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

4.5ft

N/A

SUBWOOFER

STEP

DISTANCES

DISTANCES & LEVELS

LEVELS

This step does not occur when the AUTO

SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS option is

selected.

The SETTING DISTANCES menu is displayed when the RV-8 calibrates speaker distances.

•

During speaker distance calibration, the RV-8 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zone

audio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING DISTANCES menu. The cursor auto-

matically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters, highlighting each parameter

while the RV-8 calculates a distance for the corresponding speaker. As it finishes each parameter,

the RV-8 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the parameter label.

•

Because of the way low-frequency signals propagate in most listening spaces, automatic speaker dis-

tance calibration often produces unreliable results for subwoofers. For this reason, the RV-8 does not

send calibration noise signals to the Subwoofer connector during speaker distance calibration. Instead,

the RV-8 automatically calibrates the subwoofer distance to the shortest distance of the other speakers.

These distances can be manually adjusted. S e e “P E RF O R M I N G M A N U A L SPEAKER D ISTA N CE C A LIBRA-

TI O N” on page 3-54.

This step does not occur when the AUTO SPEAKER

SETUP menu DISTANCES option is selected.

The SETTING LEVELS menu is displayed when the RV-8 calibrates output levels.

•

During speaker levels calibration, the RV-8 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zone

audio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING LEVELS menu. The cursor auto-

matically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters, highlighting each parame-

ter while the RV-8 calculates an output level for the corresponding speaker. As it finishes each

parameter, the RV-8 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the param-

eter label.

3-49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (continued)

DISTANCES

STEP

DISTANCES & LEVELS

LEVELS

AUTO LEVELS

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

AUTO DISTANCES

FRONT LEFT

_-2.0dBꢀ

_12.0ftꢀ

DISTANCES

LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

ERROR

10.5ft

Refer to the table on page

3-52 for information about

all possible speaker calibra-

tion messages.

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

-2.0dB

-4.5dB

-3.0dB

-4.5dB

N/A

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

12.0ft

4.5ft

ERROR

6.0ft

4.5ft

N/A

3-52 for information about

AUTO VALUES APPLIED

PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

all possible speaker calibra-

tion messages.

SUBWOOFER

When the RV-8 is finished calibrating

speaker distances and output levels, if there

was a calibration error, the AUTO SPEAKER

SETUP screen is displayed, indicating the

results for each calibration procedure.

If there was

error, an AUTO DISTANCES menu auto-

matically displays.

DISTANCES calibration

If there was a LEVELS calibration error, an

AUTO LEVELS menu automatically dis-

plays.

•

An OK message indicates that no errors

occurred during the calibration proce-

dure.

•

A value indicates that no errors occurred

during the calibration procedure.

•

A value indicates that no errors occurred

during the calibration procedure.

An ERROR message indicates that values

were calculated, but at least one error

occurred during calibration.

•

An ERROR message indicates that a value

was calculated, but at least one error

occurred during the calibration proce-

dure.

•

An ERROR message indicates that a value

was calculated, but at least one error

occurred during the calibration proce-

dure.

Press the ꢁ or ꢂ arrow button to high-

light the desired calibration procedure.

DISTANCES displays the AUTO DIS-

TANCES screen shown in the left column

of this table.

•

Press the ꢁ or ꢂ arrow button to high-

light the speaker calibration parameter

you want. Then press the ꢀ button to

view more detailed results for the

selected speaker. A message similar to

the one shown above will display.

•

Press the ꢁ or ꢂ arrow button to high-

light the desired speaker calibration

parameter. Then, press the ꢀ arrow

button to view more detailed results for

the selected speaker. A message similar

to the one shown above will display.

LEVELS displays the AUTO LEVELS screen

shown in the right column of this table.

•

Press the ꢀ arrow button to select this

procedure.

•

Refer to the table on page 3-52 for infor-

mation about all possible speaker calibra-

tion messages.

•

Refer to the table on page 3-52 for infor-

mation about all possible speaker calibra-

tion messages.

Refer to the instructions in the appropri-

ate column to view more detailed results

for each individual speaker.

This menu is displayed, but not user

accessible during Auto Distance Calibra-

tion or after Auto Calibration.

This menu is displayed, but not user

accessible during Auto Distance Calibra-

tion or after Auto Calibration.

•

If a speaker is highlighted in either the

Distances or Levels menus, the speaker

name is displayed.

3-50

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

STEP

DISTANCES

DISTANCES & LEVELS

LEVELS

SET DISTANCES

AUTO DISTANCES

AUTO DISTANCES*

SET LEVELS

AUTO LEVELS

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

DISTANCES

ꢃ

AUTO DISTANCES

ORIGINAL DISTANCES

FRONT LEFT

12.0ft

10.5ft

12.0ft

4.5ft

ERROR

6.0ft

4.5ft

N/A

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

12.0ft

10.5ft

12.0ft

4.5ft

ERROR

6.0ft

4.5ft

N/A

AUTO LEVELS

ORIGINAL LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

-2.0dB

ERROR

-2.0dB

-4.5dB

-3.0dB

-4.5dB

N/A

ꢃ

CENTER

LEVELS

ERROR

CENTER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

AUTO VALUES APPLIED

PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

0.0ft

0.0dB

0.0ft

0.0dB

0.0ft

0.0dB

SUBWOOFER

SUB

SL RL

0.0ft

SL RL

0.0dB

0.0ft

0.0dB

Use the SET DISTANCES menu to select

the desired speaker distances.

Use the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu to

select speaker distances or levels.

Use the SET LEVELS menu to select the

desired speaker levels.

Press the ꢃ arrow button to return to

the SET DISTANCES menu.

Press the ꢃ arrow button to return to the

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP results screen.

Press the ꢃ arrow button to return to

the SET LEVELS menu.

Press the ꢁ or ꢂ arrow button to tog-

gle between calibrated speaker distances

(AUTO) and original speaker distances.

The speaker graphics at the bottom of

the menu update to indicate the selected

values.

To select the other calibration procedure,

follow the instructions in Step 5. Otherwise,

press the ꢃ button to return to the

SPEAKER SETUP menu.

•

Press the ꢁ and ꢂ arrow buttons to

toggle between calibrated output levels

(AUTO) and original output levels. The

speaker graphics at the bottom of the

menu update to indicate the selected

values.

Note: The AUTO DISTANCES screen is shown

above as an example. The AUTO LEVELS

screen can be substituted.

Press the ꢀ button to apply the

selected values. A confirmation message

is displayed to indicate the applied val-

ues.

•

Press the ꢀ arrow button to apply the

selected values. A confirmation message is

displayed to indicate the applied values.

Press the ꢃ arrow button twice in suc-

cession to return to the SPEAKER SETUP

menu.

Press the ꢃ button twice in succession

to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.

The AUTO DISTANCES menu is only accessi-

ble after the DISTANCES & LEVELS calibra-

tion is performed as a combined procedure.

The AUTO LEVELS menu is only accessible

after the DISTANCES & LEVELS calibration is

performed as a combined procedure.

3-51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (continued)

Message

Description

Troubleshooting

The RV-8 successfully calibrated the value

for the selected speaker without error.

•

N/A

(SPEAKER)

The selected speaker is not present in the

speaker setup.

Set the corresponding CUSTOM or THX SETUP menu parameter to include the selected

speaker in the speaker setup. (The RV-8 only calibrates values for speakers that are included in

the speaker setup.)

(SPEAKER)

SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED

The microphones detected out-of-phase

calibration noise signals, but the cali-

brated value is still accurate.

•

Examine speaker/associated amplifier connections to ensure that speaker wires are not crossed.

(SPEAKER)

SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE

Dipolar speakers could cause this error. However, the RV-8 does not report this error unless at

least half of the microphones detect out-of-phase calibration noise signals.

•

Reflections from room objects could cause this error.

Drivers intentionally wired out-of-phase could cause this error.

The microphones detected calibration

noise signals at an unusually low level.

•

The microphones might be positioned more than 30 feet (9.14m) from the selected speaker or in a

location where echoes obscure calibration noise signals. Refer to the placement examples on pages

3-40 to 3-44 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.

(SPEAKER)

SIGNAL TOO LOW

Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con-

nected to the RV-8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.

The microphones did not detect calibra-

tion noise signals or the RV-8 could not

calculate a value.

•

Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that the

microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.

(SPEAKER)

UNABLE TO CALCULATE

Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly con-

nected to the RV-8 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.

One or more microphones did not detect

calibration noise signals at a reasonable

level. The calibrated value could be inac-

curate.

•

Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that the

microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.

(SPEAKER)

MAY NOT BE ACCURATE

The microphones detected calibration

noise signals at an unusually high level.

•

Decrease associated amplifier volume levels – including (if applicable) powered subwoofer amplifiers.

(SPEAKER)

SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH

The microphones may be positioned too close (within 2 feet [0.61m]) of the selected speaker.

Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that the micro-

phones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.

The microphones detected calibration

noise signals at an unusually low level.

•

Increase associated amplifier volume levels – including (if applicable) powered subwoofer amplifiers.

(SPEAKER)

SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW

The microphones may be positioned too far away (more than 30 feet [9.14m]) from the

selected speaker. See the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm

that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.

3-52

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

MANUAL CALIBRATION

SETUP

SPEAKERS

MANUAL

Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu MANUAL option displays the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu, to manually calibrate speaker distances and

output levels. The table below indicates available manual calibration options.

SPEAKER SETUP

EA ER SETUP

SETUP

MAIN MENU

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

SPEAKER DISTANCES40 Hz

LEVELS CALIBRATION60 Hz

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

60 Hz

40 Hz

MANUAL

SET CROSSOVERS

OFF

0.0dB

BEFORE CALIBRATING

N/A

APART

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

0.0dB

SUB

SL RL

0.0dB

Manual Options

Details

SPEAKER DISTANCES

INTERNAL NOISE TEST

•

Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of speaker distances.

Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels.

•

Automatically sends an internal calibration noise signal to each Main Zone audio output connector,

allowing for simultaneous output level adjustment.

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

•

Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels.

Requires an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc.

Activates an appropriate listening mode based on the current Main Zone input source.

•

Provides amplitude limits for low-frequency signals sent to the Main Zone audio output connector

labeled Subwoofer, and low-frequency signals redirected to other Main Zone audio output connectors.

Protects speakers against input sources that produce low-frequency signal peaks.

3-53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

PERFORMING MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCE CALIBRATION

SETUP

SPEAKERS

MANUAL

SPEAKER DISTANCES

Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu SPEAKER DISTANCES option displays the SPEAKER DISTANCES menu, to manually calibrate speaker

distances.

SPEAKER DISTANCES

CUSTOM SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP

SETUP

MAIN MENU

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

0.0ft

FEET

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

SPEAKER DISTANCES

LEVELS CALIBRATION

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

UNITS

MANUAL

0.0ft

0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

0.0ft

METERS

FEET

SUB

SL RL

0.0ft

To manually calibrate speaker distances:

3. To determine the appropriate speaker distance, measure the

distance between the primary listening position and the front of

the speaker.

1. Follow the menu path shown above to select MANUAL SPEAKER

SETUP ꢀ SPEAKER DISTANCES. The SPEAKER DISTANCES menu

shown above will open in the on-screen display.

For example, when the FRONT LEFT parameter is selected,

measure the distance between the primary listening position

and the front of the front left speaker (connected to the Main

Zone audio output connector labeled Front L).

2. Press the ꢁ or ꢂ arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker

distance parameter. Then, press the ꢀ arrow button to select the

highlighted speaker distance parameter.

4. When the speaker distance has been measured, press the ꢁ

and ꢂ arrow buttons to set the parameter to the closest available

value.

3-54

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

PERFORMING MANUAL OUTPUT LEVEL CALIBRATION

SETUP

SPEAKERS

MANUAL

LEVELS CALIBRATION

Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS CALIBRATION option displays the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu shown below, to manually

calibrate output levels.

LEVELS CALIBRATION

CUSTOM SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP

SETUP

MAIN MENU

INTERNAL NOISE TEST

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

SPEAKER DISTANCES

LEVELS CALIBRATION

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

MANUAL

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

0.0dB

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

0.0dB

INTERNAL NOISE

SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST

CUSTOM SETUP

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

+0.0dB

0.0dB

+0.0dB

SUB

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SL RL

0.0dB

SUBWOOFER

-18.0 to +12.0dB

Note the following:

•

Use a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter to manually calibrate

output levels. A SPL meter is a device that measures the relative

loud ness of the sp eakers to ensure accurate outp ut level

calibration. SPL meters are available from electronic retailers

such as Radio Shack.

•

Output levels for speakers that are not included in the speaker

setup cannot be adjusted during the internal noise test. These

output levels can be adjusted during the external noise test, but

there is no need to do so.

•

Output levels should be calibrated from the primary listening

position, placing the SPL meter at the approximate location

where the listener’s head will be during listening.

3-55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

INTERNAL NOISE TEST

SETUP

SPEAKERS

MANUAL

LEVELS CALIBRATION

To manually calibrate output levels during the internal noise test:

Opens the INTERNAL NOISE message shown on the previous page,

which indicates that the internal noise test generates loud calibration

noise signals.

1. Set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response.

2. Place the SPL meter at the primary listening position.

When the INTERNAL NOISE message opens:

3. Press the ꢁ or ꢂ arrow button to highlight the desired output

level parameter. Then, quickly press the ꢀ button to select this

output level parameter. The horizontal bar graph shown on the

previous page will open in the on-screen display and automatic

scrolling will stop.

•

Press the ꢀ arrow button to open the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST

menu shown on the previous page. When the SPEAKER LEVEL

ADJUST m enu opens, the internal noise test autom atically

begins.

•

Press the ꢃ button to skip the internal noise test.

Note:

During the internal noise test, the RV-8 sends calibration noise signals

to each speaker in the order shown on the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST

menu. The cursor automatically scrolls through output level param-

eters, highlighting each parameter as the RV-8 sends the calibration

noise signal to the corresponding speaker. The calibration noise

signal is sent to each speaker for about 4 seconds.

During the internal noise test, it is possible to select an output level

parameter just as the cursor is about to automatically scroll to the

next parameter, causing the RV-8 to send the calibration noise

signal to both speakers. If this occurs, reselect the desired speaker.

4. When the horizontal bar graph opens, press the ꢁ or ꢂ button

to select the output level that achieves a 75dB SPL meter reading

from the primary listening position.

Note:

When the internal noise test begins, the RV-8 automatically sets

volume level to +0dB. Avoid adjusting the master volume level while

the test is in progress, to achieve THX reference levels (75dB).

5. Press ꢃ to close the parameter. The internal noise test will

continue and automatic scrolling will resume.

6. Repeat steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 until all desired output levels have

been set.

INTERNAL NOISE TEST LEVELS CALIBRATION MANUAL SPEAKERS SETUP

3-56

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST

SETUP

SPEAKERS

MANUAL

LEVELS CALIBRATION

Selecting the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu EXTERNAL NOISE TEST

option opens the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu shown on page 3-55,

which manually calibrates output levels.

Note:

When the external noise test begins, the RV-8 automatically sets

volume level to +0dB. Avoid adjusting the master volume level while

the test is in progress, to achieve THX reference levels (75dB).

The external noise test requires an external calibration source such as

an audio calibration disc. When the external noise test is conducted,

the RV-8 activates a listening mode based on the current Main Zone

input source. Refer to the table below for more information about

external noise test listening mode activation.

To manually calibrate output levels during the external noise test:

1. Set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response.

2. Place the SPL meter at the primary listening position.

When a listening mode is activated during the external noise test, all

custom listening mode menu parameter settings are ignored. The

listening mode is applied to the current Main Zone input source in its

factory-default condition. When the external noise test is finished, the

listening mode returns to its custom condition.

3. Press the ꢁ or ꢂ arrow button to highlight the output level

parameter you want. Then press the ꢀ button to select this

output level parameter.

The horizontal bar graph shown on pag e 3-55 i s displayed.

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST LEVELS CALIBRATION MANUAL SPEAKERS SETUP

4. Begin playback of the external calibration source and press the ꢁ

or ꢂ arrow button to select the output level that achieves a 75dB

SPL Meter reading.

INPUT SOURCE

LISTENING MODE

2-Channel

PLII MOVIE,

DIGITAL**

PLIIx MOVIE*

5. After selecting the output level, press the ꢃ arrow button to close

the horizontal bar graph.

Dolby Digital

DTS(-ES)

6. Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 until you have set all the output levels you

want.

5.1-Channel Analog 5.1a BYPASS***

* These listening modes depend on the speaker configuration. Dolby Pro Logic IIx MOVIE

will only load when side and rear speakers are present.

**These listening mode names differ depending on the current input source, speaker

setup and parameter settings. Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions section

beginning on page 6-4 for more information.

**If the Advanced Menu input is set to “ANALOG BYPASS OFF” the listening mode for the

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST is “5.1a STANDARD”.

3-57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

SETTING BASS PEAK LIMITERS

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

SETUP

SPEAKERS

MANUAL

LEVELS CALIBRATION

The BASS PEAK LIMITERS option displays the BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu, to set amplitude limits on low-frequency signals sent to the Main Zone

audio output connectors, including the Subwoofer. The RV-8 is equipped with an internal limiter to prevent low-frequency signals from exceeding

a designated output level. This is essential for Dolby Digital and DTS(-ES) sources that produce low-frequency signal peaks at much higher output

levels than 2-channel sources. In home theaters, there is a danger of the subwoofers and their associated amplifiers overloading when attempting

to reproduce low-frequency signals.

LEVELS CALIBRATION

BASS PEAK LIMITER

SPEAKER SETUP

MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP

SETUP

MAIN MENU

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

SPEAKER DISTANCES

LEVELS CALIBRATION

INTERNAL NOISE TEST

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

CAL NOISE

LIMITER

LIMIT ADJ

100dB

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

MANUAL

0.0dB

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

0.0dB

SUB

SL RL

0.0dB

75 to 120dB

0.0dB

OFF

CAL NOISE

ON, OFF

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Setting

SETUP

SPEAKERS

MANUAL

LEVELS CALIBRATION

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

CAL NOISE

LIMITER

ON, OFF

CAL NOISE

ON, OFF

Determines whether bass peak limiters are set with an internal or

external calibration source.

LIMIT ADJ

100dB

75 to 120dB

To set the CAL NOISE parameter:

Note:

•

Select ON to activate an internal calibration noise signal to set

bass peak limiters.

Configure BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu parameter settings whether

output levels are automatically or manually calibrated.

Select OFF to deactivate the internal calibration noise signal.

Setting bass peak limiters with the calibration noise set to OFF requires

an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc.

3-58

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

LIMIT ADJ

75 to 120dB

LIMITER

ON, OFF

SETUP

SPEAKERS

MANUAL

LEVELS CALIBRATION

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

SETUP

SPEAKERS

MANUAL

LEVELS CALIBRATION

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

LIMITER ADJ

LIMITER

Sets amplitude limits applied to the Subwoofer output connector,

and to other Main Zone audio output connectors to which low-

frequency signals are redirected.

Limits low-frequency signals sent to the subwoofer or redirected to

other speakers.

To set the LIMITER parameter:

To set the LIMIT ADJ parameter:

•

Select ON to restrict the output level of the low-frequency

signals to the LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.

1. Select the LIMIT ADJ parameter.

The parameter initially sets to 75dB.

Select OFF to allow an unrestricted signal output level,

regardless of the LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.

2. Press the ꢁ and ꢂ arrow buttons to change the parameter value.

The selected amplitude is applied when the SUB LIMITER

parameter is set to ON.

3-59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

I/ O CONFIG

SETUP

I/O CONFIG

The I/O CONFIG option is used to configure the analog audio input connectors as eight (Left/Right) stereo connectors, five (Left/Right) stereo

connectors and one 5.1-channel configuration (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R), or as two stereo connectors and two 5.1-channel

configurations.

I/O CONFIG

REAR PANEL CONFIG

SETUP

MAIN MENU

ANALOG INPUTS

AMP OUTPUTS

8 STEREO INPUTS

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

8 STEREO INPUTS

When 8 STEREO INPUTS is selected:

8 STEREO INPUTS

SETUP

I/O CONFIG

ANALOG INPUTS

•

All analog audio input connectors are configured as stereo

connectors.

Select the 8 STEREO INPUTS option to configure the analog audio

input connectors as eight stereo connectors.

•

The 5.1-channel connectors are not available.

Input sources that were assigned to the 5.1 ANLG (3-5) and 5.1

ANLG (6-8) are reassigned to the stereo connectors labeled 3

and 6, respectively.

3-60

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

SETUP

I/O CONFIG

ANALOG INPUTS

SETUP

I/O CONFIG

ANALOG INPUTS

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

Configures the analog audio inp ut connectors as two stereo

connectors and two 5.1-channel configurations.

Config ures the analog aud io inp ut connectors as five stereo

connectors and one 5.1-channel configuration.

When the analog audio input connectors are configured as two

stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors:

When the analog audio input connectors are configured as five

stereo and one 5.1-channel configuration:

•

The connectors labeled 1 and 2 are configured as stereo connectors.

•

The connectors labeled 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are configured as

stereo connectors.

The connectors labeled 3, 4 and 5 are configured as a 5.1-

channel connector, and the connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are

configured as a 5.1-channel connector. These connectors are

sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as indicated in

the table at the bottom of this column.

The connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are configured as a 5.1-channel

connector. This connector is sent to the Main Zone audio output

connectors, as indicated in the table at the bottom of the next

column.

•

2-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors

labeled 3, 4 and 5 are reassigned to the 5.1-channel connector

labeled 5.1 ANLG (3-5). Two-channel sources that were assigned

to the stereo connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are reassigned to the

5.1-channel connector labeled 5.1 ANLG (6-8). The 5.1-channel

connectors should only be used with 5.1-channel analog

sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.

•

Two-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors

labeled 6, 7 and 8 are reassigned to the 5.1-channel connector

labeled 5.1 ANLG (6-8). The 5.1-channel connectors should only be

used with 5.1-channel analog sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.

The 5.1-channel analog audio input connectors are sent to the Main

Zone analog audio output connectors, as shown in the table below.

Input Connector

Output Connector

(L)

Front L

(R)

Front R

(C)

Center

(SUB)

(LS)

(RS)

Sub

Side L and Rear L

Side R and Rear R

3-61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

I/ O CONFIG (continued)

I/O CONFIG

AMP OUTPUTS

SETUP

MAIN MENU

ANALOG INPUTS

AMP OUTPUTS

MAIN 7.1

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MAIN 7.1

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

MAIN 7.1

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

SETUP

I/O CONFIG

AMP INPUTS

SETUP

I/O CONFIG

AMP INPUTS

When set to MAIN 7.1, all of the amplifier outputs on the rear panel

will be configured for use in the Main Zone. Outputs 3 and 7 are

used for the rear speakers (Rear L/R).

Configures amplifier outputs 3 and 7 for use in Zone 3. Outputs 1, 2,

4, 5 and 6 will be configured for use in the Main Zone. The input

source selected for Zone 3 will be output on amplifier outputs 3 and 7.

Note:

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

If the current speaker configuration is using rear speakers, a warning

message will appear alerting the user to the fact that the rear speakers will

be disabled for the Main Zone when the 5.1 MAIN & ZONE3 2.0 setting

is chosen. Press the right menu button to confirm the change. Pressing

any other button will cancel the change.

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

SETUP

I/O CONFIG

AMP INPUTS

Configures amplifier outputs 3 and 7 for use in Zone 2. Outputs 1, 2,

4, 5 and 6 will be configured for use in the Main Zone. The input

source selected for Zone 2 will be output on amplifier outputs 3 and 7.

Note:

If the current speaker configuration is using rear speakers, a warning

message will appear alerting the user to the fact that the rear speakers will

be disabled for the Main Zone when the 5.1 MAIN & ZONE2 2.0 setting

is chosen. Press the right menu button to confirm the change. Pressing

any other button will cancel the change.

3-62

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

DISPLAY SETUP

SETUP

DISPLAYS

Selecting the SETUP menu DISPLAYS option opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which is used to customize the on-screen and front-panel displays,

restore audio/video synchronization, and activate and create a custom unit name.

DISPLAY SETUP

OFF, 1 to 60ms

MAIN MENU

SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

OFF

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

Default

Setting

Parameter

Possible Setting

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

Refer to page 3-64

Refer to page 3-66

OFF

N/A

OFF, 1 to 60ms

ON, OFF

N/A

CUSTOM NAME

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

3-63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY SETUP

SETUP

DISPLAYS

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

Opens the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu, which is used to customize the on-screen display.

DISPLAY SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

MAIN MENU

SETUP

ALWAYS ON

2 SECONDS

ALWAYS OFF

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

STATUS

2 SECONDS

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

POSITION

FORMAT

BACKGROUND

TOP

NTSC

OFF

TOP

CUSTOM NAME

CENTER

BOTTOM

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

SECAM

PAL

NTSC

OFF

STATUS

ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

SETUP

DISPLAYS

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

STATUS

2 SECONDS

ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,

ALWAYS OFF

Activates and deactivates the on-screen display sent to the Main Zone

video output connector. When set to ALWAYS ON, the on-screen display

remains on at all times. When set to 2 SECONDS, the on-screen display

appears for 2 seconds whenever the input source changes or the RV-8

receives a command. When set to ALWAYS OFF, the on-screen display

remains off at all times. It will not reappear until the ON-SCREEN

DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.

POSITION

FORMAT

TOP

TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM

SECAM, PAL, NTSC

ON, OFF

NTSC

BACKGROUND ON

Note:

When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS

OFF, the on-screen display immediately disappears. Use the front-panel

display as a guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.

3-64

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

POSITION

TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM

BACKGROUND

ON, OFF

SETUP

DISPLAYS

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

BACKGROUND

SETUP

DISPLAYS

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

POSITION

Activates and deactivates the menu background. When set to ON,

on-screen display menus appear over a solid blue or gray background

(depending on the display device). When set to OFF, on-screen

display menus appear over the video input signal.

Controls the vertical position of the two-line status on the display

device screen. When set to TOP, the two-line status appears near the

top of the display device screen. When set to CENTER, the two-line

status is centered on the d isp lay device screen. When set to

BOTTOM, the two-line status appears near the bottom of the display

device screen. Refer to p age 2-28 for more information about the

two-line status.

Note:

When the BACKGROUND parameter is set to OFF, the on-screen display

will disappear if the display device is using the component video output

connector.

FORMAT

SECAM, PAL, NTSC

SETUP

DISPLAYS

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FORMAT

Controls the compatibility between the video input connectors, the

video switcher and the display device. Select the setting that is

compatible with the source components and display device.

Note:

The FORMAT parameter affects the composite and S-Video output

connectors. It does not affect the component video output connector.

3-65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY SETUP

Opens the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu, which is used to customize the front-panel display.

DISPLAY SETUP

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

MAIN MENU

SETUP

ALWAYS ON

2 SECONDS

ALWAYS OFF

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

STATUS

ALWAYS ON

100%

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

BRIGHTNESS

OFF

100%

75%

50%

25%

Note:

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

ALWAYS ON ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,

When the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to

ALWAYS OFF, the front-panel display immediately disappears. Use the on-

screen display as a guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2

SECONDS.

STATUS

ALWAYS OFF

BRIGHTNESS 100%

100%, 75%, 50%, 25%

BRIGHTNESS

100%,75%, 50%, 25%

STATUS

ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF

SETUP

DISPLAYS

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

BRIGHTNESS

SETUP

DISPLAYS

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

STATUS

Controls the brightness of front-panel display characters. When a

setting is selected, front-panel display illumination automatically

adjusts to the selected brightness.

Activates and deactivates the front-panel display. When set to ALWAYS

ON, the front-panel display remains on at all times. When set to 2

SECONDS, the front-panel display appears for 2 seconds whenever the

input source changes or the RV-8 receives a command. When set to

ALWAYS OFF, the front-panel display remains off at all times.

3-66

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

DISPLAY SETUP

OFF, 1 to 60ms

MAIN MENU

SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

OFF

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

RV-8

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 20 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

A/V SYNC DELAY

OFF, 1 to 60ms

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

SETUP

DISPLAYS

A/V SYNC DELAY

SETUP

DISPLAYS

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

Restores audio/video synchronization when using products such as

video processors that introduce a video signal delay. This parameter

can be used to set an audio signal delay to compensate for the video

signal delay.

Opens the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu shown below, which can be

used to create a custom unit name. When the CUSTOM parameter is

set to ON, the custom unit name appears in the on-screen and front-

panel displays when the RV-8 is activated.

To customize the name of the RV-8:

CUSTOM NAME

ON, OFF

SETUP

DISPLAYS

CUSTOM NAME

1. Follow the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu path to open the EDIT

CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu shown below.

Activates the display of a custom unit name, which appears when the

RV-8 is activated. When set to ON, the custom name scrolls across

the on-screen and front-panel displays when the RV-8 is activated.

When set to OFF, the custom name does not appear when the RV-8 is

activated. The custom name can be entered in the DISPLAY SETUP

menu EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu.

2. When the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu opens, press

the remote control ꢁ and ꢂ arrow buttons to change the

character above the cursor (^).

3. When the desired character has been selected, press the ꢀ arrow

button to advance to the next character space. The cursor will

automatically wrap to the first character space when the last

character space is passed.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the desired custom unit name.

5. When the desired custom unit name has been entered, press the

ꢃ arrow button to close the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down

menu and return to the DISPLAY SETUP menu.

3-67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP

SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, which is used to configure Main Zone, Zone 2, Zone 3, and Headphone volume levels.

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

-10dB

-20dB

-30dB

-40dB

FULL MUTE

MAIN PWR ON

MUTE LEVEL

Z2 PWR ON

-30dB

+12dB

MAIN PWR ON

MUTE LEVEL

ONE PWR ON

Z2 PWR ON

-30dB

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB

MAX VOL

Z2 PWR ON

+12

-30dB

Z2 PWR ON

HEADPHONE

MAX VOLUME

HEADPHONE

MAX VOLUME

-30dB

+12dB

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

Default

Parameter

Possible Settings

LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

Setting

MUTE LEVEL

–40dB, –30dB, –20dB, –10dB, FULL MUTE

SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

MUTE LEVEL

MAIN PWR ON

MUTE LEVEL

Z2 PWR ON

–30dB

–12dB

–40dB, –30dB, –20dB, –10dB, FULL

LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

–80 to +12dB

Sets the amount of attenuation that occurs in the Main Zone when the

front-panel or remote control Mute button is pressed. When set to FULL

MUTE, Main Zone volume level will be fully attenuated. Otherwise, Main

Zone volume level will be attenuated to the selected level.

Z3 PWR ON

HEADPHONE

MAX VOLUME

Z2 PWR ON

LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

ZONE PWR ON

MAIN PWR ON

LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

Sets the Zone 2 volume level that will be selected whenever Zone 2 is

activated. When set to LAST LVL, Zone 2 activates at the volume level

that was last selected in the previous operating session. LAST LVL is

displayed on power up if the Zone 2 was powered off using the Zone

2 Off button on the remote control or front panel.

SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

MAIN PWR ON

Sets the Main Zone volume level that will be selected whenever the

Main Zone is activated. When set to LAST LVL, the Main Zone

activates at the volume level that was last selected in the previous

operating session.

3-68

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

headphones will activate at the last volume level that was selected

when they were last p lug g ed in. When the head p hones are

unplugged, the volume will revert to the MAIN PWR ON setting.

Z3 PWR ON

LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

ZONE PWR ON

Sets the Zone 3 volume level that will be selected whenever Zone 3 is

activated. When set to LAST LVL, Zone 3 activates at the volume level

that was last selected in the previous operating session. LAST LVL is

displayed on power up if the Zone 3 was powered off using the Zone

3 Off button on the remote control or front panel.

MAX VOLUME

-80 TO +12dB

SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

MAX VOLUME

Selects the maximum volume level for the Main Zone. When a value

is selected, the RV-8 automatically sets Main Zone volume level to the

selected value when the current level is higher.

HEADPHONE

LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB

SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

ZONE PWR ON

Sets the Headphone volume level that will be selected whenever

headphones are plugged in to the RV-8. When set to LAST LVL, the

3-69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

TRIGGER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

TRIGGER SETUP

OFF

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

REMOTE ONLY

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

ZONE2 INPUTS

ZONE3 INPUTS

FILM

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLIIx + THX

PLIIx MOV

PLIIx MUS

PLII+ THX

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PL + THX

PRO LOGIC

+ THX

OFF

SETUP

TRIGGER

MUSIC

2-CHAN

5.1a FILM

5.1a MUSIC

Selecting the SETUP m en u TRIGGER op tion op ens the

TRIGGER SETUP menu shown to the right, which can be used

to configure the trigger output connector labeled 1. The RV-8

rear panel houses two 12V DC trigger output connectors. The

connector labeled PWR – the power trigger output connector

– is not configurable. It is activated when the RV-8 is activated,

and deactivated when the RV-8 is deactivated. The trigger

output connector labeled 1 can be configured for remote or

program operation.

5.1a

SurEX

MUSIC

5.1a STANDARD

5.1a 2-CHANNEL OFF

5.1a BYPASS

2CH BYPASS

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1a OFF

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

OFF

LIVE! LARGE

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

* TRIGGER SETUP menu

listening mode names

are fixed, meaning

these names do not

change when certain

encoding is present. For

instance, the 5.1 THX

SurEX listening mode

label appears whether

THX Ultra2, THX Sur-

round EX, or no encod-

ing is engaged.

REMOTE ONLY

ON, OFF

Program Operation

OFF

CIN

MUSIC

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HHALL

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

REMOTE ONLY

ON, OFF

2-CH SURROUND OFF

SETUP

TRIGGER

REMOTE ONLY

2-CHANNEL

OFF

MONO LOGIC

MONO SURROUND OFF

Configures the trigger output connector labeled 1 for remote

operation. When set to ON, this connector is configured for

remote operation. The remote control play and stop buttons

turns the trigger on and off. The RV-8 ignores all other

TRIGGER SETUP menu parameter settings. When set to OFF,

the trigger output connector labeled 1 is not configured for

remote operation. It can be configured for program operation.

MONO

OFF

5.1 FILM

5.1 TV

5.1 MUSIC

SurEX

MUSIC

5.1 PLIIx MOV

5.1 PLIIx MUS

DIGITAL EX

5.1 2-CHANNEL

5.1 MONO LOGIC OFF

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

FILM

OFF

3-70

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETERS ON, OFF

TRIGGER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

TRIGGER SETUP

OFF

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

REMOTE ONLY

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

ZONE2 INPUTS

ZONE3 INPUTS

FILM

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLIIx + THX

PLIIx MOV

PLIIx MUS

PLII+ THX

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PL + THX

PRO LOGIC

+ THX

OFF

SETUP

TRIGGER

(PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETER)

MUSIC

2-CHAN

5.1a FILM

5.1a MUSIC

SurEX

MUSIC

5.1a STANDARD

Configure the trigger output connector labeled 1 for

program operation. All TRIGGER SETUP menu parameters–

except the REMOTE ONLY param eter–are considered

program operation parameters. The connector can be

associated with multiple inputs and listening modes at the

same time.

5.1a

5.1a 2-CHANNEL OFF

5.1a BYPASS

2CH BYPASS

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1

HEADPHONE

OFF

When the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to OFF and

program operation parameters are set to ON, the trigger

output connector labeled 1 is associated with the corre-

sponding Main Zone inputs, Main Zone listening modes

or Zone 2 inputs. (The connector cannot be associated

with individual Zone 2 inputs; rather, it can be associated

with the Zone 2 inputs as a group.) When configured for

program operation, the connector is activated when the

corresponding inputs and listening modes are selected

and deactivated when the corresponding inputs and

listening modes are deselected.

HEADPHONE 5.1a OFF

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

OFF

* TRIGGER SETUP menu

listening mode names

are fixed, meaning

these names do not

change when certain

encoding is present. For

instance, the 5.1 THX

SurEX listening mode

label appears whether

THX Ultra2, THX Sur-

round EX, or no encod-

ing is engaged.

CIN

MUSIC

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HHALL

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

2-CH SURROUND OFF

Note:

2-CHANNEL

OFF

MONO LOGIC

When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to

restore the factory default version of the selected listening

mode, the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu listening

mode parameter is automatically set to OFF.

MONO SURROUND OFF

MONO

OFF

5.1 FILM

5.1 TV

5.1 MUSIC

SurEX

MUSIC

5.1 PLIIx MOV

5.1 PLIIx MUS

DIGITAL EX

5.1 2-CHANNEL

5.1 MONO LOGIC OFF

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

FILM

OFF

3-71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

TUNER SETUP

SETUP

Selecting the SETUP menu TUNER SETUP option opens the TUNER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the AM/FM radio tuner.

TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

USA

EUROPE

JAPAN

E. EUR

REGION

USA

LOW

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

RDS NAME

SCROLL RATE MEDIUM

AUTO FREQUENCY

REGION

USA, EUROPE, JAPAN, E. EUR

Default

Setting

Parameter

Possible Settings

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SETUP

REGION

USA

LOW

N/A

USA, EUROPE, JAPAN, E. EUR

Sets the tuner region. The four regions are USA, EUROPE, JAPAN and

E. EUR. The table on the next page lists the band limits and incre-

ments for these regions.

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

LOW, MED, HIGH

N/A

Note:

The tuner user interface will not allow illegal frequencies to be entered. It

will always set at the closest valid frequency. For example, if the RV-8 has

USA set as the current region, entering 107.8MHz will result in 107.9MHz

being the actual tuner frequency. If the value is less than the lowest

frequency, it will set it to LO LIMIT for the appropriate region. Likewise, if

the dialed value is larger than the highest allowed frequency, it will

actually set it to the HI LIMIT for the appropriate region.

RDS NAME RDS NAME, PRESET NAME,

FREQUENCY

RADIO TEXT

SCROLL RATE

ON, OFF

MEDIUM

SLOW, MEDIUM, FAST

ON, OFF

AUTO FREQUENCY ON

3-72

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

LOW

MED

HIGH

REGION

USA

LOW

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

RDS NAME

SCROLL RATE MEDIUM

AUTO FREQUENCY ON

SCAN SENS

LOW, MED, HIGH

TUNER SETUP

REGION

SETUP

Selects the Scan Sensitivity parameter, which can be used to set the

threshold the system will use to tune to a new station. The default

setting is LOW sensitivity (only the strongest station frequencies will

tune). If the LOW setting does not tune enough stations, try the MED

(medium) or HIGH settings.

TUNER REGION BAND LIMIT AND INCREMENTS

REGION

FM LO LIMIT

FM HI LIMIT

FM INCREMENT

AM LO LIMIT

AM HI LIMIT

AM INCREMENT

USA

EUROPE

JAPAN

87.90MHZ

87.50MHZ

76.00MHZ

64.00MHZ

107.90MHZ

108.00MHZ

91.00MHZ

76.00MHZ

200 KHZ/.2MHZ

50KHZ/.05MHZ

520KHZ

522KHZ

520KHZ

1720KHZ

1602KHZ

1720KHZ

10KHZ

9KHZ

E. EUR

3-73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

TUNER SETUP (continued)

TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

PRESS RIGHT J

TO START AUTOLOAD

REGION

USA

LOW

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

RDS NAME

SCROLL RATE MEDIUM

AUTO FREQUENCY

AUTOLOAD

TUNER SETUP

AUTOLOAD

SETUP

Automatically scans and stores presets for the currently selected

frequency band.

Note:

Presets a re sa ved when the unit is powered down. Beca use the

AUTOLOAD function preserves any existing presets, consider using the

CLEAR ALL function before using AUTOLOAD. Note that some channels

may be repeated in the preset section if AUTOLOAD is used more than

once since the last CLEAR ALL.

To select the AUTOLOAD option, highlight AUTOLOAD in the TUNER

SETUP menu and press the right (ꢀ) arrow. The message “PRESS

RIGHT ꢀTO START AUTOLOAD” appears in the on-screen and front-

panel displays.

•

To cancel the AUTOLOAD command, press the left (ꢃ) arrow.

AUTOLOAD skips presets with previously stored values and uses

the next available preset.

•

Once all available stations have been scanned, or if any TUNER

button is pressed (including the remote’s buttons), AUTOLOAD

will stop.

To autoload stations from the other frequency band, select that

band and restart AUTOLOAD.

3-74

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

PRESS RIGHT J

TO CLEAR ALL PRESETS

REGION

USA

LOW

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

RDS NAME

SCROLL RATE MEDIUM

AUTO FREQUENCY ON

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

TUNER SETUP

CLEAR ALL

TUNER SETUP

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

Clears all of the presets. When this option is highlighted, press the

right (ꢀ) arrow to select. The message “PRESS RIGHT ꢀ TO CLEAR

ALL PRESETS” will appear in the on-screen and front-panel displays.

(Press the left (ꢃ) arrow to cancel the CLEAR ALL command.)

This selection provides an alternative access point to the TUNER

PRESETS m enu. For m ore inform ation, see “T u ner P resets” on

page 5-2.

This should be used after all presets have been entered but it is

desired to rescan in order to obtain new presets. For example, if you

have moved to a new city, it would be necessary to clear all existing

presets and scan for local stations.

TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

REGION

USA

LOW

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

RDS NAME

SCROLL RATE MEDIUM

AUTO FREQUENCY ON

3-75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

TUNER SETUP (continued)

TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

RDS NAME

PRESET NAME

FREQUENCY

REGION

USA

LOW

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

RDS NAME

SCROLL RATE MEDIUM

AUTO FREQUENCY

DISPLAY

RDS NAME, PRESET NAME, FREQUENCY

TUNER SETUP

DISPLAY

SETUP

Identifies the current channel setting, in the top right corner of the

OSD and front panel display. There are three possible selections: RDS

NAME, PRESET NAME, and FREQUENCY. The default setting is RDS

NAME.

Note:

In the US, some stations broadcast other information in place of the

Program Service (PS) name, such as a text messaging feature similar to

Radio Text (RT). This can make it difficult to identify the station. You may

wish to select PRESET NAME instead of an RSD NAME in this instance.

PRESET NAME displays the name given to the preset frequency of the

currently selected channel. If the current channel is not a tuner

preset, then the channel frequency will be displayed.

RDS NAME displays the station's Program Service (PS) name, which is

intended to be used to identify a station or station program. If the

RDS information is not available, then the channel frequency will be

displayed.

FREQUENCY displays the actual frequency value of the channel

selected.

3-76

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

OFF

REGION

USA

LOW

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

RDS NAME

SCROLL RATE MEDIUM

AUTO FREQUENCY ON

RADIO TEXT

ON, OFF

SCROLL RATE

SLOW, MEDIUM, FAST

TUNER SETUP

RADIO TEXT

TUNER SETUP

SCROLL RATE

SETUP

Controls the scrolling speed of the Radio Text. The default setting is

MEDIUM. For faster text scrolling, select FAST. For slower text

scrolling, select SLOW.

Activates the RADIO TEXT (RT) feature. Radio Text is presented as

scrolling text in the bottom row of the front-panel and on-screen

displays. Radio text can contain up to 64 characters and whatever

text the station broadcasts - such as the title and performer of the

current song, the station call letters or the station byline. Not all

stations broadcast RT. When tuned to a station that broadcasts Radio

Text, it will take approximately ten seconds to display the text.

When Radio Text is active, additional information is displayed in the

scrolling text. After the RT from the radio station has finished

scrolling, double asterisks (**) are displayed, followed by the currently

set listening mode, volume level, and tuner frequency. A second set

of double asterisks identifies the end of the tuner information and the

beginning repeat of the station's Radio Text.

TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

SLOW

MEDIUM

FAST

REGION

USA

LOW

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

RDS NAME

SCROLL RATE MEDIUM

AUTO FREQUENCY ON

3-77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

TUNER SETUP (continued)

TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

OFF

REGION

USA

LOW

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

RDS NAME

SCROLL RATE MEDIUM

AUTO FREQUENCY ON

AUTO FREQUENCY

ON, OFF

TUNER SETUP

AUTO FREQUENCY

SETUP

Checks for alternate frequency broadcasts in case of station drop out

or signal fade. The default setting is ON. Many radio stations

broadcast on several frequencies simultaneously. When active, AUTO

FREQUENCY checks for these alternate frequency broadcasts when

signal failure is detected.

AUTO FREQUENCY will only switch to a new frequency when

the following conditions are met:

•

The main frequency signal starts to fade.

The channel identification of the alternate frequency is an exact

match of the currently selected frequency.

If the main frequency drops out and AUTO FREQUENCY is activated,

the volume will mute briefly until the alternate broadcast is received.

•

The alternate frequency detected has a stronger signal strength

than the currently selected frequency.

The AUTO FREQUENCY feature is ON.

3-78

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

LOCK OPTIONS

SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

Selecting the SETUP menu LOCK OPTIONS option opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu, which is used to protect MODE ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS

and SETUP menu branch parameter settings from accidental changes.

MAIN MENU

SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

MODES

AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED

SETUP UNLOCKED

LOCKED

UNLOCKED

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

UNLOCKED

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

AUDIO CNTRL

LOCKED, UNLOCKED

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

AUDIO CNTRL

MODES

UNLOCKED

LOCKED, UNLOCKED

AUDIO CNTRL

SETUP

Controls AUDIO CONTROLS menu branch settings. When set to

LO CKED, t h ese set t in g s can n o t b e ad ju st ed . Wh en set t o

UNLOCKED, these settings can be adjusted.

MODES

LOCKED, UNLOCKED

SETUP

LOCKED, UNLOCKED

SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

MODES

SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

SETUP

Controls MODE ADJUST menu branch settings, which includes all lis-

tening mode menu settings. When set to LOCKED, these settings

cannot be adjusted. When set to UNLOCKED, these settings can be

adjusted.

Controls SETUP menu branch settings. When set to LOCKED, these

settings cannot be adjusted. When set to UNLOCKED, these settings

can be adjusted.

3-79

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SETUP

LIVE! CALIBRATION

LIVE! (Lexicon Intelligent Variable Environment) is a proprietary mode

designed to transform the way your listening room sounds. LIVE! uses a

combination of microphones and digital signal processing (DSP) to

enhance the room acoustics and create the illusion of a larger, more

reverberant listening space. LIVE! CALIBRATION must be completed

before using any of the LIVE! modes.

subwoofer is present, the crossover setting of the Front L/R speakers

should be set to FULL.

Proper microphone placement, both during calibration and when

running LIVE!, is essential to achieving the desired results. Microphone

placement instructions and illustrations are included in this section.

The location of the sound source (piano, guitar, voices, etc.) is

not critical. LIVE! compensates for sounds that are closer to one

microphone or another.

Notes:

You should run automatic calibration before running LIVE! CALIBRATION.

See page 3-36 f or instructions on running an automatic calibration. Any

changes to the LEVELS CALIBRATION or CROSSOVER SETUP in the

SPEAKER SETUP menu will cause LIVE! to become uncalibrated.

CONNECTING THE MICROPHONES

CAUTION!

If power is lost during calibration of LIVE!, previous settings may be lost

and recalibration of speaker levels and distances, as well as LIVE! is

required.

•

The Lexicon microphones require careful handling.

Dropping or otherwise physically abusing the microphones

can cause irreparable damage to the microphone.

The Bass, Treble, Tilt EQ and Loudness controls do not function when

LIVE! is running. While LIVE! is active, the BASS, TREBLE, and TILT EQ

parameters are shown in the AUDIO CONTROLS menu as set to 0. The

LOUDNESS parameter is shown as set to OFF.

•

The microphone wires also require careful handling. Do not

sharply bend the wires or place objects on them.

1. Make sure the RV-8 is powered off or in standby mode.

LIVE! requires two microphones, available in a kit from your authorized

Lexicon dealer. (If you own the Lexicon four-microphone kit, there is

no need to purchase the two-microphone kit. The microphones should

be permanently mounted in the listening room. Performing LIVE!

CALIBRATION with microphones other than those in the kit can

produce undesirable results.

2. Connect the Lexicon microphones to the microphone input 1 and

2 connectors on the RV-8 rear panel. Connector 1 is for the left

m icrophone, connector 2 is for the right. Make sure each

microphone cable plug is fully inserted for a solid connection.

During the microphone check, the microphones will be referred to

as 1 and 2, based on the input connector to which the microphone

is connected. You should label the microphones for troubleshooting

purposes.

LIVE! requires that a minimum of four speakers (Front L/R, and either

side L/R or Rear L/R) be set up and connected to the amplifier. If no

3. Power on the RV-8 or deactivate standby mode.

3-80

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR LIVE!

Refer to the microphone placement examples below to position the microphones for LIVE!

PROPER

microphone positioning for LIVE!

Position the microphones:

3 On or near opposite side walls

3 Approximately halfway between the front and

side speakers

Rear

Left

3 At an approximate height between the waist and

Side

Left

head of a standing person

Rear

Right

3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other

fixtures

3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers

Side

Right

Note:

LIVE! can potentially create feedback in the system. The

processing is designed to prevent this, but you should

avoid placing the microphones too close to speakers.

Front

Left

Microphone

Center

The illustration to the right provides an example of

proper microphone placement during LIVE! calibration

and also for permanent location.

Subwoofer

Front

Right

3-81

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Lexicon

IMPROPER

microphone positioning for LIVE!

When positioning the microphones,

DO NOT:

Place the microphones on the front or rear walls

Place the microphones near the floor or ceiling

Rear

Left

Obstruct the microphones with furniture or other

fixtures

Side

Left

Rear

Place the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of

any speaker

Right

The illustration to the right provides an example of

improper microphone placement for LIVE! calibration or

for a permanent location.

Side

Right

Front

Left

Center

Microphone

Subwoofer

Front

Right

3-82

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Setup

PERFORMING LIVE! CALIBRATION

CUS

! C

!CA

HIGH AU

60 Hz

AV 10 SEC

OOM OR

RATION

TI N!

IO EVELS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

IN PROGRESS

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

TEST WILL BEGIN IN

LIVE! CALIBRATION

CALIBRATION DONE

YOU WILL

TO LEAVE T

SIT QU

PRESS TO SKIP

COUNTDOWN

OIEF

PLEASE WAIT

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

N/A

PRESSAPATORTBEGIN

COUNTDOWN

PRESS TO CONTINUE

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SIGNAL TOO LOW

PRESS TO CONTINUE

To perform LIVE! calibration:

• The CALIBRATION DONE message indicates that no errors

occurred during the calibration procedure.

1. Select SETUP ꢀ LIVE! CALIBRATION as shown above.

• The SIGNAL TOO LOW message indicates that the micro-

phones failed to pick up sufficient calibration noise signals

for calibration to complete.

2. The !CAUTION! HIGH AUDIO LEVELS message appears to indicate

that the RV-8 generates loud calibration noise signals during LIVE!

calibration. If the signals become too loud, press the ꢃbutton to

cancel LIVE! calibration. Press the ꢀbutton to begin calibration.

4. After reading the message, press ꢀ to continue.

If the SIGNAL TOO LOW message appears:

3. The countdown display notifies you that LIVE! calibration begins in

10 seconds. The primary reason for the 10-second delay is to give

you time to leave the listening space before automatic calibration

begins. If you choose to remain in the room, your movements

could affect the calibration results. If you leave the room, you can

return in about 3 minutes (the calibration procedure should be

completed). Press the ꢀ arrow button to skip the countdown

and begin LIVE! calibration. The RV-8 automatically activates LIVE!

calibration when the countdown ends.

•

Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the

microphones are properly connected to the RV-8 in micro-

phone inputs 1 and 2 and that microphone cable plugs are

fully inserted for a solid connection.

•

Examine the speakers and the associated amplifier to ensure

that speaker wires are connected and the amplifier is on.

Run a Microphone Check to determine whether a microphone

has been damaged. See page 3-40 f o r instructions on check-

ing the microphones.

When the LIVE! calibration is finished, the LIVE CALIBRATION

results screen displays one of the following two messages.

3-83

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Audio Controls

Audio Controls............................................................................4-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Audio Controls

Lexicon

AUDIO CONTROLS

Selecting AUDIO CONTROLS opens the AUDIO CONTROLS menu, which is used to customize the Main Zone audio output connectors and to

control the balance of the Zone 2 and Zone 3 audio output connectors. The BASS, TREBLE, TILT EQ, LOUDNESS, BALANCE and FADER parameters

affect the Main Zone audio output connectors, including all Main Zone inputs and listening modes, except the 5.1a BYPASS and 2CH BYPASS

listening modes. The ZONE2 BALANCE parameter controls the balance of the Zone 2 audio output connectors, including all Zone 2 inputs. The

ZONE3 BALANCE parameter controls the balance of the Zone 3 audio output connectors, including all Zone 3 inputs.

MAIN MENU

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

+0.0dB

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

+0.0dB

OFF

ZONE2 BALANCE

ZONE3 BALANCE

OFF

-3.0 to +3.0dB

-6.0 to +6.0dB

FADER

L< BALANCE >B

Default Setting

BASS

–6.0dB to +6.0dB

Parameter

Possible Settings

BASS

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

+0.0dB

OFF

–6.0 to +6.0dB

–3.0 to +3.0dB

ON, OFF

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

Controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the

Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, and

Subwoofer. The BASS Parameter Settings graph on the next page

indicates the frequency response of all BASS parameter settings.

<|>

L< to <|> to >R

B< to <|> to >F

L< to <|> to >R

<|>

TREBLE

–6.0dB to +6.0dB

ZONE2 BALANCE <|>

ZONE3 BALANCE <|>

TREBLE

AUDIO CONTROLS

Controls the amount of high-frequency boost or cut applied to the

Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center.

The TREBLE Parameter Settings graph on the next page indicates

the frequency response of all TREBLE parameter settings.

Note:

When LIVE! is active, the BASS, TREBLE, TILT EQ, and LOUDNESS

controls do not function and the corresponding parameters in the

AUDIO CONTROLS menu default to +0.0dB. The LOUDNESS

parameter defaults to OFF.

4-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Audio Controls

BASS Parameter Settings

TREBLE Parameter Settings

The BASS parameter controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the

Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center and Sub.

The TREBLE parameter controls the amount of high-frequency boost or cut

applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center.

4-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Audio Controls

Lexicon

AUDIO CONTROLS (continued)

MAIN MENU

AUDIO CONTROLS

MAIN MENU

AUDIO CONTROLS

-3.0 to +3.0dB

OFF

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

ZONE2 BALANCE

ZONE3 BALANCE

ZONE2 BALANCE

ZONE3 BALANCE

TILT EQ

–3.0dB to +3.0dB

LOUDNESS

ON, OFF

LOUDNESS

AUDIO CONTROLS

TILT EQ

AUDIO CONTROLS

Controls the amount of low-frequency boost that is automatically

applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R,

Center and Sub. When ON is selected, loudness compensation is

autom atically applied, based on volum e level. As volum e level

increases, the amount of boost automatically decreases. The loudness

contour is optimized for input sources calibrated to THX reference

levels. When OFF is selected, no loudness compensation is applied.

Controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main Zone

audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center and Sub. This

param eter setting affects the entire frequency spectrum with a

hinge point at 1kHz. As the setting increases, frequencies higher

than 1kHz are boosted while frequencies lower than 1kHz are

simultaneously cut. As the setting decreases, frequencies higher

t h an 1 kHz are cu t wh ile fre q u en cie s lo we r t h an 1 kHz are

simultaneously boosted. The TILT EQ Parameter Settings graph on

the next page indicates the frequency response of all TILT EQ

parameter settings.

Th e LOUDNESS Pa ra meter Settings g rap h on th e n ext p ag e

indicates the frequency response that is automatically applied when

the LOUDNESS parameter is set to ON and Main Zone volume level

is adjusted.

4-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Audio Controls

TILT EQ Parameter Settings

LOUDNESS Parameter Settings

The LOUDNESS parameter controls the amount of low-frequency boost that is

automatically applied to the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front

L/R, Center and Sub.

The TILT EQ parameter controls the amount of tilt equalization applied to the Main

Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center and Sub.

4-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Audio Controls

Lexicon

AUDIO CONTROLS (continued)

MAIN MENU

AUDIO CONTROLS

MAIN MENU

AUDIO CONTROLS

L< ZONE2 BALANCE >R

L< BALANCE

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

FADER

ZONE2 BALANCE

BALANCE

L< <|> >R

ZONE2 BALANCE

L< <|> >R

BALANCE

ZONE2 BALANCE

AUDIO CONTROLS

Controls the left-to-right balance of the Main Zone audio output

connectors.

Controls the left-to-right balance of the Zone 2 audio output

connectors.

ZONE3 BALANCE

L< <|> >R

ZONE3 BALANCE

FADER

B< <|> >F

AUDIO CONTROLS

FADER

AUDIO CONTROLS

Controls the left-to-right balance of the Zone 3 audio output

connectors.

Controls the front-to-back balance of the Main Zone audio output

connectors.

4-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tuner Presets

Tuner Presets ..............................................................................5-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tuner Presets

Lexicon

TUNER PRESETS

Selecting TUNER PRESETS from the MAIN MENU displays a list of the pages of existing presets. The preset number, preset name (if available),

frequency and broadcast band is displayed.

MAIN MENU

TUNER PRESETS

EDIT PRESET 1

STATION

LOADED

PAGE 1

PAGE 2

PAGE 3

PAGE 4

0.00FM

FREQUENCY

BAND

0.00

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

0.00FM

EDIT STATION NAME

LISTEN TO PRESET

NAME

CLEAR PRESET

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 8 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

PRESS MENU

TO CLEAR PRESET

Each tuner preset page

allows up to 10 preset

stations.

In the US, each preset channel is identified by the station's call

letters, or what their broadcast information identifies as the call

letters. In Europe and Japan, each preset channel is identified by the

station's Program Service (PS) nam e. If RDS inform ation is not

available, then the Preset name will be Preset XX, where XX is the

listed number location in the Preset menu for that position. For

example, if Preset #01 is FM 90.90 and the call letters are WABC,

then the name for that position is WABC.

To edit a preset, press the menu ꢁ/ꢂ arrows until the desired

preset is highlighted, then press the menu ꢀ arrow to open the

parameters menu for the selected preset.

Parameter

LISTEN TO PRESET

NAME

CLEAR PRESET

5-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Tuner Presets

LISTEN TO PRESET

CLEAR PRESET

TUNER PRESETS

PAGE 1

CLEAR PRESET

TUNER PRESETS

PAGE 1

LISTEN TO PRESET

Loads the current preset station. Press the menu ꢀ arrow to load

the station preset. The front panel and on-screen display will display

“STATION LOADED.”

Clears the current preset entry. The front-panel and on-screen

display will display “PRESS MENU ꢀ TO CLEAR PRESET.” Press the

ꢃmenu arrow to cancel without clearing the preset.

NAME

TUNER PRESETS

PAGE 1

NAME

Edits the station name. The station name can be up to 8 characters

long. The available characters are letters A to Z, numbers 0 to 9,

and 10 additional symbols: ., -, +, :, (, ), !, @, # or a blank space.

5-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Mode Adjust ...............................................................................6-2

Listening Mode Activation...........................................................6-2

Listening Mode Descriptions .......................................................6-4

Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions........6-39

Mode – Parameter Relationships ...............................................6-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

MODE ADJUST

MAIN MENU

5.1a BYPASS

2CH BYPASS

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1a

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

FILM

MUSIC

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

Selecting the MODE ADJUST option opens the MODE ADJUST menu, which is

used to select a listening mode for adjustment. When the MODE ADJUST menu

opens, the currently activated Main Zone listening mode is highlighted.

MUSIC SURR

PLIIx + THX*

PLIIx MOV*

PLIIx MUS*

PLII+ THX

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PL + THX

Select in g a list en in g m od e d oes n ot act ivat e t h at list en in g m od e

for t h e cu rren t Ma in Zon e in p u t source. Rather, selecting a listening

mode opens the corresponding listening mode menu, which is used to

custom ize the selected listening m ode. These adjustm ents are applied

when the listening mode is selected with one of the methods described in

the Listening Mode Activation section that begins below.

LIVE! LARGE

PRO LOGIC

+ THX

CIN

MUSIC

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HHALL

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

2-CH SURROUND

2-CHANNEL

MONO LOGIC

MONO SURROUND

MONO

5.1 FILM

5.1 TV

5.1 MUSIC

LISTENING MODE ACTIVATION

Listening modes are available for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES), MIC and

analog input sources. The RV-8 allows listening mode selection for all Main

Zone sources. In some cases, the RV-8 automatically activates a listening mode

in response to certain commands. For this reason, it is important to understand

the three methods through which listening mode activation occurs.

MUSIC

5.1 PLIIx MOV*

5.1 PLIIx MUS*

DIGITAL EX*

5.1 2-CHANNEL

5.1 MONO LOGIC

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

FILM*

Note:

When headphones are plugged into the RV-8, all listening modes are downmixed

to two channels with the following exceptions: HEADPHONE L7, HEADPHONE 5.1,

HEADPHONE DTS and HEADPHONE 5.1a. These listening modes are described in

detail on page 6-34.

* These listening mode

names differ depend-

ing on the current

input source, speaker

setup and parameter

settings. Refer to the

Listening Mode

MUSIC*

Listening mode a ctiva tion occurs through:

2-CHAN*

5.1a FILM

5.1a MUSIC

Descriptions for more

information.

•

the INPUT SETUP menu preferred listening mode selection parameters

(page 3-12).

5.1a

SurEX*

MUSIC

5.1a STANDARD

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

•

the front-panel or remote control Mode button (p age 2-17).

the remote control listening mode family selection buttons (page 2-17).

6-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

PREFERRED LISTENING MODE SELECTION

LISTENING MODE SELECTION BUTTONS

The INPUT SETUP menus include four preferred listening mode

selection parameters labeled 2-CH, DOLBY D, DTS(-ES), 5.1a and

MIC. These parameters are used to select a preferred listening mode

for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES), 5.1a and LIVE! input sources.

The RV-8 autom atically activates the selected listening m ode

whenever a new input is selected or a new input source is present.

The remote control listening mode selection buttons can be used

to activate the Logic 7 Film, Dolby, DTS(-ES), THX, Logic 7 Music,

or Logic 7 TV listening mode that is appropriate for the Main Zone

input source. For instance, if the L7 button is pressed while a

2-ch an n el source is p resen t, th e L7 FILM listen in g m od e is

activated. The table below indicates the listening modes associated

with each mode family selection button.

MODE ꢁ AND ꢂ BUTTONS

2-Channel Dolby Digital

DTS(-ES)

Sources

5.1a

The front-panel and remote-control Mode arrow buttons can be

used to audition listening modes with the current Main Zone input

source. Pressing these buttons scrolls up (ꢁ) or down (ꢂ) through

listening m odes available for the current Main Zone source.

Listening modes are scrolled in the order that appears in the MODE

ADJUST menu.

Button

Sources

L7 FILM

L7 MUSIC

L7 TV

5.1 L7 FILM

5.1 L7 MUSIC

5.1 L7 TV

DTS(-ES) L7 FILM

5.1a L7 FILM

L7 F

DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC 5.1a L7 MUSIC

L7 M

L7 TV

MODE SELECTION

NOT AVAILABLE**

N/A

L7 MUSIC

5.1 L7 MUSIC

DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC

L7 MS

DOLBY

DTS

SURROUND

For example, if a 2-channel input source is present, press the ꢁ or

ꢂ arrow buttons to scroll through available 2-channel listening

modes. The selected listening mode appears in the bottom-left

corner of the Main Zone two-line status.

DOLBY PLIIx MOV DD 5.1 PLIIx MOV* MODE SELECTION

NOT AVAILABLE**

DTS NEO:6 CIN

MODE SELECTION

NOT AVAILABLE**

DTS(-ES)

DOLBY PLIIx + THX

THX UL2CIN

DTS THX

DTS THX UL2 CIN

DTS(-ES) THX***

5.1a THX Sur

THX

Dyna mic Listening Mode Selection

Dynamic listening modes are only available under certain condi-

tions. For example, many of the dynamic modes are only available

when the RV-8 is configured for seven main output channels and

source m aterial with specific encoding is played. All dynam ic

listening modes are available through the remote control or front

panel Mode button.

* These listening mode names differ depending on the input source, the speaker config-

uration and certain parameter settings. For 5.1 systems with only side or rear speak-

ers (but not both), pressing the

button loads the DOLBY DIGITAL mode.

** The “MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE” message appears in the on-screen and

front-panel displays when no listening mode is available for the Main Zone input

source that is present.

*** For ES source.

See “Dynam i c Lis t en i n g Modes” on page 3-13 for a com p lete

listing of dynamic listening modes.

6-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LISTENING MODE DESCRIPTIONS

Each listening mode description lists the default and possible settings for each listening mode menu parameter. All listening mode menus are

shown in the Appendix. Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 6-39.

L7 FILM

L7 TV

FILM

MODE ADJUST

This listening mode is designed for enhanced playback of 2-channel

stereo or matrix-encoded film sources.

This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo or

matrix-encoded television broadcast sources.

Logic 7 FILM is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that derives

seven channels from 2-channel input sources. Logic 7 also derives

full-frequency stereo surround channels that realistically increase

the perceived width, length and sense of envelopm ent of the

listen in g sp ace. Log ic 7 p rovid es rem arkab le im p rovem en t

compared to other decoders.

Logic 7 TV is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on the

Logic 7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for broadcast

sources.

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

AUTO AZIMUTH

ON, OFF

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

ON, OFF

AUTO AZIMUTH

ON, OFF

FRONT STEERING

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

FILM

OFF

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

ON, OFF

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

REAR

FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

ON, OFF

REAR

FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

ON, OFF

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

OFF

ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

OFF

ON, OFF

7.0kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

OFF, 1 to 30ms

7.0kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

OFF, 1 to 30ms

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

L7 MUSIC

L7 MUSIC SURR

MODE ADJUST

MUSIC

MODE ADJUST

MUSIC SURR

This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo or

matrix-encoded music sources.

This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo

m usic so urces reco rd ed in real sp aces an d fo r p layb ack o f

recordings that contain added reverb. It is recom m ended for

classical music sources, which are often recorded in real spaces with

added reverb to enhance the stereo mix.

Logic 7 MUSIC is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on the

Logic 7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for music

sources.

Logic 7 MUSIC SURR is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that is

similar to the MUSIC SURROUND listening mode in other Lexicon

products. Logic 7 extracts ambient sounds from the input source

and sends these sounds to all speakers. Ambient sounds are heard

from all directions, creating a realistic playback presentation that

simulates what listeners experience in real spaces.

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

MUSIC

NEUTRAL

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

ON, OFF

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

OFF

ON, OFF

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

ON, OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

OFF, 1 to 30ms

FRONT STEERING

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

MSURR

NEUTRAL

Refer to p age 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

OFF

ON, OFF

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

7.0kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

OFF, 1 to 30ms

15ms

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

DOLBY PLIIx + THX & DOLBY PLII + THX

PLIIX +

MODE ADJUST

PLII +

MODE ADJUST

Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic II

that enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6.1- or

7.1-channel (six or seven speakers and a subwoofer) surround sound

from any native two-channel (stereo) or 5.1-channel source.

Note:

The PLIIx mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes if

either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.

The modes are recommended for home theaters with THX-certified

speakers. Dolby PLII(x) + THX encoding:

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ON, OFF

•

Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs

that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie

theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in

home theaters without re-equalization.

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences

between the front and surround channels, which results in

smoother sound movements between them.

The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side and rear

speakers are present. The PLII listening mode is available when the

front and side speakers are present.

Activa ting the DOLBY PLIIx + THX listening mode

The DOLBY PLIIx + THX listening mode is a dynamic listening mode

and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2-channel

Dolby Surround-encoded sources. To activate this listening mode, play

the 2-channel Dolby Surround-encoded source, then select DOLBY

PLIIx + THX using the front-panel or remote control Mode buttons.

When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automat-

ically activate the DOLBY PLIIx + THX listening mode if this listening

mode was activated the last time a 2-channel Dolby Surround-

encoded source was present.

6-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

DOLBY PLIIx MOV & DOLBY PLII MOVIE

MODE ADJUST

PLIIx MOVIE

MODE ADJUST

PLII MOVIE

Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic II

that enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6.1- or

7.1-channel (six or seven speakers and a subwoofer) surround sound

from any native two-channel (stereo) or 5.1-channel source.

Note:

The PLIIx MOV mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes

if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.

Dolby PLIIx MOV and Dolby PLII MOVIE modes:

Parameter

•

Are designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded sources.

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

Provide impressive enhancement compared to Dolby Pro Logic

decoding.

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

•

Are appropriate for Dolby Surround-encoded film sources.

The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side and rear

speakers are present.

Activa ting the DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode

The DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode is a dynamic listening mode

and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2-channel

Dolby Surround-encoded film sources. To activate the DOLBY PLIIx

Mov listening mode, play the 2-channel source input, and select the

DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode using the front-panel or remote

control Mode buttons.

When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automat-

ically activate the DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode if this listening

mode was activated the last time a 2-channel Dolby Surround-

encoded film source was present.

6-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

DOLBY PLIIx MUS & DOLBY PLII MUSIC

MODE ADJUST

PLIIx MUS

MODE ADJUST

PLII MUSIC

Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic II

that enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6.1- or

7.1-channel (six or seven speakers and a subwoofer) surround sound

from any native two-channel (stereo) or 5.1-channel source.

Note:

The DOLBY PLIIx MUS mode does not appear in the list of available listening

modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.

The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side and rear

speakers are present.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

PANORAMA

CTR WIDTH

DIMENSION

OFF

ON, OFF

Activa ting the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode

MIN, 1 to 6, MAX

FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

0 to 15ms

NEUTRAL

The DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and

cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2-channel Dolby

Surround-encoded film sources. To activate the DOLBY PLIIx MUS

listening mode, play the 2-channel source input, and select the DOLBY

PLIIx MUS listening mode using the front-panel or remote control

Mode buttons.

SURROUND DLY 10ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automat-

ically activate the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode if this listening

mode was activated the last time a 2-channel Dolby Surround-

encoded film source was present.

6-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

DOLBY PL + THX

DOLBY PRO LOGIC

PL +

MODE ADJUST

PRO LOGIC

This mode is designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded

sources and decodes four channels: three front channels and one

mono surround channel with a high-frequency rolloff above 7kHz.

This mode is recommended for home theaters with THX-certified

speakers. Dolby PL + THX mode:

The Dolby PRO LOGIC mode is designed for playback of Dolby

Surround-encoded sources. It decodes four channels from Dolby

Surround-encoded sources, and uses a mono surround channel

with a high-frequency rolloff above 7kHz.

This mode is useful for comparison purposes, particularly with the

L7 FILM, Dolby PLIIx MOVIE and DTS Neo:6 CIN listening mode.

•

Applies THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs

that occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie

theaters, and may sound too bright when played back in home

theaters without re-equalization.

Parameter

•

Applies THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences

between the front and surround channels, which results in

smoother sound movements between them.

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ON, OFF

Refer to p age 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

DTS NEO:6 + THX

DTS NEO:6 CIN & DTS NEO:6 MUSIC

CIN

MUSIC

MODE ADJUST

This mode is designed for playback of matrix-encoded digital stereo

film sources. DTS Neo:6 derives six channels when both side and rear

speakers are present (rear channels will be in parallel). It derives five

channels when only side or rear speakers are present.

These modes are designed for playback of matrix-encoded digital

stereo film or music sources. DTS Neo:6 derives six channels when

both side and rear speakers are present (rear channels will be in

parallel). It derives five channels when only side or rear speakers are

present.

In addition to THX processing, THX re-equalization is applied to

simulate high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters. Most

films are mixed for movie theaters, and may sound too bright when

played back in home theaters without re-equalization.

These listening modes are dynamic listening modes and cannot be

assigned as preferred listening modes. To select either of these

listening modes, use the remote control or front-panel Mode

button. When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will

automatically activate a DTS Neo:6 listening mode if this mode was

activated the last time a 2-channel source was present.

This listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot be

assigned as a preferred listening mode. To select this listening mode

use the rem ote control or front-panel Mode button. When the

2-CH param eter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will autom atically

activate a DTS Neo:6 + THX listening m ode if this m ode was

activated the last time a 2-channel source was present.

Note:

•

The RV-8 will not automatically activate a DTS NEO:6 listening

mode unless a 44.1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source is present.

The DTS Neo:6 listening modes are not available with 88.2kHz or

96kHz, Dolby Digital or analog sources.

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ON, OFF

The DTS Neo:6 MUSIC listening mode can be activated with the

front-panel or remote control Mode buttons. The DTS Neo:6 CIN

listening mode can also activated with the remote control DTS

button when a 2-channel input source is present.

Refer to p age 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Parameter

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HALL

MODE ADJUST

NIGHTCLUB

MODE ADJUST

CONCERT HALL

The NIGHTCLUB mode is designed for playback of “dry” music

sources th at b en efit from th e ad d ition of room reflection s,

especially music sources that lack ambience in the recording. The

NIGHTCLUB mode generates early reflections and sends them to

the front, side and rear channels to sim ulate sm all, intim ate

listening spaces.

The CONCERT HALL mode generates early reflections and sends

them to the front, side and rear channels to simulate large listening

spaces.

The CONCERT HALL mode is a superior room simulation listening

mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from

Lexicon professional products.

The NIGHTCLUB m ode is a superior room sim ulation listening

mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from

Lexicon professional products.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

CENTER DEPTH

SPEECH DETECT

SIZE

0 to 18

ON, OFF

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

20m

4 to 20m

CENTER DEPTH

SPEECH DETECT

SIZE

0 to 18

LIVENESS

1.72s

30ms to 20.2s

OFF, 1 to 100ms

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

–12 to +6dB

ON, OFF

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

OFF

4 to 20m

2.4kHz

LIVENESS

196ms

30ms to 20.2s

OFF, 1 to 100ms

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

–12 to +6dB

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

–2dB

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

5ms

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

9.0kHz

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+3dB

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Refer to p age 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

MODE ADJUST

CATHEDRAL

MODE ADJUST

CHURCH

The CATHEDRAL mode is similar to the CHURCH listening mode. It

uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich, smooth, reverberant

decay characteristic of large listening spaces – such as cathedrals –

with long reverberation time relative to their size.

The CHURCH mode uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich,

sm ooth, reverberant decay characteristic of sm all and m edium

listening spaces – such as churches and chambers – with long rever-

beration time relative to their sizes.

The CATHEDRAL m ode is a superior room sim ulation listening

mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from

Lexicon professional products.

The CHURCH mode is a superior room simulation listening mode

because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from

Lexicon professional products.

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

CENTER DEPTH

SPEECH DETECT

SIZE*

0 to 18

CENTER DEPTH

SPEECH DETECT

SIZE*

0 to 18

ON, OFF

30m

4 to 30m

20m

4 to 30m

MID RT*

3.72s

24ms to 24.3s

5ms to 48.6s

OFF, 1 to 100ms

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

–12 to +6dB

MID RT*

1.56s

24ms to 24.3s

5ms to 48.6s

OFF, 1 to 100ms

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

–12 to +6dB

BASS RT*

4.47s

BASS RT*

1.87s

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

23ms

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

24ms

3.1kHz

2.4kHz

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

–8dB

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

–3dB

Refer to page 6-37

* BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent, meaning that the full

parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings.

* BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent, meaning that the full

parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings.

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

PANORAMA

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

CALIBRATION

MODE ADJUST

PANORAMA

MODE ADJUST

PANORAMA

The PANORAMA m ode is designed for playback of stereo and

m atrix-encoded sources. PANORAMA uses proprietary Lexicon

algorithm s to m ove the stereo im age outward from the front

speakers, producing a wider stereo field with greater depth.

Select PANORAMA ꢀ CALIBRATION to open

the PANORAMA CALIBRATION menu shown

to the left, to calib rate the PANORAMA

listening mode. This listening mode must be

calib rat ed t o t ake full ad van t ag e of it s

effects.

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

SOURCE LEFT & RIGHT

SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg

LISTENER POS

Sound quality depends on proper location of the listening position

and front speakers. When the front speakers are positioned close to

either side of the display device, the effect is produced over a wider

area than when the front speakers are positioned at a large angle

from the display device.

NOTE:

ENSURE THAT

“ SPEAKER SETUP” HAS

BEEN PROPERLY

PERFORMED

For b est results, you sh ould cen ter th e

primary listening position between the front

left and right speakers as shown in the Center illustration at the top

of the next page. Otherwise, the PANORAMA listening mode will be

calibrated with varying results.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

EFFECT LVL

+4dB

–12 to +6dB

An extern al calib ratio n so u rce is req u ired to calib rate th e

PANORAMA listening mode. You should select a familiar stereo

source.

BASS CONTENT

STEREO

BINAURL, MONO, STEREO

–25 to +25dB

LOW FREQ WIDTH +0

SURR ROLLOFF

3.1kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

OFF, 1 to 30ms

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

INPUT BALANCE

CALIBRATION

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

<|>

L< to <|> to >R

SOURCE

LEFT & RIGHT RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT

Refer to next column

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

SPEAKER ANGLE

LISTENER POS

30deg

10 to 90deg

-127 to +127

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LEFT

CENTER

RIGHT

To ca libra te the PANORAMA listening mode:

1. Remove all obstructions between the speakers and the primary

listening position.

buttons. Each increment within the –127 to +127 parameter

range represents about one-third of an inch. The Le ft illus-

tration shows the left-of-center position. The Rig h t illustration

shows the right- of-center position

2. Make sure the distances between the speakers and the primary

listening position are properly measured. To do this, select one

of the following options.

4. Set the SOURCE parameter to RIGHT.

•

Select the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu DISTANCES option to

have the RV-8 automatically calibrate speaker distances.

5. Begin playback of the external calibration source.

6. When playback of the external calibration source is in progress,

set the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter so the sound is not heard in

the right ear.

•

Measure the distance between the primary listening posi-

tion and the front baffle of each speaker. Then, set the cor-

responding SPEAKER DISTANCES menu parameters to the

closest available value.

7. To confirm the LISTENER POS and SPEAKER ANGLE parameter

settings, set the SOURCE parameter to LEFT & RIGHT. If the

PANORAMA listening mode is properly calibrated, the sound

should be perceived to com e from all around the prim ary

listening position. If not, go back to Step 1 and repeat the

calibration procedure.

3. Sit in the primary listening position. If the primary listening

p osition is not centered between the front left and right

speakers as shown in illustration B (above), set the PANORAMA

CALIBRATION ꢀ LISTENER POS parameter to compensate for

the difference using the rem ote control ꢁ and ꢂ arrow

6-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

2-CH SURROUND

MONO LOGIC

MODE ADJUST

2-CH SURROUND

MODE ADJUST

MONO LOGIC

This mode, designed for playback of stereo sources, sends the left

channel to Front, Side and Rear Left channels and the right channel

to Front, Side and Rear Right channels, and sums the Left and Right

for the center. It is recommended for background music.

This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, uses proprietary

Lexicon reverb algorithms to realistically expand mono sources to

use all channels. This dramatically increases the perceived width

and sense of envelopment of the listening space.

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Refer to p age 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

EFFECT LVL

–9dB

–12 to +6dB

ACADEMY FILTER

SURR ROLLOFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ON, OFF

3.1kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

2-CHANNEL

MODE ADJUST

2-CHANNEL

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

This mode, designed for playback of stereo sources, sends the left and

right channels to the Front L/R and Subwoofer channels. It is recom-

m en d ed for two-sp eaker p layb ack with sub woofers an d for

comparison purposes with other listening modes.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

+0dB

OFF, –30 to +12dB

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

MONO SURROUND

5.1 L7 FILM

MODE ADJUST

MONO SURROUND

MODE ADJUST

5.1 FILM

This m ode, designed for playback of m ono sources, sends the

mono source to all channels.

The 5.1 L7 FILM m ode is a proprietary Lexicon listening m ode

designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded film

sources, and provides remarkable improvement compared to other

decoders.

Parameter

It derives seven channels from 5.1-channel input sources with

enhanced front steering. When both side and rear speakers are

present, the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode also increases the perceived

length and sense of envelopment of the listening space.

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

MONO

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

MODE ADJUST

MONO

VOCAL ENHANCE

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, sends mono

sources to the center channel and subwoofer.

ON, OFF

REAR

REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

ON, OFF

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

OFF

ON, OFF

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

+0dB

OFF, –30 to +12dB

7kHz

500HZ to 20kHz, OFF

OFF, 1ms to 30ms

AUTO, ON, OFF

–10.0dB to +0.0dB

Refer to page 6-37

15ms

OFF

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

+0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

5.1 L7 TV

5.1 L7 MUSIC

MODE ADJUST

5.1 MUSIC

MODE ADJUST

5.1 TV

This proprietary Lexicon listening mode is designed for playback of

5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded broadcast sources. Based on the

5.1 L7 FILM listening mode, 5.1 L7 TV derives seven channels from

5.1-channel input sources with enhanced front steering.

This proprietary Lexicon listening mode is designed for playback of

5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded music sources. Based on the 5.1

L7 FILM listening mode, 5.1 L7 MUSIC derives seven channels from

5.1-channel input sources with enhanced front steering.

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING FILM

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

ON, OFF

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING MUSIC

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

ON, OFF

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

OFF

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

OFF

REAR

REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

ON, OFF

NEUTRAL

REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

ON, OFF

5 SPKR ENHANCE ON

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

OFF

ON, OFF

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

OFF

ON, OFF

7kHz

500HZ to 20kHz, OFF

OFF, 1ms to 30ms

AUTO, ON, OFF

–10.0dB to +0.0dB

7kHz

500HZ to 20kHz, OFF

OFF, 1ms to 30ms

AUTO, ON, OFF

–10.0dB to +0.0dB

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OFF

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OFF

+0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Refer to p age 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

THX, THX UL2Cin & THX SurEX

MODE ADJUST

UL2Cin

SurEX

These modes are designed for 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel Dolby

Digital film sources that do not have THX Surround EX encoding. They

apply THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs that occur

in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie theaters, and might

sound too bright when played back in home theaters without re-equal-

ization. THX timbre matching is applied to minimize timbre differences

between the front and surround channels, which results in smoother

sound movements between them. These modes are recommended for

home theaters with THX-certified speakers.

5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with or without THX Surround

EX encoding is detected.

•

The THX SurEX listening mode is available when both the side and

rear speakers are present and THX Surround EX decoding is

engaged. THX Surround EX decoding is engaged when the

SURROUND EX parameter is set to ON or AUTO and a flagged

5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with THX Surround EX encoding

is detected.

The THX listening mode is available when both Ultra2 and THX

Surround EX decoding are deactivated.

The listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding present

in the input source, the SURROUND EX parameter setting and the

speaker setup.

Note:

Some EX-encoded sources are not flagged, and require manually

setting the SURROUND EX parameter to ON for EX decoding.

The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the

behavior of the THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX modes when

activated:

When THX Ultra 2 decoding is a ctive:

•

The THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both the side

and rear speakers are present and THX ULTRA2 decoding is

engaged. THX Ultra2 decoding is engaged when the SURROUND

EX p aram eter is set to OFF or AUTO an d a n on -flag g ed

•

Adaptive de-correlation is applied to increase the perceived

width of the listening sp ace. De-correlation of the m ono

surround channel increases the perceived width of the surround

field in home theaters.

In p ut Source

5.1-Channel THX Surround EX

Dolby Digital (Flagged)

5.1-Channel THX Surround EX

Dolby Digital (Non-Flagged)

5.1-Channel Dolby Digital

Param et er Set t in g

THX ULTRA2

THX SurEX

THX ULTRA2

THX SurEX

THX ULTRA2

THX SurEX

THX ULTRA2

SURROUND EX: AUTO

SURROUND EX: ON

SURROUND EX: OFF

6-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

•

ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.

Refer to the ASA parameter description on page 3-31 for more

information.

THX MUSIC

MODE ADJUST

MUSIC

This listening mode is designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby

Digital music sources, and cannot be activated unless side and rear

speakers are present. ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the

rear speakers. See “ASA” on p age 3-35 f o r more i n f o rmat i o n. For

best results, place the rear speakers close together in your home

theater.

When THX Surround EX decoding is a ctive:

Matrix decoding is applied to derive three surround channels from

5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER

SURROUND EX

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

ON, OFF

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OFF

AUTO, ON, OFF

–10.0 to +0.0dB

AUTO

AUTO, ON, OFF

–10.0 to +0.0dB

+0.0dB

OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

+0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Note:

The THX MUSIC listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and

cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital

sources. Activate this listening mode with the front-panel or remote

control Mode arrow buttons.

The THX UL2Cin listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and cannot

be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources.

Activate this listening mode with the front-panel or remote control Mode

buttons.

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automat-

ically activate a THX MUSIC listening mode if this mode was activated

the last time a Dolby Digital source was present.

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will automat-

ically activate a THX UL2Cin listening mode if this mode was activated

the last time a Dolby Digital source was present.

6-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

5.1 PLIIx MOV

MODE ADJUST

The 5.1 PLIIx MOV (MOVIE) listening mode is designed to play back

7.1 discrete channels decoded from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital film

sources. The seven main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel,

often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range of

up to 120Hz.

Note:

The 5.1 PLIIx MOV mode will not appear in the list of available listening

modes if either the side or rea r spea kers a re missing from the

configuration.

The 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode is only available when the front, side

and rear speakers are present.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

EX DECODING

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

AUTO

AUTO, ON, OFF

–10.0 to +0.0dB

Note:

OFF

The RV-8 cannot detect Dolby Digita l Surround EX encoding in

non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources.

+0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

Activa ting the 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

The 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and

cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital film

sources. To activate this listening mode, use the front-panel or remote

control Mode buttons.

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will

automatically activate the dynamic 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode if

this listening m ode was activated the last tim e a Dolby Digital

source was present.

6-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

5.1 PLIIx MUS

MODE ADJUST

The 5.1 PLIIx MUS (MUSIC) listening mode is designed to playback 7.1

discrete channels decoded from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital music

sources. The seven main channels are full–frequency. The .1 channel,

often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range of

up to 120Hz.

Note:

The 5.1 PLIIx MUS mode does not appear in the list of available listening

modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

Note:

EX DECODING

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

AUTO

AUTO, ON, OFF

–10.0 to +0.0dB

The RV-8 ca nnot detect Dolby Digita l Surround EX encoding in

non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources.

OFF

+0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

Activa ting the 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

The 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and

cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital

sources. To activate this listening mode, use the front-panel or remote

control Mode buttons.

When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-8 will

automatically activate the dynamic 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode if

this listening m ode was activated the last tim e a Dolby Digital

source was present.

6-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

DOLBY DIGITAL & DOLBY DIGITAL EX

MODE ADJUST

DIGITAL

DIGITAL EX

These listening modes are designed to decode and play back 5.1

discrete channels from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. The five

main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel, often referred to

as LFE information, has a limited frequency range of 120Hz.

•

Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not activated when the

EX DECODING parameter is set to OFF or AUTO and a non-

flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or

without Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected.

The mode name differs, depending on the encoding present in the

input source, the EX DECODING parameter setting and the speaker

setup.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

EX DECODING

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

AUTO

AUTO, ON, OFF

–10.0 to +0.0dB

OFF

The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is recommended for Dolby

Dig it al so u rce s re co rd e d wit h Do lb y Dig it al Su rro u n d EX

encoding. This listening mode can also be used with other types

of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources with mixed results. The table

at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the behavior

of the Dolby Digital EX mode when activated.

+0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

Note:

The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when both the

side and rear speakers are present and Dolby Digital Surround EX

decoding is activated. Matrix decoding is then applied to derive a

surround back channel from the other surround channels.

The RV-8 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in non-

flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources because they do not

include information in the input signal that identifies Dolby Digital

Surround EX encoding.

•

Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is activated when the EX

DECODING parameter is set to ON or AUTO and a flagged

5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital

Surround EX encoding is detected.

In p ut Source

5.1-Channel Surround EX

(Flagged)

5.1-Channel Surround EX

(Non-Flagged)

5.1-Channel Dolby Digital

Param et er Set t in g

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

DOLBY DIGITAL

EX DECODING: AUTO

EX DECODING: ON

EX DECODING: OFF

6-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

5.1 2-CHANNEL

5.1 MONO LOGIC

MODE ADJUST

5.1 2-CHANNEL

MODE ADJUST

5.1 MONO LOGIC

This mode, recommended for recording purposes, is designed for

converting 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded input sources into

2-channel Logic 7-encoded output signals.

This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded

mono sources, uses proprietary Lexicon reverb algorithms to realisti-

cally expand mono sources to use all channels. This dramatically

increases the perceived width and sense of envelopment of the

listening space.

The downmixed 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input signals are sent to

the Front L/R speakers and subwoofer.

Note tha t:

When a 1.0 Dolby Digital source is present, the RV-8 automatically

activates the 5.1 MONO LOGIC listening mode.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

CENTER MIX

SURROUND MIX

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

MASTER LEVEL

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

+0dB

–25 to +5dB

+0dB

–5 to +5dB

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

–127 to +127

–5 to +5dB

EFFECT LVL

–9dB

–12 to +6dB

+0dB

ACADEMY FILTER

SURR ROLLOFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ON, OFF

OFF

AUTO, ON, OFF

–20.0 to +0.0dB

OFF, -30 to +12dB

3.1kHz

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

+0.0dB

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

SUB LEVEL

+0dB

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

MODE ADJUST

5.1 MONO SURR

MODE ADJUST

5.1 MONO

This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded

mono sources, sends mono signals to all channels.

This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded

m ono sources, sends m ono signals to the center channel and

subwoofer.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

+0dB

OFF, –30 to +12dB

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

DTS-ES DECODING

The DTS, DTS-ES, and DTS-ES Discr listening modes are designed

for, at a m inim um , playback of 5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel

matrix-encoded DTS-ES and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES

sources.

•

DTS-ES decoding is deactivated when the ES DECODING

parameter is set to OFF or when the ES DECODING parameter

is set to AUTO and a 5.1-channel DTS source is detected.

DTS-ES Discr mode decodes 6.1-channel discrete-encoded

DTS-ES sources when ES decoding is set to AUTO or ON in the

MODE ADJUST menu. The mode appears in the Setup menu

when a DTS 6.1 source is present and seven speakers are

selected in the SPEAKER SETUP menu.

The DTS, DTS-ES, and DTS-ES Discr listening mode names differ

depending on the encoding present in the input source, the

DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup.

DTS-ES listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding is

activated. The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions

for the behavior of DTS-ES decoding when it is activated.

Note:

The table below is not applicable to the DTS-ES THX, DTS THX ULTRA2

and DTS THX MUSIC listening modes. These listening modes will be

explained in greater detail later in this manual.

•

DTS-ES decoding is activated when both the side and rear

speakers are present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to

O N o r AUTO a n d a 5 .1 -ch a n n e l m a t rix-e n co d e d o r a

6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is detected.

Input Source

5.1-Channel

Matrix-Encoded DTS-ES

6.1-Channel

Discrete-Encoded DTS-ES

Parameter Setting

5.1-Channel DTS

ES DECODING: AUTO

ES DECODING: ON

ES DECODING: OFF

DTS

DTS-ES

DTS

DTS-ES

DTS

DTS-ES

DTS

6-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

DTS-ES L7 FILM & DTS L7 FILM

DTS-ES L7 MUSIC & DTS L7 MUSIC

MODE ADJUST

FILM

MODE ADJUST

MUSIC

These proprietary Lexicon listening modes use an advanced matrix to

decode seven channels from 5.1- and 6.1-channel film sources with

enhanced front steering. When both side and rear speakers are

present, the DTS-ES L7 FILM listening m ode also increases the

perceived length and sense of envelopment of the listening space.

These proprietary Lexicon listening m odes, sim ilar to the DTS-ES

L7 FILM listening mode, use an advanced matrix to decode seven

ch a n n e ls fro m 5 . 1 a n d 6 . 1 -ch a n n e l m u sic so u rce s w it h

e n h a n c e d fro n t st e e rin g t o p ro vid e re m arkab le so u n d

improvement compared to other decoders.

The listening modes are designed for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel

DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES, or 6.1-channel discrete-

encoded DTS-ES film sources. The listening mode name differs,

depending on the encoding present in the input source, the ES

DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup.

The listening m od es are d esig ned for enhanced p layb ack of

5 .1 -ch an n el DTS, 5 .1 -ch an n el m atrix-en co d ed DTS-ES, o r

6 .1 -ch an n el d iscrete -e n co d ed DTS-ES m u sic so u rces. Th e

listen in g m o d e n am e d iffers, d ep en d in g o n th e en co d in g

p resen t in th e in p u t source, th e ES DECODING p aram eter

setting and the speaker setups.

Option/ Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

Option/ Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

ON, OFF

VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

MUSIC

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

ON, OFF

REAR

REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

ON, OFF

OFF

NEUTRAL

REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

ON, OFF

OFF

ON, OFF

7kHz

500Hz to 20kHz, OFF

OFF, 1 to 30ms

-10.0 to +0.0dB

AUTO, ON, OFF

OFF

ON, OFF

15ms

7kHz

500Hz to 20kHz, OFF

OFF, 1 to 30ms

+0.0dB

15ms

ES DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

AUTO

+0.0dB

AUTO

–10.0 to +0.0dB

AUTO, ON, OFF

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

ES DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

DTS-ES THX & DTS THX UL2Cin

MODE ADJUST

UL2Cin

The DTS THX UL2Cin (ULTRA2 CINEMA) and DTS-ES THX listening

modes allow 7-channel playback of 5.1-channel DTS sources that

lack DTS-ES encoding. They are designed for playback of 5.1-channel

DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES, or 6.1-channel DTS-ES

discrete-encoded film sources. DTS THX UL2Cin and DTS-ES THX

are recommended for home theaters with THX-certified speakers.

These modes apply:

When THX UL2Cin decoding is activated:

•

Adaptive de-correlation is applied to increase the perceived

width of the listening sp ace. De-correlation of the m ono

surround channel increases the perceived width of the surround

field in home theaters.

•

ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.

Refer to the ASA parameter description on p age 3-35 f or more

information.

•

THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs that

occur in m ovie theaters. Most film s are m ixed for m ovie

theaters, and might sound too bright when played back in

home theaters without re-equalization.

The DTS-ES THX listening mode

The DTS-ES THX listening mode is available when both the side and

rear speakers are present and DTS-ES decoding is active.

•

THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between

the front and surround channels, which results in smoother

sound movements between them.

DTS-ES decoding is activated when the ES DECODING parameter is

set to AUTO (the default) or ON and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded

or 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is detected.

The listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding present

in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter setting and the

speaker setup.

The table on the next page shows the conditions for the behavior of

the DTS THX UL2Cin and DTS-ES THX modes when activated:

The DTS THX UL2Cin listening mode

The DTS THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both side and

rear speakers are present and THX Ultra2 decoding is activated.

Option/ Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER

LFE MIX

ON, OFF

To activate DTS THX UL2Cin decoding:

+0.0dB

–10.0 to +0.0dB

AUTO, ON, OFF

1. Press MODE ADJUST ꢀ

ꢀ

DECODING.

ES DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

AUTO

2. Use the ꢁor ꢂarrow to select either AUTO (the default) or OFF.

Refer to page 6-37

When the ES DECODING parameter is set to OFF, the DTS-ES THX

UL2 Cin listening mode is always active. When the parameter is set

to AUTO, the DTS-ES THX UL2 Cin listening mode activates when

a 5.1-channel DTS source is detected.

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

DTS-ES THX & DTS THX UL2CIN (continued)

In p ut Source

5.1-Channel

Matrix-Encoded DTS-ES

6.1-Channel

Discrete-Encoded DTS-ES

5.1-Channel DTS

Param et er Set t in g

DTS THX UL2Cin

DTS-ES THX

ES DECODING: AUTO

ES DECODING: ON

ES DECODING: OFF

DTS-ES THX

DTS THX UL2Cin

DTS THX MUSIC

DTS, DTS-ES & DTS(-ES) Discr

Discr

MODE ADJUST

MUSIC

This mode decodes 5.1 matrix or 6.1 discrete channels from DTS-ES

sources. It is designed for playback of 5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel

matrix-encoded DTS-ES, and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES

sources.

The DTS THX MUSIC listening mode is designed for playback of

5.1-channel DTS music sources when the side and rear speakers are

present. ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear

speakers. Refer to the A SA p arameter descr i p t i o n on page 3-35 f o r

more information. This mode is recommended for home theaters

with THX-certified speaker setups.

The six decoded main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel,

often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range

of 120Hz.

The listening m ode nam e differs, depending on the encoding

present in the input source, the DECODING parameter setting, and

the speaker setup. Refer to p age 6-25 f o r more information.

Option/ Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

–10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

Option/ Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

–10.0 to +0.0dB

AUTO, ON, OFF

ES DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

AUTO

Note:

Refer to page 6-37

The DTS THX MUSIC is a dynamic listening mode and can only be

activated with the front-panel or remote control Mode ꢁ and ꢂ

buttons.

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

DTS 2-CHAN & DTS-ES 2-CHAN

5.1a L7 FILM

2-CHAN OR

MODE ADJUST

2-CHAN

MODE ADJUST

5.1 FILM

The 5.1a LOGIC7 FILM listening mode is a proprietary Lexicon lis-

tening mode that uses LOGIC7 decoding to derive seven channels

from 5.1-channel analog film sources with enhanced front steering.

Th ese m od es, recom m en d ed for record in g p urp oses, sen d

downmixed 5.1-channel or 6.1-channel DTS-ES input signals to the

front speakers and subwoofer as 2-channel Logic 7-encoded output

signals.

This listening mode allows 5.1-channel analog sources to use bass

management, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and

audio controls (tone controls).

Option/ Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

CENTER MIX

+0dB

–25 to +5dB

Option/ Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

SURROUND MIX

–5 to +5dB

CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0

–127 to +127

–5 to +5dB

VOCAL ENHANCE

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

ON, OFF

MASTER LEVEL

LFE MIX

+0dB

+0.0dB

–20.0 to +0.0dB

AUTO, ON, OFF

OFF, –30 to +12dB

REAR

REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

ON, OFF

ES DECODING

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

AUTO

+0dB

OFF

ON, OFF

Refer to page 6-37

7kHz

500Hz to 20kHz, OFF

OFF, 1 to 30ms

-10.0 to +0.0dB

15ms

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

+0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

5.1a L7 MUSIC

5.1a THX UL2Cin , 5.1a THX SurEX & 5.1a THX

MODE ADJUST

5.1a MUSIC

MODE ADJUST

OR 5.1a

SurEX

5.1a

UL2Cin

5.1a

The 5.1a THX UL2Cin, 5.1a THX SurEX, and 5.1a THX listening

modes are designed to convert 5.1-channel analog film sources that

lack THX Surround EX encoding into seven channel audio. The

modes also allow 5.1-channel analog sources to use bass manage-

ment, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and audio

controls (tone controls). The 5.1a THX UL2Cin, 5.1a THX SurEX,

and 5.1a THX listening modes are recommended for home theaters

with THX-certified speakers. These modes apply:

The 5.1a LOGIC7 MUSIC listening mode is similar to the 5.1a

LOGIC7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for music

sources. This mode is designed and recommended for playback of

5.1-channel analog music sources.

Option/ Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

ON, OFF

•

THX re-equalization to simulate high-frequency rolloffs that

occur in movie theaters. Most films are mixed for movie the-

aters, and might sound too bright when played back in home

theaters without re-equalization.

MUSIC

OFF

NEUTRAL

REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT

ON, OFF

•

THX timbre matching to minimize timbre differences between

the front and surround channels, which results in smoother

sound movements between them.

OFF

ON, OFF

7kHz

500Hz to 20kHz, OFF

OFF, 1 to 30ms

The listening mode name differs depending on the encoding present

in the input source, the SURROUND EX parameter setting, and the

speaker setup.

15ms

+0.0dB

-10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

The table at the top of the next page indicates the conditions in

which THX Ultra2 and THX Surround EX decoding are activated.

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

Input Source

5.1-Channel THX Surround EX

Analog (Flagged)

5.1-Channel THX Surround EX

Analog (Non-Flagged)

Parameter Setting

5.1-Channel Analog

SURROUND EX: ON

SURROUND EX: OFF

5.1a THX SurEX

5.1a THX ULTRA2

5.1a THX SurEX

5.1a THX ULTRA2

5.1a THX SurEX

5.1a THX ULTRA2

The 5.1a THX UL2Cin listening mode

The 5.1a THX UL2Cin listening mode is available when both side

and rear speakers are present and THX Ultra2 decoding is active.

THX Ultra2 decoding is activated when the SURROUND EX param-

eter is set to OFF. When THX Ultra2 decoding is activated:

The 5.1a THX listening mode

The 5.1a THX listening mode is available when neither THX Ultra2

nor THX Surround EX decoding is active.

•

Adaptive de-correlation is applied to increase the perceived

width of the listening space. De-correlation of the mono sur-

round channel increases the perceived width of the surround

field in home theaters.

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

RE-EQUALIZER

SURROUND EX

LFE MIX

ON, OFF

OFF

ON, OFF

•

ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers.

Refer to the ASA parameter description on p age 3-35 f o r more

information.

+0.0dB

-10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

The 5.1a THX SurEX listening mode

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

The 5.1a THX SurEX listening mode is available when both side and

rear speakers are present and THX surround EX decoding is active.

THX Surround EX decoding is activated when the SURROUND EX

parameter is set to ON.

When THX Surround EX decoding is activated Matrix decoding is

applied to derive three surround channels from 5.1-channel analog

sources.

6-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

5.1a THX MUSIC

5.1a STANDARD

MODE ADJUST

5.1a

MUSIC

MODE ADJUST

5.1a STANDARD

The 5.1a THX MUSIC listening mode is designed for playback of

5.1-channel analog music sources. It cannot be activated unless

side and rear speakers are present. This mode performs best in

home theaters where the rear speaker are placed close together.

Th is m o d e allo ws 5 .1 -ch an n el an alo g so u rce s t o u se b ass

management, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and

audio controls (tone controls). When these features are not used,

the 5.1a STANDARD listening mode is similar to the 5.1a BYPASS

listening mode. The 5.1a STANDARD mode sends identical signals

(with appropriate tim e delays) to the Main Zone audio output

connectors labeled Side L and Rear as well as Side R and Rear R.

ASA processing is applied to signals sent to the rear speakers. Refer

to the ASA parameter description on p age 3-35 f o r more informa-

tion.

Parameter

Option/ Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

-10.0 to +0.0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Note:

The 5.1a THX MUSIC listening mode can only be activated with the front-

panel or remote control Mode buttons.

6-32

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

5.1a BYPASS

MODE ADJUST

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

MODE ADJUST

5.1a BYPASS

•

Designed for playback of 5.1-channel analog sources, such as

DVD-A or SACD players.

This mode downmixes 5.1-channel analog input signals into

2-channel LOGIC7-encoded output signals. It sends these signals to

the front speakers and the subwoofer. It is recommended for

recording purposes, particularly for recording from a DVD-A or

multi-channel SACD player to a CD-R or another 2-channel record-

ing format.

Sends the 5.1-channel analog audio input connector directly to

the Main Zone volume control and audio output connectors, as

shown on pages 2-9 and 3-59. These signals receive no internal

processing.

•

When both side and rear speakers are present, surround

channel signals are sent in parallel to the side and rear speakers.

To configure a 5-channel sp eaker setup , set the OUTPUT

LEVELS m enu SIDE L/ R or REAR L/ R p aram eter to OFF to

deactivate the associated surround speakers.

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

CENTER MIX

+0dB

-25 to +5dB

SURROUND MIX

-5 to +5dB

Pressing the remote control HOME/MAIN/AGE2/A BYP then

2CH buttons toggles the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS

parameter between ON and OFF.

CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0

-127 to +127

-5 to +5dB

MASTER LEVEL

LFE MIX

+0dB

+0.0dB

-20.0 to +0.0dB

OFF, -30 to +12dB

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

SUB L/R LVL

CUSTOM

+0dB

Refer to page 6-37

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

R e f e r to page 6-37

Refer to page 6-37

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

Note:

Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances and audio (tone) controls

are not available when the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated.

6-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

2CH BYPASS

HEADPHONE L7

MODE ADJUST

2CH BYPASS

MODE ADJUST

HEADPHONE

This listening mode sends 2-channel analog audio input signals to

the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R with no

internal processing.

HEADPHONE L7 is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed

for enhanced playback of 2-channel sources through headphones.

This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing and Head Related

Transfer Functions to realistically increase the perceived sense of

envelopment when listening through headphones.

Th e 2 CH BYPASS listen in g m od e is autom atically activated

whenever a 2-channel analog source is present and the MAIN ADV

menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON. The 2CH BYPASS

listening mode is not available when a digital source is present and

the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO.

The HEADPHONE listening mode is recommended for 2-channel

sources when listening through headphones. No parameters for the

HEADPHONE listening mode are available.

Pressing the remote control HOME/MAIN/PAGE2/A BYP button then

2CH b uttons tog g les the MAIN ADV m enu ANALOG BYPASS

parameter between ON and OFF.

HEADPHONE 5.1

MODE ADJUST

HEADPHONE 5.1

Note:

HEADPHONE 5.1 is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed

for enhanced playback of Dolby Digital-encoded m usic or film

sources through headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7

processing and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically

increase the p erceived sense of envelop m ent when listening

through headphones.

Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances and audio controls (tone) are

not available when the 2CH BYPASS listening mode is activated.

The HEADPHONE 5.1 listening mode is recommended for Dolby

Digital-encoded sources when listening through headphones. No

parameters for the HEADPHONE 5.1 listening mode are available.

6-34

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

HEADPHONE DTS

LIVE! SMALL, LIVE! MED & LIVE! LARGE

MODE ADJUST

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

MODE ADJUST

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE DTS is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed

for enhanced playback of DTS(-ES)-encoded music or film sources

through headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing

and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase the

p e rce ive d se n se o f e n ve lo p m e n t wh e n list e n in g t h ro u g h

headphones.

LIVE! (Lexicon Intelligent Variable Environment) is a proprietary mode

designed to transform the way your listening room sounds. It provides

a realistic illusion of a larger, more reverberant listening space. LIVE!

SMALL simulates the reverberations of a room that is small, but larger

than an average living room. LIVE! MED simulates the reverberations of

a small hall. LIVE! LARGE simulates the reverberations of a large hall.

LIVE! requires two permanently mounted microphones. (See “L IVE!

C A LIBRATI O N” on page 3-80 for placement and calibration instruc-

tions.) LIVE! cannot be used with prerecorded sources such as CDs or

The HEADPHONE DTS listening mode is recommended for DTS-

encoded sources when listening through headphones. No param-

eters for the HEADPHONE DTS listening mode are available.

DVDs

LIVE! SMALL parameter settings:

HEADPHONE 5.1a

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

MODE ADJUST

HEADPHONE 5.1a

MID RT

597ms

3.1kHz

10ms

115ms to 15.4s

23ms to 30.8ms

500Hz to 20kHz

10ms to 100ms

BASS RT

HEADPHONE 5.1a is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed

for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel analog music or film sources

through headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing

and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase the

p e rce ive d se n se o f e n ve lo p m e n t wh e n list e n in g t h ro u g h

headphones.

ROLLOFF

TREB CUT RT

PRE-DELAY

ADVANCED

CUSTOM

Refer to page 6-37

Th e HEADPHONE 5.1a listen in g m od e is recom m en d ed for

5.1-channel analog sources when listening through headphones.

No p aram eters for the HEADPHONE 5.1a listening m ode are

available.

LIVE! SMALL ADVANCED parameter settings:

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

REVERB LVL

EARLY RFLX LVL

BASS XOVER

SHAPE

+0dB

–13dB

156Hz

–80dB to +0dB

–80dB to +12dB

30Hz to 19.9kHz, OFF

0 to 4

SPREAD

0% to 100%

SIZE

19m

4m to 60m

6-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LIVE! MED parameter settings:

LIVE! LARGE parameter settings:

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

MID RT

1.84s

115ms to 15.4s

23ms to 30.8ms

500Hz to 20kHz

10ms to 100ms

MID RT

4.71s

115ms to 30.8s

23ms to 30.8ms

500Hz to 20kHz

10ms to 100ms

BASS RT

2.76s

BASS RT

4.71s

ROLLOFF

TREB CUT RT

PRE-DELAY

ADVANCED

CUSTOM

2.4kHz

3.1kHz

18ms

ROLLOFF

TREB CUT RT

PRE-DELAY

ADVANCED

CUSTOM

3.1kHz

2.4kHz

20ms

Refer to page 6-37

LIVE! MED ADVANCED parameter settings:

LIVE! LARGE ADVANCED parameter settings:

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

Parameter

Default Setting Possible Settings

REVERB LVL

EARLY RFLX LVL

BASS XOVER

SHAPE

–4dB

–14dB

156Hz

–80dB to +0dB

–80dB to +12dB

30Hz to 19.9kHz, OFF

0 to 4

REVERB LVL

EARLY RFLX LVL

BASS XOVER

SHAPE

–6dB

–17dB

156Hz

–80dB to +0dB

–80dB to +12dB

30Hz to 19.9kHz, OFF

0 to 4

SPREAD

25%

30m

0% to 100%

SPREAD

28%

38m

0% to 100%

4m to 60m

SIZE

4m to 60m

SIZE

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

6-36

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM VS PRESET

OUTPUT LEVELS

MODE ADJUST

Listening Mode

MODE ADJUST

(Listening Mode)

CUSTOM

CUSTOM VS PRESET

Allows comparison listening between the custom and factory-default

versions of the selected listening mode. When PRESET is selected, the

listening mode is heard in its factory-default condition, as if all listening

mode menu parameters were set to their factory-default settings.

Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which is

used to adjust output levels for the Main

Zone aud io outp ut connectors lab eled

Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R.

OUTPUT LEVELS

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

+0dB

SUB

+0dB

When CUSTOM is selected, the listening mode is heard in its custom

condition, including all current listening mode menu parameter settings.

The PRESET and CUSTOM versions of the selected listening mode will

sound identical when all listening mode menu parameters are set to

their factory-default settings.

The OUTPUT LEVELS option does not appear on listening mode

menus when the selected listening mode does not accommodate

multichannel output signals. Instead, an output-specific parameter

appears. For example, the MONO listening mode menu includes a

SUB LVL parameter.

Note:

The CUSTOM VS PRESET option does not affect current listening mode

menu parameter settings.

Parameter

Default Setting

Possible Settings

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

SUB

+0dB

OFF, –30 to +12dB

PRESET

CUSTOM

CUSTOM VS PRESET

RESET MODE

See “L i stening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-39 for

detailed descriptions.

To toggle between the custom a nd fa ctory-defa ult versions of

the selected listening mode:

CUSTOM

1. Follow the CUSTOM VS PRESET menu path to open the CUS-

TOM VS PRESET drop-down menu.

CUSTOM

MODE ADJUST

(Listening Mode)

2. When the CUSTOM VS PRESET option drop-down menu is

open, press the remote control ꢁ and ꢂ arrow buttons to

toggle between the PRESET (factory-default) and CUSTOM

versions of the selected listening mode.

Opens the CUSTOM menu, which can be used to compare custom

and factory-default versions of the selected listening mode and to

restore the factory-default version of the selected listening mode.

3. When finished, press the ꢃ arrow button to close the CUSTOM

VS PRESET drop-down menu.

6-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

RESET MODE

MODE ADJUST

(Listening Mode)

CUSTOM

RESET MODE

Restores the factory-default version of the selected listening mode,

restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory default

settings.

2. Press the ꢀ arrow button to restore the factory-default version of

the selected listening mode. Press the ꢃ arrow button to close the

message without restoring the factory-default.

To restore the factory-default version of the selected listening mode:

Note:

When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to restore the

factory-default version of the selected listening mode, the corre-

sponding TRIGGER SETUP menu listening mode pa ra meter is

automatically set to OFF.

1. Follow the RESET MODE menu path to select the RESET MODE

option. The PRESS RIGHT V TO RESTORE MODE message

appears in the on-screen display.

PRESS RIGHT V

TO RESTORE MODE

CUSTOM

CUSTOM VS PRESET

RESET MODE

6-38

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION an d PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

recorded with mono bass. Select the STEREO setting for sources

recorded with stereo bass.

5 SPKR ENHANCE

ON, OFF

Simulates 7-channel playback in 5-channel speaker configurations.

Wh en set to O N, th e RV-8 p ro vid es an in creased sen se o f

spaciousness and envelopment through the surround speakers. This

enhancement is most noticeable when the surround speakers are

positioned to the side of the primary listening position, or when the

primary listening position is located against the rear wall. The effec-

tiveness of this parameter varies within the listening space. For best

results, it is recommended that you position the surround speakers

to the left and right sides of the primary listening position.

BASS ENHANCE

ON, OFF

Enhances stereo bass, which results in low-frequency reproduction

that is less localizable and more realistic in the listening space. The

effectiveness of the BASS ENHANCE parameter varies, depending

on room acoustics and the ability of the surround speakers to

reproduce low frequencies. It is recommended that you use front,

side or rear speakers that are capable of reproducing frequencies of

40Hz or lower.

ACADEMY FILTER

ON, OFF

BASS RT

5ms to 48.6s

When set to ON, restores the proper tonal balance of older mono

film sources that have much narrower frequency responses than

more recent mono film sources.

Works with the MID RT and SIZE parameters to adjust the amount

of time required for low-frequency information to decay below 60dB

in level. The BASS RT parameter setting should match the MID RT

parameter setting for more natural effects in smaller listening spaces.

AUTO AZIMUTH

ON, OFF

Maximizes matrix steering accuracy. When set to ON, the RV-8

continually monitors the 2-channel input signal and automatically

adjusts the relative level and time offset of the input channels to

ensure that signals are sent to the appropriate channels with

maximum separation. When set to OFF, the accuracy of the selected

listening mode varies among sources. It is recommended that you

set this parameter to ON for film and broadcast sources and to OFF

for music sources.

CAUTION!

Set t in g t h e BASS RT, MID RT a n d SIZE p a ra m et ers t o a h ig h

value m ay p rod uce u n d esira b le or d a m a g in g a ud io.

BASS XOVER

30Hz to 19.9kHz, OFF

Sets the frequency to which BASS RT applies.

BASS CONTENT

BINAURAL, MONO, STEREO

Adjusts the bass content of binaural, mono and stereo recordings.

When set to BINAURL, the RV-8 activates low-frequency compen-

sation. Select this setting for true binaural sources recorded with

dummy head microphones. Select the MONO setting for sources

CALIBRATION

Opens the PANORAMA listening mode CALIBRATION menu, which

is used to calibrate the PANORAMA listening m ode. Refer to

“P A N O R A M A ” o n page 6-13 for more information.

6-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION a nd PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS (continued)

especially for nighttime viewing to avoid disturbing others. Available in

all Dolby Digital modes.

CENTER

OFF, –30 to +12dB

Controls the output level of the audio output connector labeled Center.

Available in all except 2 CH modes (2-CHANNEL, 2 CH BYPASS,

DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1 2-CHANNEL), MONO, 5.1 MONO and LIVE!

modes.

CTR WIDTH

MIN, 1 to 6, MAX

Adjusts the center image. When set to MIN, the center image is heard

from just the center speaker. When set to MAX, the center image is

heard as a “phantom” center image from the front left and right

speakers. When set on the 1 to 6 scale, the center image is heard in

various combinations of the front and center speakers. Available in

Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.

CENTER DEPTH

0 to 18

Adjusts the amount of processing applied to the center channel,

changing the perceived distance of the center speaker. Higher

settings increase and lower settings decrease the perceived distance

of the center speaker from the listening position. Available in

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes.

CUSTOM

Opens the CUSTOM menu, which is used to compare custom and

factory-default versions of the selected listening mode and to restore

the factory default version of the selected listening mode. Available in

all modes.

CENTER MIX

–25 to +5dB

Indicates the relative center channel level for downmixing. Set this

parameter to +0dB for film sources and –5dB for music sources.

Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.

CUSTOM VS PRESET

Allows comparison listening to the custom and factory-default versions

of the selected listening mode. Refer to page 5-32 for information.

Available in all modes.

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

–127 to +127

Controls the relative tim e offset of the center channel. Set this

parameter to +0 unless the center channel is not properly timed

and the value of the error is known. Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and

DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.

DIMENSION

FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

Controls the relative balance of the sound field, which can be useful

with certain recordings to achieve a more suitable balance among

all speakers. When set to FRONT, the sound field is balanced toward

the front of the listening space. When set to NEUTRAL, the sound

field is balanced at the center of the listening space. When set to

REAR, the sound field is balanced toward the rear of the listening

space. Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.

COMPRESSION

AUTO, ON, OFF

Reduces wide volume level changes and increases dialogue intelligi-

bility at lower listening levels for Dolby Digital input sources. When

ON, full compression is applied, regardless of volume level. When OFF,

compression is not applied. Set this parameter to AUTO or ON for

Dolby Digital input sources that are listened to at lower volume levels,

6-40

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is present.

This parameter is available in all DTS modes.

EARLY RFLX LVL

Controls the amount of additional early reflections. Available in all

LIVE! modes.

–80dB to +12dB, OFF

EX DECODING

AUTO, ON, OFF

EFFECT LVL

–12 to +6dB

Controls Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding, which extracts a rear

channel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources recorded with or

without Dolby Digital Surround EX. When ON, Dolby Digital

Surround EX decoding is engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital

sources. When OFF, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is disen-

gaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.

Adjusts the amount of effect applied to the listening mode. Available

in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL, PANORAMA,

MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC modes.

ES DECODING

AUTO, ON, OFF

Controls DTS-ES decoding, which extracts a rear channel from

5.1-ch an n el DTS, 5.1 -ch an n el m atrix-en cod ed DTS-ES an d

6 .1 -ch an n el d iscrete-en cod ed DTS-ES sources. When ON is

selected, DTS-ES decoding is activated for all DTS-ES sources. When

OFF is selected, DTS-ES decoding is deactivated for all DTS-ES sources.

When AUTO is selected, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is

engaged when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded

with Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected. Dolby Digital

Surround EX d ecod ing is not eng ag ed when a non- flag g ed

5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or without Dolby

Digital Surround EX encoding is detected.

DTS-ES decoding is activated when AUTO is selected and a 5.1-channel

matrix-encoded or a 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is

detected. DTS-ES decoding is deactivated when a 5.1-channel DTS

source is detected.

Note:

The RV-8 cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding

in non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged input

source does not identify Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in the input

signal.

DTS-ES listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding is

engaged. DTS listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding

is not engaged. Refer to the DTS-ES Decoding section that begins

on page 5-25 for more information.

The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening m ode is available when Dolby

Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged. The Dolby DIGITAL

listening m od e is availab le when Dolb y Dig ital Surround EX

decoding is not engaged. Refer to the Dolby DIGITAL EX & Dolby

DIGITAL listening mode descriptions that begin on page 5-22 for

more information.

Note the following:

•

DTS-ES decoding cannot be engaged unless both side and rear

speakers are present.

The DTS-ES STATUS menu includes an SB level meter when the

ES DECODING parameter is set to ON and a 5.1-channel DTS

source is present or when the ES DECODING parameter is set to

AUTO and a 5.1-channel m atrix-encod ed or 6.1-channel

Note the following:

•

Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless

both side and rear speakers are present.

6-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION a nd PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS (continued)

•

This parameter is available in 5.1 PLIIx MOV, 5.1 PLIIx MUS,

DOLBY DIGITAL EX and DOLBY DIGITAL modes.

Careful adjustment of this parameter allows achievement of proper

tonal balance and reduces the risk of subwoofer overload. When the

speaker setup does not include a subwoofer, LFE information is mixed

into speakers for which the corresponding CUSTOM SETUP menu

parameter is set to FULL or to the lowest crossover points. Available in

all Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes (5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1

MONO SURR, 5.1 MONO) and all DTS modes.

When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the

rem ote control DOLBY button while a 5.1-channel Dolby

Digital source is present activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or

Dolby DIGITAL listening mode. Subsequent presses adjust the

EX DECODING parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON and

OFF settings.

LISTENER POS

–127 to +127

FRONT STEERING

OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM

Compensates for primary listening positions that are not centered

between the front left and right speakers. Each increment within the

–127 to +127 parameter range represents about one-third of an inch.

Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 5-13 for more

information. Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION mode.

Adjusts front steering between the front left, front right, and center

speakers. When set to FILM, maximum front steering is applied to

the center channel. When set to MUSIC, moderate front steering is

applied. When set to MSURR, minimum front steering is applied.

When set to OFF, no front steering is applied. It is recommended

that you set this parameter to FILM for film and broadcast sources

and to MUSIC, MSURR or OFF for music sources. Available in L7 TV,

L7 MUSIC, L7 MUSIC SURR, all 5.1 L7 modes and all DTS L7 modes.

Note:

The LISTENER POS parameter range might extend past the location of the

front left and right speakers.

INPUT BALANCE

L< to <|> to >R

LIVENESS

30ms to 20.2s

Controls the balance of the selected stereo analog audio input

connectors, compensating for audio input sources with audible

channel imbalance. Available in PANORAMA mode.

Depends on the SIZE parameter setting. The LIVENESS parameter

adjusts the amount of effect recirculation. Higher settings mimic

m ore reflective surfaces and increase decay tim e. Available in

NIGHTCLUB and CONCERT HALL modes.

LFE MIX

–20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB

Controls the output level of LFE information – the .1 channel in a 5.1-

or 6.1-channel input source – that is sent to the audio output labeled

Subwoofer. Low frequencies from up to seven other channels might be

combined with the LFE information to create the subwoofer output

signal, which significantly increases subwoofer output levels.

LOW FREQ WIDTH

–25 to +25dB

Applies low-frequency spatial correction to the input signal. This

correction is applied to uncorrelated input signals below 60Hz.

Available in PANORAMA mode.

6-42

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

Note:

MASTER LEVEL

–5 to +5dB

The PANORAMA parameter within the Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx

MUSIC listening modes should not be confused with the separate

PANORAMA listening mode (page 6-13).

Adjusts the output level of 2-channel Logic 7-encoded sources.

Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.

MID RT

24ms to 24.3s

PRE-DELAY

1 to 100ms, OFF

Works with the SIZE param eters to adjust the am ount of tim e

required for mid-frequency information to decay below 60dB in

level. The full parameter range might not be available depending

on the SIZE parameter setting. Available in CHURCH, CATHEDRAL

and all LIVE! modes.

Adjusts delay time between the direct sound and the onset of rever-

beration. Higher settings make the simulated space sound larger.

Because som e pre-delay is inherent in all source m aterial, you

should begin with the parameter set to the lowest setting, then

make adjustments accordingly. Available in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT

HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.

CAUTION!

Set t in g t h e BASS RT, MID RT or SIZE p a ra m et ers t o a h ig h

va lue m a y p rod uce un d esira b le or d a m a g in g a ud io.

RE-EQUALIZER

ON, OFF

Sim ulates high-frequency rolloffs that occur in m ovie theaters.

When set to ON, the RV-8 applies a high-frequency filter. When set

to OFF, the RV-8 does not apply a high-frequency filter. It is recom-

mended that you set this parameter to ON for film sources, as many

films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too bright

when played back in hom e theaters without re-eq ualization.

Available in L7 FILM, L7 TV, Dolby PLII + THX, Dolby PLIIx + THX, 5.1

L7 FILM, 5.1 L7 TV, THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX, DTS (-ES) L7 FILM,

DTS(-ES) THX ULTRA2 and DTS(-ES) THX modes.

OUTPUT LEVELS

Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which is used to adjust output

levels for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Center,

Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R. Refer to page 5-32 for more

inform ation. Available in all excep t 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1

2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and

LIVE! modes.

PANORAMA

ON, OFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

OFF, 1 to 30ms

When set to ON, Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC listening

modes extend the front stereo image to include surround channel

signals, which creates a “wraparound” effect with side wall imaging.

Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.

Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying the

arrival time of rear speaker signals. It is recommended that you

increase the setting when using side and rear speakers that are

located close together or when a greater sense of depth is desired in

the listening space. Available in all Logic 7 modes and PANORAMA

mode.

6-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION a nd PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS (continued)

REAR L/R

–30 to +12dB, OFF

SIDE L/R

–30 to +12dB, OFF

Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connector

labeled Rear L/R. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1

2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and

LIVE! modes.

Controls the level of the Side L/R audio output connectors in the Main

Zone. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL,

5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes.

SIZE

4 to 20 or 30m

RESET MODE

Adjusts the length of the listening space within a 4m to 20m or

30m range (depending on the listening mode). Increase the size of

the space to increase the reverb effect. Available in NIGHTCLUB,

CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.

Restores the factory-default version of the selected listening mode,

restoring all listening m ode m enu param eters to their factory-

default settings. Available in all modes.

CAUTION!

REVERB LVL

–80 to +0dB, OFF

Set t in g t h e BASS RT, MID RT a n d SIZE p a ra m et ers t o a h ig h

value m ay p rod uce u n d esira b le or d am ag in g aud io.

Controls the amount of added reverb. Available in all LIVE! modes.

ROLLOFF

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

SOUND STAGE

FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR

Simulates the absorption of high frequencies in a real space. It is

recommended that you begin with a low setting to simulate high-

frequency absorptive spaces. Available in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT

HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.

Dynam ically controls the relative balance of the audio output

connectors. When set to FRONT, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels

are attenuated by 6dB, shifting the perceived balance of the sound

field to the front of the listening space. When set to NEUTRAL, Side L/R

and Rear L/R output levels are slightly attenuated by 3dB, shifting the

perceived balance of the sound field to the center of the listening

space. When set to REAR, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels are not

attenuated, preserving the intended balance of the sound field.

Available in all Logic 7 modes.

SHAPE

0 TO 4

Controls the buildup of the energy that most audibly creates the

sound of a real room. SHAPE and SPREAD work together – if either is

set to zero, the other has no effect. Available in all LIVE! modes.

6-44

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

SOURCE

RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT

SPREAD

0 to 100%

Controls the perceived direction of the PANORAMA listening mode

external calibration source signal. When RIGHT is selected, the

sound is perceived to come from the right of the primary listening

position. When LEFT is selected, the sound is perceived to come

from the left of the primary listening position. When LEFT & RIGHT

is selected, the sound is perceived to come from all around the

primary listening position. Refer to the Calibration section that

beg i n s on page 6-13 for m ore inform ation about the SOURCE

parameter. Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION.

Controls the timing between the initial reflections that most audibly

create the sound of a real room. SHAPE and SPREAD work together; if

either is set to 0, the other has no effect. Available in all LIVE! modes.

SUB & SUB LVL

OFF, –30 to +12dB

Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connector

labeled Subwoofer. The SUB parameter appears on the listening

mode OUTPUT LEVELS menu. The SUB LVL parameter appears on

listening mode menus when the listening mode does not accom-

modate multichannel output signals. Available in all except LIVE!

modes.

Note:

The SOURCE parameter controls the perceived direction of the sound,

although both the front left and right speakers generate the external

calibration source signal.

SURR ROLLOFF

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

Applies high-frequency attenuation control to the audio output

connectors labeled Side L/R and Rear L/R. This filter is only applied to

output signals generated by the RV-8. Available in all Logic 7 modes.

SPEAKER ANGLE

10 to 90deg

Compensates for a wide or narrow speaker angle relative to the

primary listening position. Select the setting closest to the angle

between the front left and right speakers and the primary listening

position. Refer to the Calibration section that beg i n s on page 6-13

for m ore inform ation ab out the SPEAKER ANGLE p aram eter.

Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION.

SURROUND DLY

0 to 15ms

Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying the

arrival time of signals from the side and rear speakers. It is recom-

m ended that you increase the setting when a greater sense of

depth is desired in the listening space.

SURROUND EX

AUTO, ON, OFF

SPEECH DETECT

ON, OFF

Controls the THX Surround EX decoding feature, which can be used to

extract a rear channel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. When

ON is selected, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged for all

5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. When OFF is selected, THX

Surround EX decoding is not engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital

sources. Available in THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX and THX modes.

Distinguishes monaural speech from other input sources. When set to

ON, effects are lowered to minimize interference and unnatural echo

in monaural speech. When stereo input sources are present, the front

left and right channels are independently used as inputs for ambience

synthesis. When strong monaural speech is present in the input source,

the monaural component of the ambience effect is reduced and the

stereo component of the effect is increased. When set to OFF, the

amount of ambience synthesis is dynamically controlled. Available in

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes.

6-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION a nd PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS (continued)

When AUTO is selected, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged

when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source with THX Sur-

round EX encoding is detected. THX Surround EX decoding is not

engaged when a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source

with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected.

SURROUND MIX

-5 to +5dB

Controls the relative level of surround channel information sent to the

audio output connectors labeled Front L/R. It is recommended that

you set this parameter to +2dB or +3dB for all input sources. Available

in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN modes.

LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

(continued)

TREB CUT RT

500Hz to 20kHz

Sets the frequency above which high frequencies are rolled off in

the reverberated signal, causing reverberated signals to grow

progressively darker. This results in a more natural sound because it

sim ulates the effect of air absorption in a real hall. Setting this

parameter to a low frequency dampens the audio as it re-circulates,

and consequently can actually shorten the reverb time. Available in

all LIVE! modes.

not engaged when a non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source

with or without THX Surround EX encoding is detected.

Note:

The RV-8 cannot automatically detect THX Surround EX encoding in non-

flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged input source

does not include information in the input signal that identifies THX

Surround EX encoding.

VOCAL ENHANCE

+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB

THX Surround EX listening modes are available when Dolby Digital

Surround EX decoding is engaged. THX or THX ULTRA2 listening

m odes are available when THX Surround EX decoding is not

engaged. Refer to the 5.1 THX ULTRA2, 5.1 THX SurEX and 5.1 THX

listening mode descriptions that b eg i n o n page 6-18, or the DTS

THX ULTRA2 and DTS-ES THX listening mode descriptions that

begin on p age 6-27 f or more information.

Controls the level of dialog-boost in the audio output connector

labeled Center. Increase this setting to improve dialog intelligibility,

particularly at lower volume levels. Available in all Logic 7 modes.

Note the following:

•

Toggling the SURROUND EX parameter setting produces low

level clicks in the front speakers.

THX Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless both

side and rear speakers are present.

6-46

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

MODE – PARAMETER RELATIONSHIPS

The following table lists each parameter and the modes in which it is used.

The parameter...

Is used in these modes

5 SPKR ENHANCE

ACADEMY FILTER

AUTO AZIMUTH

BASS CONTENT

BASS ENHANCE

BASS RT

All L7 modes

MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC

L7 FILM and L7 TV

PANORAMA

All L7 modes

CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

PANORAMA

CALIBRATION

CENTER

All except 2 CH modes (2-CHANNEL, 2 CH BYPASS, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 MONO and

LIVE! modes)

CENTER DEPTH

CENTER MIX

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL

5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

COMPRESSION

CTR WIDTH

5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN

All Dolby Digital modes

Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC

CUSTOM

All modes

CUSTOM VS PRESET

DIMENSION

All modes

Dolby DPLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC

EARLY RFLX LVL

EFFECT LVL

All LIVE! modes

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL, PANORAMA, MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC

All DTS modes

ES DECODING

6-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mode Adjust

Lexicon

MODE-PARAMETER RELATIONSHIPS (continued)

The parameter...

Is used in these modes

EX DECODING

FRONT STEERING

INPUT BALANCE

LFE MIX

5.1 PLIIx MOV, 5.1 PLIIx MUS, DOLBY DIGITAL EX and DOLBY DIGITAL

L7 TV, L7 MUSIC, L7 MUSIC SURR, all 5.1 L7 modes and all DTS L7 modes

PANORAMA

All Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes (5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1 MONO SURR, 5.1 MONO), all DTS modes

and 5.1a BYPASS

LISTENER POS

LIVENESS

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL

LOW FREQ WIDTH

MASTER LEVEL

MID RT

PANORAMA

5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN

CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes

Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC

OUTPUT LEVELS

PANORAMA

PRE-DELAY

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

RE-EQUALIZER

L7 FILM, L7 TV, Dolby PLII + THX, Dolby PLIIx + THX, 5.1 L7 FILM, 5.1 L7 TV, THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX, DTS

(-ES) L7 FILM, DTS (-ES) THX ULTRA2 and DTS (-ES) THX

REAR DLY OFFSET

REAR L/R

All L7 modes and PANORAMA

All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes

RESET MODE

REVERB LVL

ROLLOFF

All modes

All LIVE! modes

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

All LIVE! modes

SHAPE

SIDE L/R

All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes

6-48

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Mode Adjust

The parameter...

Is used in these modes

SIZE

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes

All L7 modes

SOUND STAGE

SOURCE

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

SPEAKER ANGLE

SPEECH DETECT

SPREAD

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL

All LIVE! modes

SUB & SUB LVL

SURR ROLLOFF

SURROUND DLY

SURROUND EX

SURROUND MIX

TREB CUT RT

VOCAL ENHANCE

All except LIVE! modes

All L7 modes

Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC

THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX

5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN

All LIVE! modes

All L7 modes

6-49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Troubleshooting..........................................................................7-2

Routine Maintenance ..................................................................7-4

Restoring Factory-Default Settings...............................................7-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Lexicon

TROUBLESHOOTING

The RV-8 does not power on.

front-panel displays when audio has been muted. To deactivate

mute, press the Mut e button or adjust the volume level.

1. Make sure the rear-panel power switch is set to the | (“on”)

position.

3. Check the INPUT SETUP menu DIGITAL IN and ANALOG IN

parameters to ensure the appropriate audio connector is assigned

to the selected input.

2. Attempt to power on the RV-8 with the front-panel St a n d b y

button and remote control On button.

4. Make sure the RV-8 is receiving an audio signal. To do this,

f o l l o w the i n structions that beg i n o n page 2-29 to open the

STATUS menu for the current input source.

3. Examine the power cord to ensure a good connection between

the rear-panel AC input connector and the wall outlet.

4. Check the electrical circuit and breaker.

Dialogue sounds muffled.

The remote control does not work.

If the speaker setup does not include a center speaker, make sure a

custom – as opposed to a THX – speaker setup is selected. Then,

make sure the CUSTOM SETUP menu CENTER parameter is set to

NONE (page 3-31).

1. Eliminate obstructions between the remote control and the

front-panel IR receiver. When the RV-8 is not using the rear-

panel IR IN connector, the remote control must be in line of

sight with the front-panel IR receiver for proper operation. The

remote control might also become unreliable if strong sunlight

or fluorescent light is shining on the IR receiver.

A humming sound is present in the audio.

1. If a cable TV connection is present, disconnect the cable from

the wall outlet. If this eliminates the humming sound, a ground

loop isolation device is required. Contact your dealer or the

cable provider for assistance.

2. Make sure the remote control batteries are correctly inserted

with the proper polarity (page 1-6).

3. Replace the remote control batteries. When the batteries are

low on p ower, th e rem ote con trol en ters a low-voltag e

condition that prevents it from operating the RV-8.

2. Disconnect components one at a time to isolate the problem.

Once the problem is identified, m ake sure the associated

component is properly grounded and connected to the same

electrical circuit as the RV-8.

The RV-8 is powered on, but there is no audio.

1. Make sure volume level is audible. Volume level can be

increased with the front-panel volum e knob or the rem ote

control VOL ꢁand ꢂbuttons.

The RV-8 is powered on, but there is no video.

1. Examine the video cables – particularly the S-Video cables –

to ensure a good connection to the associated component.

2. Make sure audio has not been muted. The message “MUTE

ON” or “FULL MUTE ON” will appear in the on-screen and

7-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

2. Check the INPUT SETUP menu VIDEO IN and COMPONENT IN

(p age 3-11) p aram eters to ensure the ap p rop riate video

connector is assigned to the selected input.

2. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer.

3. Contact Lexicon customer service at 781-280-0300 or

www.lexicon.com.

Note:

RF interference is present in the audio or video.

Visit the knowledgebase at http://www.lexicon.com/kbase for

answers to frequently asked questions and additional trouble-

shooting information.

1. Make sure the RV-8 is not positioned near unshielded TV or FM

antennas, cable TV decoders and other RF-emitting devices.

2. Replace unshielded cables with shielded cables wherever possible.

The tuner volume suddenly went mute, then after a minute it

resumed. This seems to happen occasionally.

The RV-8 is exhibiting erratic behavior.

Under the TUNER SETUP menu, is the AUTO FREQUENCY option

active? You may be experiencing broadcast station dropouts. When

the broadcast signal drops out, the volume is muted and AUTO

FREQUENCY activates, scanning for alternate broadcast frequencies

and then verifying that the station ID is an exact match. If the

station ID matches and the alternate frequency is a stronger signal,

then the tuner switches to the alternate frequency and turns off the

volum e m ute. Otherwise, auto freq uency scans for another

alternate frequency and repeats the procedure. If there are a lot of

alternate broadcast frequencies, this process can take a noticeable

amount of time. To stop this behavior, simply turn off the Auto

frequency option.

1. Set the rear-panel power switch to the c(“off”) position. Wait

10 seconds. Then set the rear-panel power switch to the |

(“on”) position.

2. Use the RV-8 configuration tool to download the current RV-8

configuration to a personal computer (PC) or document all user-

defined settings on the Installation Worksheet that begins on

page D-2. Then, follow the instructions on the next page to

restore factory-default settings.

If all else fails...

1. Document all user-defined settings on the Installation

Worksheet that begins on page D-2. Then, follow the instruc-

tions on p age 7-4 to restore factory-default settings.

7-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Lexicon

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

The bulleted items below describe routine maintenance that should

be performed on a periodic basis.

low-pressure blower can be used to remove dust from its

exterior surface.

•

Replace the remote control batteries as needed. The remote

control requires four AAA batteries. When these batteries are

low on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage

condition that prevents it from operating the RV-8. Normal

operation will resume when new batteries are installed.

•

Clean the RV-8 exterior surface with a soft, lint-free cloth. Do

not use alcohol, benzene, acetone-based cleaners or strong

commercial cleaners. Do not use a cloth made with steel wool

or metal polish. If the RV-8 is exposed to a dusty environment, a

RESTORING FACTORY-DEFAULT SETTINGS

When factory-default settings are restored, all parameters and user-

defined values are restored to their factory-default settings. Before

restoring factory-default settings, record all user-defined settings in

the Installation Worksheet in the Appendix on page D-2.

3. Press the front-panel standby button or the remote control On

button to deactivate standby mode and activate the RV-8.

4. Quickly press and hold the front-panel or remote control Mute

button until the FACTORY SETTINGS menu opens in the on-

screen and front-panel displays.

FACTORY SETTINGS

5. Press the remote control ꢁ and ꢂ arrow buttons to highlight

the desired option. Highlight the RESTORE DEFAULTS option to

restore factory-default settings. Highlight the EXIT option to

close the FACTORY SETTINGS menu without restoring factory-

default settings.

EXIT

HAVE BEEN RESTORED

PRESS ANY KEY

TO RESTART

RESTORE DEFAULTS

6. When the desired option is highlighted, press the remote

To restore factory-default settings:

control ꢀ arrow button to select this option.

1. Record all user-defined settings on the Installation Worksheet

that begins on page D-2. When factory-default settings are

restored, all parameters and user-defined values are restored to

their factory-default settings.

•

If the RESTORE DEFAULTS option was selected, the

FACTORY SETTINGS message shown in the previous page

will appear in the on-screen and front-panel displays. When

this message appears, press a front-panel or remote control

button to restart the RV-8.

2. If the RV-8 is powered on, press the front-panel standby button

or the remote control Off button to activate standby mode and

deactivate the RV-8. If the RV-8 is in standby mode, proceed to

step 3.

•

If the EXIT option is selected, the FACTORY SETTINGS menu

will close and the two-line status will open in the on-screen

and front-panel displays.

7-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix

Specifications ............................................................................ A-2

Declaration of Conformity ......................................................... A-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix A

Lexicon

SPECIFICATIONS

Main Zone Audio Performance

Input Sensitivity

200mV Rms (2V Rms for maximum output level) at 0dB

Audio Input & Output Connectors

input gain

Input Impedance

100kΩ in parallel with 150pF

Analog Audio Inputs

Eight stereo (RCA) or five stereo and one 5.1-channel or 2

stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors

Preamp Output Level

•

150mV Rms typical, 6V Rms maximum (RCA connectors)

Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume

at +12dB

Digital Audio Inputs

•

Four S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) and four S/PDIF optical

connectors

•

Coaxial and optical input connectors conform to IEC-

958, S/PDIF standards

Preamp Output

Impedance

500Ω in parallel with 150pF (RCA connectors)

•

Accepts 44.1, 48, 88.2 and 96kHz sample rates

Accepts 16-24-bit PCM audio, Dolby Digital, DTS, DTS-

ES discrete and DTS-96K data formats

Zone 2 and Zone 3 Audio Performance

Main Zone Audio

Outputs

Eight unbalanced (RCA) connectors for Front L/R, Center,

Sub, Side L/R and Rear L/R

A/D Conversion

D/A Conversion

24-Bit, 44.1 to 96kHz, multibit ΔΣarchitecture (Zone 2 only)

24-Bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multibit ΔΣ architecture

Zone 2 Audio Outputs • One unbalanced (RCA, variable output level) stereo con-

Frequency Response 10Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/–0.25dB, –0.75dB at 40kHz,

reference 1kHz

nector

• One unbalanced (RCA, fixed output level) stereo connector

• One S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) connector and one optical con-

nector

THD + Noise

Below 0.005% at 1kHz, (1V Rms output level)

101dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth

Dynamic Range

Zone 3 Audio Outputs One stereo (RCA, variable output level) connector

Signal-to-Noise Ratio 101dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth

Headphone

Amplifier

One stereo (1/4-inch phone) connector

Input Sensitivity

200mV Rms (4V Rms for maximum output level)

100kΩ in parallel with 150pF

Seven channels, two channels can be assigned to Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Input Impedance

Preamp Output Level

•

200mV Rms typical, 4V Rms maximum

Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume

at 0dB

Main Zone Audio Performance

Preamp Output

Impedance

300Ω in parallel with 150pF

A/D Conversion

D/A Conversion

24-Bit, 96kHz, dual-bit ΔΣarchitecture

24-Bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multibit ΔΣ architecture

*Frequency Response 20Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/–0.1dB, –0.25dB at 40kHz,

–0.5dB at 40kHz, reference 1kHz

Video Input & Output Connectors

*THD + Noise

Below 0.02%, 20Hz to 20kHz, 140W Rms all channels driven

Video Inputs

Five composite (RCA), five S-Video and three component

video (RCA)

*Dynamic Range

•

105dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, “A” weighted

102dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, unweighted

Video Outputs

Two composite (RCA, one monitor and one Zone 2), two

S-Video (one monitor and one Zone 2) and one component

(RCA)

*Signal-to-Noise Ratio

•

105dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, “A” weighted

102dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, unweighted

A-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix A

Composite & S-Video Performance

FM Tuner Performance

Compatibility

Switching

NTSC, PAL and SECAM

Active

Selectivity

>87dBmV, 93dBmV typical

Frequency Response 50Hz to 16kHz, +0.1dB/-1.0dB

Output Level

Impedance

1.0V peak-to-peak

THD + Noise

<0.4% at 1 kHz (stereo)

Signal-to-Noise Ratio 50dB minimum at 60dBmV

75Ω

Image Rejection

AM Suppression

>50dB, >60dB typical

>45dB, >55dB typical

Input Return Loss

Differential Gain

Differential Phase

Bandwidth

>40dB

<0.5%

<0.5°

>25MHz

<0.3%

±0.15dB

AM Tuner Performance

K Factor

Tuning Range

Usable Sensitivity

THD + Noise

520 to 1720kHz

<8uV, 4uV typical

Gain

Signal-to-Noise Ratio >65dB

< 0.56%, 0.20% typical (1kHz, 60dBmV, 30% mod)

>80dBmV

Frequency Response 10Hz to 10MHz + 0.1/–0.3dB

Wideband AGC

Component Video Performance

Phono Performance (MM)

Compatibility

Switching

3-Channel (Y, Pr, Pb), format-independent

Frequency Response 50Hz to 20kHz, +0.5dB/-0.5dB, rumble filter -4dB at 10Hz

Passive

THD + Noise

< 0.20%, 20Hz to 10kHz, 4.7mV input

Impedance

75Ω

Signal-to-Noise Ratio 72dB minimum

Insertion Loss

Bandwidth

<3dB

>150MHz

Compatible Amplifier Connectors

Video Converter

NTSC, PAL, SECAM, to Y/Pb/Pr

Banana Plugs

Spade Connectors

Bare Wire

Standard 0.75 inch plugs

Size 10-12 gauge

Microphone Input Connectors

Up to 10 gauge bare wire

Inputs

Two microphone jacks

Input Sensitivity

Input Impedance

10mV Rms (400mV maximum input level)

20kΩ (accepts balanced or unbalanced input signals)

Other

Trigger Outputs

One power on/off and one programmable connector on

detachable screw terminals (+12 VDC, 0.5 amps each)

FM Tuner Performance

RS-232 Serial Input/ Two 9-pin D-sub connectors

Output

Tuning Range

64MHz to 108MHz

<4uV, 1.6mV typical

Usable Sensitivity

A-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix A

Lexicon

Other

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

Power Requirements 120-230 VAC, 50-60Hz, 60W (universal line input), detach-

able power cord

Application of Council Directive(s):

RV-8

Dimensions &

Weight

•

Height (with feet): 7.76 inches (197.1mm)

Width: 17.3 inches (440mm)

Depth: 21.2 inches (538.48mm)

Weight: 65 lb. (29.48kg)

89/336/EEC and 93/68/EEC

Standard(s) to Which Conformity is Declared:

EN 55013:2001

Rack-Mounting

Environment

•

Optional brackets are available for installation in a stan-

dard 19" equipment rack (two rack units required)

EN 55020:2002

•

Operating temperature: 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)

Storage temperature: –30° to 75°C (–22° to 167°F)

Relative humidity: 95% maximum without condensation

EN 61000-3-2-2000

EN 61000-3-3:1995+A1:2001

Remote Control

•

Handheld, backlit infrared remote control unit, prepro-

grammed and learning

EN 61000-3-11:2000

EN 60065:1998

• Requires four AAA batteries (alkaline batteries recom-

mended)

Manufacturer:

Harman Specialty Group

3 Oak Park

Specifica tions a re subject to cha nge without notice.

Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA

The equipment identified here conforms to the Direc-

tive(s) and Standard(s) specified above.

Type of Equipment: Digital Controller

Model:

Date:

Lexicon RV-8

August 2005

Harman Specialty Group

Vice President of Engineering

3 Oak Park

Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA

Tel: 781-280-0300

Fax: 781-280-0490

A-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix

Menu Tree ..................................................................................B-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B

Lexicon

MENU TREE

MAIN MENU

TRIGGER SETUP

SETUP

REMOTE ONLY

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

ZONE2 INPUTS

ZONE3 INPUTS

FILM

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLIIx +

PLIIx MOV

PLIIx MUS

PLII+

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PL +

OFF

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

MUSIC

2-CHAN

5.1a FILM

5.1a MUSIC

5.1a

SurEX

MUSIC

5.1a STANDARD

5.1a 2-CHANNEL OFF

5.1a BYPASS

2CH BYPASS

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1a OFF

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

OFF

TUNER SETUP

INPUT SETUP

I/O CONFIG

OFF

REGION

USA

LOW

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

ANALOG INPUTS

AMP OUTPUTS

LIVE! LARGE

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

SCROLL RATE MEDIUM

AUTO FREQUENCY

continued on page B-14

continued on page B-13

PRO LOGIC

RDS NAME

CIN

MUSIC

DISPLAY SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HALL

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

2-CH SURROUND OFF

2-CHANNEL

MONO LOGIC

MONO SURROUND OFF

MONO

5.1 FILM

5.1 TV

5.1 MUSIC

SurEX

continued on page B-6

OFF

LOCK OPTIONS

SPEAKER SETUP

continued on page B-13

MODES

AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED

SETUP

UNLOCKED

SETUP CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

OFF

MANUAL

OFF

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP

MAIN POWER ON -30dB

MUTE LEVEL

Z2 PWR ON

Z3 PWR ON

HEADPHONE

MAX VOLUME

LOCKED

UNLOCKED

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

-30dB

+12dB

continued on page B-8

MUSIC

LIVE! CALIBRATION

5.1 PLIIx MOV

5.1 PLIIx MUS

DIGITAL EX

5.1 2-CHANNEL

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

POWER MANAGEMENT

LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB

YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC

TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR

SIT QUIETLY

BROWNOUT PROTECT ON

5.1 MONO LOGIC OFF

CAUTION!

IF SET TO OFF

THIS ACTION WILL

DISABLE INTERNAL

BROWNOUT PROTECTION

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

FILM

OFF

-10dB

-20dB

-30dB

-40dB

FULL MUTE

PRESS ssTO BEGIN

COUNTDOWN

OFF

MUSIC

continued on page B-14

B-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix B

SETUP MENU: INPUTS

Selecting SETUP ꢀ INPUTS prompts the selection of the desired input (for example,

DVD1). Selecting an input opens the corresponding INPUT SETUP menu shown below.

The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical regardless of

which input is selected. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. Default

parameter settings differ from input to input. The INPUT SETUP menus shown below

indicate default parameter settings for each input.

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

TUNER

PHONO

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

SAT INPUT SETUP

NAME

TV INPUT SETUP

NAME

TUNER INPUT SETUP

NAME

DVD1

SAT

NAME

TUNER

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN ANALOG-1

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

OPTICAL-1

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

OPTICAL-2

ANALOG-3

AUTO

S-VIDEO-5

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

NONE

TUNER

AUTO

NONE

MUSIC

AUTO

S-VIDEO-3

FILM

2-CH

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1 TV

FILM

5.1 TV

FILM

5.1 MUSIC

MUSIC

5.1a

MIC

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

5.1a

MIC

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

5.1a

MIC

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

5.1a

MIC

5.1a MUSIC

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

DIGITAL

ANLG

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DVD2 INPUT SETUP

NAME

VCR INPUT SETUP

CD INPUT SETUP

PHONO INPUT SETUP

DVD2

NAME

DIGITAL IN

VCR

NONE

NAME

COAX-3

NONE

AUTO

NON

NONE

MUSIC

NAME

PHONO

NONE

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COAX-2

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-2

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

ANALOG-2

AUTO

S-VIDEO-4

PHONO

AUTO

NONE

COMPONENT IN

NONE

2-CH

FILM

2-CH

FILM

MUSIC

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1 MUSIC

MUSIC

5.1 MUSIC

MUSIC

5.1a

MIC

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

5.1a

MIC

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

5.1a

MIC

5.1a MUSIC

LIVE! MED

5.1a

MIC

5.1a MUSIC

LIVE! MED

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

DIGITAL

ANLG

DIGITAL

ANLG

ZONE2 ADVANCED

B-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B

Lexicon

SETUP MENU: INPUTS (continued)

MAIN MENU

SETUP

INPUT SETUP

DVD1 INPUT SETUP

NAME

Selecting an INPUT SETUP menu item opens the cor-

responding menu shown below. These menus are

identical regardless of which input is selected.

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

DVD1

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

COAX-1

NONE

AUTO

S-VIDEO-1

FILM

DVD1

D MODE

AUTO

OFF

5.1 FILM

FILM

5.1 FILM

5.1 TV

5.1 MUSIC

5.1a

MIC

5.1a FILM

LIVE! MED

DIGITAL

ANALOG

AUTO

MAIN ADVANCED

ZONE2 IN

DIGITAL

ANLG

DMIX

DIGITAL

DIGITAL EX

5.1 2-CHANNEL

5.1 MONO LOGIC

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

ZONE2 ADVANCED

DVD1 MAIN ADV

DIGITAL

OFF

AUTO

INPUT SELECT

ANALOG BYPASS

S-VIDEO 16:9

S-VIDEO OSD 4:3

COMPONENT OSD

LEGACY VIDEO

DVD1 ANALOG IN

DVD1 2-CH MODE

DVD1 VIDEO IN

DVD1 INPUT NAME

HEADPHONE 5.1

USE LAST

ANALOG-1

ANALOG-2

ANALOG-3

ANALOG-4

ANALOG-5

ANALOG-6

ANALOG-7

ANALOG-8

PHONO

COMPOSITE-1

COMPOSITE-2

COMPOSITE-3

COMPOSITE-4

COMPOSITE-5

S-VIDEO-1

S-VIDEO-2

S-VIDEO-3

S-VIDEO-4

S-VIDEO-5

EDIT INPUT NAME

RESTORE DEFAULT NAME

FILM

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLII +

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PL +

DVD1

MODE

FILM

MUSIC

FORMAT DETECT NORMAL

PRESS MENU TO

RESTORE INPUT NAME

NORMAL

FAST

EDIT INPUT NAME

DVD1

PRO LOGIC

OFF

2-CHAN

TUNER

NONE

LIVE!

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HALL

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

2-CH SURROUND

2-CHANNEL

MONO LOGIC

MONO SURROUND

MONO

HEADPHONE

USE LAST

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 8 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

NONE

The appearance of the ANALOG

IN menu depends on the configu-

ration of the analog audio input

connectors. Refer to page 3-8 f or

more information.

DVD1 COMPONENT

DVD1 5.1a MODE

DVD1 ZONE2 ADV

COMPONENT-1

COMPONENT-2

COMPONENT-3

VIDEO

DVD1 DIGITAL IN

5.1a

5.1a STANDARD

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

HEADPHONE 5.1a

USE LAST

FILM

MUSIC

+0dB

OFF

44.1kHz

ENABLED

ANLG IN LVL

DIGITAL BYPASS

DIG OUT RATE

RECORD

COAX-1

COAX-2

COAX-3

COAX-4

OPTICAL-1

OPTICAL-2

OPTICAL-3

OPTICAL-4

NONE

HEADPHONE

USE LAST

BLOCKED

ENABLED

DVD1 ANLG IN LVL

OFF

AUTO

MANUAL

+0.dB

-18 to +12dB

DVD1 MIC MODE

-18 to +12dB

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

USE LAST

44.1kHz

48kHz

88.2kHz

96kHz

AUTO GAIN

+0.0dB

Indicates the current amount of

analog audio input level adjust-

ment for the selected analog

audio input connector. This

parameter cannot be adjusted.

-6

-15

-30

OFF

-45

B-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix B

SETUP MENU: SPEAKERS

MAIN MENU

SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

TUP

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

40 Hz

60 Hz

MANUAL

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

40 Hz

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

OFF

80Hz

N/A

APART

80Hz

SUB

SL RL

80Hz

THX SPEAKER SETUP

THX SETUP

THX REAR SPEAKERS

CUSTOM SETUP

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

SUBWOOFER THX 80Hz

ULTRA2 SUB OFF

BGC

ASA

THX 80Hz

NONE

!CAUTION!

PRESSING THE

BUTTON WILL

FRONT L/R

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

SUBWOOFER

80 Hz

OFF

AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE

THE OUTPUTS TO A THX

SPEAKER

OFF

ULTRA2 SUB OFF

APART

TOGETHER

N/A

APART

CONFIGURATION

APART

TOGETHER

BGC

ASA

N/A

APART

FRONT L/R SPEAKERS

CENTER SPEAKERS

SIDE L/R SPEAKERS

REAR L/R SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

FULL

FULL + SUB

30Hz

FULL + SUB

30Hz

FULL + SUB

30Hz

FULL + SUB

30Hz

40Hz

50Hz

60Hz

70Hz

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

80Hz

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

THX 80Hz

90Hz

100Hz

110Hz

120Hz

NONE

B-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B

Lexicon

SETUP MENU: SPEAKERS (continued)

CHECK MICROPHONES

CHECKING FOR SILENCE

CHECK MICROPHONES

MAIN MENU

SPEAKER SETUP

SETUP

CHECKING MICROPHONES

GROUP MICROPHONES

INTO A BUNDLE IN THE

MIDDLE OF THE ROOM

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

PLEASE WAIT

MANUAL

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

PRESS TO

BEGIN MIC CHECK

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

When an ERROR mes-

sage appears on the last

CHECK MICROPHONES

screen, press the ꢁ or ꢂ

arrow button to highlight

the desired microphone.

Then, press the ꢀarrow

button to view more

details about the error.

One of the messages

shown to the left will

appear in the on-screen

display.

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

CHECK MICROPHONES

(MICROPHONE)

NOT DETECTED

DISTANCES & LEVELS

DISTANCES

OUTPUT LEVELS

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MIC 1

MIC 2

ERROR

(MICROPHONE)

SIGNAL TOO LOW

MANUAL

PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

PRESS TO CONTINUE

PLACE MICROPHONES

AROUND PREFERRED

LISTENING POSITIONS

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

(MICROPHONE)

OUT OF RANGE

(MICROPHONE)

TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE

(MICROPHONE)

When an ERROR message appears on the last CHECK

MICROPHONES screen, pressing the ꢃ arrow but-

ton opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu. When no

ERROR message appears on the last CHECK MICRO-

PHONES screen, pressing the ꢃarrow button opens

the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu.

B-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix B

MAIN MENU

SPEAKER SETUP

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

OMSPE

!CA

HIGH AU

60 Hz

YOU WILL E 10 SEC

TO LEAVE OOM OR

SIT QU TLY

N/A

PRESSAPA BEGIN

COUNTDOWN

SETUP

IOHzLEVELS

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

DISTANCES & LEVELS

DISTANCES

OUTPUT LEVELS

0TI

TEST WILL BEGIN IN

6D0

MANUAL

PRESS TO SKIP

COUNTDOWN

PLACE MICROPHONES

AROUND PREFERRED

LISTENING POSITIONS

IFF

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

MIC CHECK REQUIRED

FOR AUTO CALIBRATION

When the RV-8 is finished calibrating speaker dis-

tances and output levels, the AUTO SPEAKER

SETUP results screen shown at the left will open in

the on-screen display, indicating the results for

each calibration procedure. If there is an error,

press the ꢁ or ꢂ arrow button to highlight the

desired calibration procedure. Then, press the ꢀ

arrow button to select this procedure. Selecting

DISTANCES opens the AUTO DISTANCES screen

shown below. Selecting the LEVELS option opens

the AUTO LEVELS screen shown below.

SETTING DISTANCES

SETTING LEVELS

CUSTOM SETUP

OMSPE

SETUP

OMSP

SETUP

ERROR

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

0.0ft

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

+0.0dB

DISTANCES

LEVELS

DISTANCES

LEVELS

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

AUTO VALUES APPLIED

PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

AUTO VALUES APPLIED

PRESS TO VIEW

DETAILS

SUBWOOFER

LEVELS

DISTANCES

The AUTO DISTANCES and AUTO LEVELS screens

shown on the right indicate the individual calibra-

tion results for each speaker. Press the ꢁ and ꢂ

arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker cali-

bration parameter. Then, press the ꢀ arrow but-

ton to view more detailed results for the selected

speaker.

AUTO LEVELS

AUTO DISTANCES

(SPEAKER)

SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH

(SPEAKER)

SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

ERROR

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

ERROR

0.0ft

+0.0dB

(SPEAKER)

SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW

(SPEAKER)

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SIGNAL TOO LOW

(SPEAKER)

UNABLE TO CALCULATE

SUBWOOFER

Press the ꢃ arrow button to return to the AUTO

SPEAKER SETUP results screen shown above (right).

Then, press the ꢀ arrow button to select the other

calibration procedure or press the ꢃ arrow button

to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.

(SPEAKER)

MAY NOT BE ACCURATE

(SPEAKER)

B-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B

Lexicon

SETUP MENU: SPEAKERS (continued)

MAIN MENU

SPEAKER SETUP

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

OMSPE

!CA

HIGH AU

60 Hz

YOU WILL E 10 SEC

TO LEAVE OOM OR

SIT QU TLY

N/A

PRESSAPA BEGIN

COUNTDOWN

SETUP

IOHzLEVELS

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP

SETUP

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

DISTANCES & LEVELS

DISTANCES

OUTPUT LEVELS

0TI

TEST WILL BEGIN IN

6D0

MANUAL

PRESS TO SKIP

COUNTDOWN

PLACE MICROPHONES

AROUND PREFERRED

LISTENING POSITIONS

IFF

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

MIC CHECK REQUIRED

FOR AUTO CALIBRATION

The AUTO LEVELS screen shown below indicates the

individual calibration results for each speaker. Press the

SETTING DISTANCES

CUSTOM SETUP

SETTING LEVELS

CUSTOM SETUP

The AUTO DISTANCES screen shown below indicates

the individual calibration results for each speaker. Press

the ꢁ and ꢂ arrow buttons to highlight the desired

speaker calibration parameter. Then, press the ꢀ

arrow button to view more detailed results for the

selected speaker.

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

0.0ft

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

+0.0dB

ꢁ

and ꢂ arrow buttons to highlight the desired

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

speaker calibration parameter. Then, press the ꢀ

arrow button to view more detailed results for the

selected speaker.

SUBWOOFER

AUTO LEVELS

AUTO DISTANCES

(SPEAKER)

SET DISTANCES

SET LEVELS

(SPEAKER)

SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH

SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

ERROR

+0.0dB

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

ERROR

0.0ft

AUTO DISTANCES

ORIGINAL DISTANCES

AUTO LEVELS

ORIGINAL LEVELS

(SPEAKER)

SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW

(SPEAKER)

SIGNAL TOO LOW

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

(SPEAKER)

0.0ft

(SPEAKER)

UNABLE TO CALCULATE

0.0dB

0.0ft

0.0dB

0.0ft

0.0dB

SUBWOOFER

SUB (MONO)

(SPEAKER)

MAY NOT BE ACCURATE

0.0dB

SUB

SL RL

0.0ft

SL RL

0.0dB

AUTO LEVELS

AUTO DISTANCES

APPLIED

(SPEAKER)

APPLIED

0.0ft

0.0dB

ORIGINAL LEVELS

APPLIED

ORIGINAL DISTANCES

APPLIED

B-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix B

MAIN MENU

SETUP

LEVELS CALIBRATION

SPEAKER SETUP

MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

SET CROSSOVERS

CHECK MICROPHONES

AUTOMATIC

SPEAKER DISTANCES

LEVELS CALIBRATION

INTERNAL NOISE TEST

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST

BASS PEAK LIMITER

MANUAL

60Hz

SET CROSSOVERS

BEFORE CALIBRATING

60Hz

40Hz

60Hz

SUB

SL RL

60Hz

40Hz

SPEAKER DISTANCES

CUSTOM SETUP

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

0.0ft

FEET

BASS PEAK LIMITER

SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST

INTERNAL NOISE

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

CAL NOISE

LIMITER

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

SUBWOOFER

UNITS

FRONT LEFT

CENTER

+0.0dB

LIMIT ADJ

100dB

FRONT RIGHT

SIDE RIGHT

REAR RIGHT

REAR LEFT

SIDE LEFT

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

SUBWOOFER

0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m

METERS

FEET

-18 to 12dB

75 to 120dB

OFF

B-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B

Lexicon

SETUP MENU: I/ O CONFIG

MAIN MENU

SETUP

REAR PANEL CONFIG

I/O CONFIG

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

8 STEREO INPUTS

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

ANALOG INPUTS

AMP OUTPUTS

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

MAIN 7.1

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

8 STEREO INPUTS

FOR REAR PANEL CFG

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

FOR REAR PANEL CFG

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

FOR REAR PANEL CFG

SETUP MENU: DISPLAYS

MAIN MENU

SETUP

DISPLAY SETUP

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

ALWAYS ON

100%

STATUS

BRIGHTNESS

A/V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME

OFF

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

100%

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

2 SECONDS

STATUS

75%

50%

25%

POSITION

FORMAT

BACKGROUND

TOP

NTSC

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

RV-8

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 20 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

ALWAYS ON

2 SECONDS

ALWAYS OFF

OFF

OFF, 1 to 60ms

TOP

CENTER

BOTTOM

OFF

SECAM

PAL

NTSC

B-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix B

SETUP MENU: TUNER SETUP

MAIN MENU

SETUP

TUNER SETUP

PRESS RIGHT J

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

TO START AUTOLOAD

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

REGION

USA

LOW

SCAN SENS

AUTOLOAD

CLEAR ALL

TUNER PRESETS

DISPLAY

RADIO TEXT

PRESS RIGHT J

TO CLEAR ALL PRESETS

RDS NAME

PAGE 1

PAGE 2

PAGE 3

PAGE 4

SCROLL RATE MEDIUM

AUTO FREQUENCY

FAST

MEDIUM

SLOW

OFF

USA

EUROPE

JAPAN

E. EUR

PRESET NAME

RDS NAME

FREQUENCY

HIGH

MED

LOW

SETUP MENU: LIVE! CALIBRATION

LIVE! CALIBRATION

CALIBRATION DONE

LIVE! CALIBRATION

IN PROGRESS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

MAIN MENU

SETUP

!CAUTION!

HIGH AUDIO LEVELS

INPUTS

SPEAKERS

I/O CONFIG

DISPLAYS

VOLUME CONTROLS

TRIGGER

TUNER SETUP

LOCK OPTIONS

LIVE! CALIBRATION

POWER MANAGEMENT

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

TEST WILL BEGIN IN

PRESS TO SKIP

COUNTDOWN

YOU WILL HAVE 10 SEC

TO LEAVE THE ROOM OR

SIT QUIETLY

PLEASE WAIT

PRESS TO CONTINUE

PRESS TO BEGIN

COUNTDOWN

LIVE! CALIBRATION

SIGNAL TOO LOW

PRESS TO CONTINUE

B-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B

Lexicon

MAIN MENU: TUNER PRESETS

EDIT PRESET 1

MAIN MENU

TUNER PRESETS

FREQUENCY

BAND

0.00

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

PAGE 1

PAGE 2

PAGE 3

PAGE 4

0.00FM

STATION

LOADED

LISTEN TO PRESET

NAME

CLEAR PRESET

PRESS MENU

TO CLEAR PRESET

EDIT STATION NAME

Each tuner preset page allows up

to 10 preset stations.

BUTTONS TO EDIT

UP TO 8 CHARACTERS

BUTTON TO ADVANCE

MAIN MENU: AUDIO CONTROLS

MAIN MENU

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

TREBLE

TILT EQ

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

FADER

+0.0dB

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

+0.0dB

OFF

ZONE2 BALANCE

ZONE3 BALANCE

OFF

-3.0 to +3.0dB

-6.0 to +6.0dB

FADER

L< BALANCE >B

B-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix B

MAIN MENU: MODE ADJUST

MODE ADJUST

FILM

MODE ADJUST

MAIN MENU

CATHEDRAL

PLIIx +

5.1a BYPASS

2CH BYPASS

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1a OFF

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

OFF

FILM

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLIIx +

PLIIx MOV*

PLIIx MUS*

PLII+

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PL +

OFF

AUTO AZIMUTH

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

RE-EQUALIZER

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

MODE ADJUST

AUDIO CONTROLS

TUNER PRESETS

SETUP

CENTER DEPTH

SPEECH DETECT

SIZE

MID RT

BASS RT

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

30m

3.72s

4.47s

23ms

3.1kHz

-8dB

RE-EQUALIZER

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

REAR

OFF

7.0kHz

CIN

PLIIx MOV

OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

LIVE! LARGE

MUSIC

PLIIx MUS

PRO LOGIC

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

PANORAMA

CTR WIDTH

OFF

PANORAMA

EFFECT LVL

BASS CONTENT STEREO

LOW FREQ WIDTH +0

SURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms

INPUT BALANCE

CALIBRATION

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

CIN

AUTO AZIMUTH

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

DIMENSION

SURROUND DLY

NEUTRAL

10ms

MUSIC

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HHALL

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

2-CH SURROUND OFF

2-CHANNEL

MONO LOGIC

MONO SURROUND OFF

MONO

+4dB

NIGHTCLUB

FRONT STEERING

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

FILM

OFF

REAR

OFF

7.0kHz

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

CENTER DEPTH

SPEECH DETECT

SIZE

LIVENESS

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

<l>

PLII +

196ms

5ms

9.0kHz

+3dB

OFF

RE-EQUALIZER

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

OFF

2-CH SURROUND

5.1 FILM

5.1 TV

5.1 MUSIC

PLII MOVIE

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

MUSIC

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

CONCERT HALL

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING MUSIC

SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

MUSIC

CENTER DEPTH

SPEECH DETECT

SIZE

LIVENESS

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

20m

1.72ms

OFF

2.4kHz

-2dB

5.1 PLIIx MOV*

5.1 PLIIx MUS*

DIGITAL EX*

5.1 2-CHANNEL

2-CHANNEL

PLII MUSIC

+0dB

OFF

7.0kHz

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

PANORAMA

CTR WIDTH

OFF

DIMENSION

NEUTRAL

10ms

5.1 MONO LOGIC OFF

SURROUND DLY

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

FILM*

OFF

MONO LOGIC

EFFECT LVL

-9dB

3.1kHz

* These listening mode

names differ depend-

ing on the current

input source, speaker

setup and parameter

settings. Refer to the

Listening Mode

ACADMY FILTER

SURR ROLLOFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

MUSIC*

PL +

MUSIC SURR

MUSIC*

CHURCH

RE-EQUALIZER

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB

FRONT STEERING MSURR

SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF 7.0kHz

REAR DLY OFFSET 15ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

2-CHAN*

5.1a FILM

5.1a MUSIC

5.1a

CENTER DEPTH

SPEECH DETECT

SIZE

MID RT

BASS RT

PRE-DELAY

ROLLOFF

EFFECT LVL

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

20m

1.56s

1.87s

24ms

2.4kHz

-3dB

MONO SURROUND

Descriptions for more

information.

OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

OFF

PRO LOGIC

MUSIC

5.1a STANDARD

5.1a 2-CHANNEL OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

MONO

CUSTOM

+0dB

SUB LVL

CUSTOM

B-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B

Lexicon

MAIN MENU: MODE ADJUST (continued)

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

CENTER MIX +0dB

SURROUND MIX +0dB

CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0

MUSIC

5.1 MONO

LIVE! MED

5.1 FILM

2-CHAN

CENTER MIX

SURROUND MIX

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

MASTER LEVEL

LFE MIX

DECODING

SUB L/R LVL

CUSTOM

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

OFF

+0.0dB

MID RT

BASS RT

1.84s

VOCAL ENHANCE

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

REAR

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

+0dB

2.76s

2.4kHz

3.1kHz

18ms

ROLLOFF

TREB CUT RT

PRE DELAY

ADVANCED

CUSTOM

MASTER LEVEL

LFE MIX

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

+0dB

+0.0dB

+0dB

FILM

OFF

+0.0dB

AUTO

+0dB

VOCAL ENHANCE

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

REAR

7.0kHz

15ms

OFF

5.1 PLIIx MOV

EX DECODING

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

AUTO

OFF

+0.0dB

5.1a BYPASS

OFF

LIVE! MED ADVANCED

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

7.0kHz

15ms

+0.0dB

5.1a FILM

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

REVERB LVL

EARLY RFLX LVL

BASS XOVER

SHAPE

SPREAD

SIZE

-4dB

VOCAL ENHANCE

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

REAR

-14dB

156Hz

25%

30m

5.1 PLIIx MUS

2CH BYPASS

5.1 TV

DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

AUTO

EX DECODING

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

AUTO

OFF

+0.0dB

VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

FILM

OFF

REAR

NO PARAMETERS

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

+0.0dB

HEADPHONES

NO PARAMETERS

MUSIC

LIVE! LARGE

VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

MUSIC

OFF

NEUTRAL

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

OFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

MID RT

BASS RT

4.71s

3.1kHz

2.4kHz

20ms

DIGITAL EX

HEADPHONES 5.1

NO PARAMETERS

7.0kHz

15ms

OFF

EX DECODING

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

AUTO

OFF

+0.0dB

ROLLOFF

TREB CUT RT

PRE DELAY

ADVANCED

CUSTOM

5.1a MUSIC

+0.0dB

HEADPHONES

VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

MUSIC

OFF

NEUTRAL

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

NO PARAMETERS

+0.0dB

AUTO

HEADPHONES 5.1a

NO PARAMETERS

5.1 MUSIC

5.1 2-CHANNEL

CENTER MIX

SURROUND MIX +0dB

CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0

MASTER LEVEL

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

SUB LEVEL

CUSTOM

DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

LIVE! LARGE ADVANCED

VOCAL ENHANCE

FRONT STEERING

RE-EQUALIZER

SOUND STAGE

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS ENHANCE

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

MUSIC

OFF

NEUTRAL

OFF

7.0kHz

15ms

+0dB

REVERB LVL

EARLY RFLX LVL

BASS XOVER

SHAPE

SPREAD

SIZE

-6dB

LIVE! SMALL

-17dB

156Hz

28%

38m

+0.0dB

MID RT

BASS RT

597ms

3.1kHz

10ms

+0dB

OFF

+0.0dB

+0dB

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

RE-EQUALIZER

LFE MIX

DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

AUTO

ROLLOFF

TREB CUT RT

PRE DELAY

ADVANCED

CUSTOM

5.1a

OFF

+0.0dB

OFF

+0.0dB

RE-EQUALIZER

SURROUND EX

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5.1 MONO LOGIC

EFFECT LVL

ACADEMY FI8LTER +ON

SURR ROLLOFF 3.1kHz

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

MUSIC

-9dB

LIVE! SMALL ADVANCED

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

REVERB LVL

EARLY RFLX LVL

BASS XOVER

SHAPE

+0dB

5.1a

MUSIC

-13dB

156Hz

AUTO

OFF

RE-EQUALIZER

SURROUND EX

COMPRESSION

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

+0.0dB

LFE MIX

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

SPREAD

+0.0dB

5.1 MONO SURR

SIZE

19m

LFE MIX

+0.0dB

AUTO

DECODING

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

5.1a STANDARD

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

B-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix B

Selecting the listening mode menu CALIBRATION, OUTPUT LEVELS or CUSTOM option opens the corresponding menu path shown below. The CALIBRATION option is available for

the PANORAMA listening mode. The OUTPUT LEVELS and CUSTOM options are available for most listening modes. These menus are identical regardless of which listening mode is

selected. Listening mode menu parameter drop-down menus are shown below and on the next page.

MONO LOGIC

CUSTOM

PANORAMA CALIBRATION

SOURCE LEFT & RIGHT

MONO LOGIC

OUTPUT LEVELS

PANORAMA

EFFECT LVL

-9dB

CUSTOM VS PRESET

RESET MODE

EFFECT LVL

-9dB

CENTER

SIDE L/R

REAR L/R

SUB

+0dB

EFFECT LVL

+4dB

STEREO

SPEAKER ANGLE

LISTENER POS

30deg

ACADMY FILTER

SURR ROLLOFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

ACADMY FILTER

SURR ROLLOFF

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

BASS CONTENT

LOW FREQ WIDTH

SURR ROLLOFF

REAR DLY OFFSET

INPUT BALANCE

CALIBRATION

OUTPUT LEVELS

CUSTOM

3.1kHz

15ms

NOTE:

ENSURE THAT

“ SPEAKER SETUP” HAS

BEEN PROPERLY

PERFORMED

Selecting a listening mode menu parameter opens the corresponding parameter drop-down menu shown below and on the next page. These drop-down menus are identical

regardless of which listening mode is selected. However, certain parameter ranges differ from listening mode to listening mode.

5 SPKR ENHANCE

BASS CONTENT

CENTER

OFF, -30 to +12dB

CNTR DLY SAMPLES

CUSTOM VS PRESET

DECODING

-127 to +127

OFF

BINAURL

MONO

AUTO

PRESET

CUSTOM

STEREO

OFF

ACADEMY FILTER

BASS ENHANCE

CENTER DEPTH

COMPRESSION

EX DECODING

DIMENSION

OFF

AUTO

OFF

AUTO

OFF

FRONT

NEUTRAL

REAR

0 to 18

AUTO AZIMUTH

BASS RT

CENTER MIX

CTR WIDTH

EFFECT LVL

FRONT STEERING

-12 to +6dB

OFF

5ms to 48.6s

-25 to +5dB

OFF

MSURR

MUSIC

FILM

MIN,1 to 6, MAX

B-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix B

Lexicon

MAIN MENU: MODE ADJUST (continued)

INPUT BALANCE

MASTER LEVEL

-5 to +5dB

REAR DLY OFFSET

OFF, 1 to 30ms

SIZE

SPEECH DETECT

SURROUND DLY

0 to 15ms

4 to 20 or 30ms

OFF

<l>

LFE MIX

MID RT

REAR L/R

OFF, -30 to 12dB

SOUND STAGE

SUB LEVEL

SURROUND EX

OFF, -30 to 12dB

FRONT

NEUTRAL

REAR

AUTO

OFF

-20.0or -10.0 to +0.0dB

24ms to 48.6s

CENTER MIX

PANORAMA

RESET MODE

SOURCE

SUB L/R LVL

OFF, -30 to 12dB

SURROUND MIX

OFF

PRESS RIGHT

TO RESTORE MODE

-127

+127

RIGHT

LEFT & RIGHT

LEFT

+5 to +5dB

LIVENESS

PRE-DELAY

10 to 100ms

ROLLOFF

SPEAKER ANGLE

SURR ROLLOFF

VOCAL ENHANCE

30ms to 20.2s

500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF

+6.0dB

+3.0dB

+0.0dB

10 to 90deg

LOW FREQ WIDTH

-25 to +25

RE-EQUALIZER

SIDE L/R

OFF, -30 to 12dB

OFF

B-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix B

MAIN MENU: RESTORE DEFAULTS

Refer to the Restoring Factory-Default Settings section that begins on page 7-4 for more information.

FACTORY SETTINGS

EXIT

HAVE BEEN RESTORED

PRESS ANY KEY

TO RESTART

RESTORE DEFAULTS

2CH STATUS

D STATUS

INPUT

MODE

CHANNELS

BIT RATE

PG1

D STATUS

PG2

STATUS MENUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

2.0 ENCODING

DIALOG OFFSET

MIX ROOM

CENTER MIX LVL

SURR MIX LVL

SAMPLE RATE

EX ENCODED

LFE

-6

-15

-30

-6

-15

-30

-45

STATUS

DIGITAL STATUS

STATUS

PG1

PG2

2CH BYPASS STATUS

5.1a STATUS

5.1a BYPASS STATUS

INPUT

MODE

INPUT

MODE

INPUT

MODE

WORD LENGTH

SAMPLE RATE

INPUT

MODE

INPUT

MODE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

INPUT TYPE

CHANNELS

BIT RATE

INPUT TYPE

SAMPLE RATE

ANLG

96kHz

INPUT TYPE

ENCODING

LFE

-6

-15

-30

-45

Refer to the Status Menus section that begins on p age 2-29 for more information.

B-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix

Remote Control Programming .................................................. C-2

Three-Digit Preprogrammed Codes ......................................... C-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C

Lexicon

REMOTE CONTROL PROGRAMMING

The RV-8 remote control has been designed to provide a new standard

in remote control technology offering a very powerful and flexible

preprogrammed and learning product.

DEVICE ACTIVATION

In addition to controlling the RV-8, the remote is designed to operate

up to seven components including Satellite Boxes, TV, DVD (LD), VCR,

CD and Phono. Remote control buttons perform different commands

depending on whether the Main Zone, Zone 2, Zone 3 or another

device is activated.

The RV-8 remote control can operate up to 10 home entertainment

and home automation components by using the preprogrammed

code library in the remote control, by teaching up to 530 commands

into the RV-8 rem ote from your original rem ote controls, or a

combination of both. The RV-8 remote has many additional operating

features to add convenience and enjoyment to the operation of any

home entertainment system. You can create your own button labels on

the LCD screen; program 50 favorite channel buttons; operate the

volume, channel and transport buttons from one device when you are

in another device; and perform multiple tasks with the press of a single

button.

However, each of the device buttons and corresponding functions cab

be changed to meet individual requirements.

The Phono function could be used to operate lighting controls; the

second DVD (DVD2) could be changed to operate a second TV, etc.

Each device button on the main screen contains two subpages of

commands and the name of any LCD button can be changed, using

up to five alphabet characters, numbers and symbols to customize the

unit to fit your audio/video devices. Refer to ““E d i t T e xt on F u nct i o n/

Device B u ttons” on page 13 for more information.

The RV-8 remote control features extensive preprogrammed IR codes

for practically all major audio and video equipment. It can set up and

operate various components by simply entering a threedigit code

number assigned to the brand of component. The code numbers for

the various brands of components are listed beg i n n i n g on page C-18.

Refer to the programming instructi o ns on page C-5 f o r add i t i o nal

information.

C-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix C

MACRO OPERATIONS

A “macro” is a series of commands that can be sent out with the push

of a single button. Any function available on an original remote control

or in the preprogrammed database can be added to a macro to

completely automate what would normally be done by pushing

buttons one at a time. A macro can be configured to power on a TV or

projector, RV-8, and RT-10 Disc Player, change to the appropriate

inputs and outputs, dim lights and start a movie. It can be as simple or

as comprehensive as desired. There are two types of buttons that can

be used for macro operations: M1, M2, M3; POWER and SYSTEM OFF

Buttons, as well as the programmable device buttons.

The remote has 10 device buttons which can send out a series of up to

20 programmed commands when pressed for more than one second.

These buttons are commonly used in sending audio input codes when

you press the button to go to a device. The audio receiver would make

an automatic input switch according to the device button pressed.

However, these buttons can be programmed with any desired macro.

Up to 50 favorite channel buttons can be programmed into the RV-8

remote. Each of these buttons can send out up to 10 commands. Refer

to “Programm i n g F a vorite Channels” on page 9 for more information.

The M1, M2 and M3 are called ”system-wide” buttons because they

send out the same signal no matter what device is currently controlled.

The POWER and SYSTEM OFF buttons can be made “system-wide” if

they are programmed with macros.

Note:

The last Device selected will remain active when on the HOME page and will

be shown at the bottom of the LCD screen. For example, if you are using

“TV” and then return to the HOME page, the hard buttons remain in TV

mode. The LCD buttons only change when another device is selected.

Note:

Programming the POWER or SYSTEM OFF buttons with a macro overrides

the preprogrammed or learned code on the button.

The remote can be set up to operate audio component volume control

buttons (UP, DOWN and MUTE) while all the other buttons control

other equipment. The remote can also be set up to operate channel

control and transp ort functions (PLAY, STOP, REWIND, FAST

FORWARD, SKIP-, SKIP+, PAUSE and RECORD buttons) from VCR,

DVD, LD, CD or any other mode while all other buttons in the remote

control are controlling other com ponents. S e e page C-12 f o r more

information.

See page C-10 for further information. Each of these five buttons is

designed to be able to send out a series of up to 20 commands that are

programmed into the buttons. One common use is to turn on and

turn off all A/V components with one button press. Device buttons can

be programmed with any macro sequence desired.

C-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C

Lexicon

REMOTE PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW

The first task is to get all original remote controls together. You may

have one or more components that do not have original remote

co n t ro ls. Th e se ca n st ill b e co n t ro lle d b y t h e RV-8 . Th e

preprogrammed method must be used for those devices. For the rest,

you can program the RV-8 to make it compatible with all components

by following the preprogrammed method instructions, by using the

original remote controls to teach the RV-8, or through both methods.

Next, it is recommended that you decide whether a “device-based,” or

an “activity-based” configuration is desired.

the RV-8 while staying in the DVD device, use the learning method

described on page C-7 to add those functions to the DVD device, such

as surround sound controls, the receiver's

DVD input code, the TV's power code, etc. In that instance, everything

that is needed for watching a DVD on your TV without having to

switch back and forth from device to device is available.

All programming is done by first entering the SETUP mode in the

remote control. Press both the HOME and ENT (enter) buttons,

simultaneously for three seconds to access the SETUP mode shown

below. “SETUP” will be displayed at the top of the LCD screen. Specific

programming instructions begin on the next page.

A “device-based” configuration centers on each device with its two

LCD pages controlling one component. All of the functions that the

original remote control has programmed in it would be put onto one

device. The RV-8 remote comes with the labels and preprogrammed

codes in a “device-based” setup.

When a preprogrammed code is chosen for a component from the

Three-Digit Preprogrammed Codes tables which start on page C-18,

that code will be applied to one device only.

SETUP

P-PRO LEARN

FAV

PUNCH RECAL

ERASE EDIT

LIGHT CLONE

MACRO

An “activity-based” configuration centers on what you are doing at the

time. If you are watching a DVD on your TV, and are using the RV-8 to

control the sound, you may want to start by setting up the DVD device

using the preprogrammed method described in the next column, and

then add functions from the other devices you will be using while

watching your DVD video to the DVD device.

For example, while playing a DVD, to adjust the volume of the RV-8,

use the “Punch T h rough” method descr i b ed on page C-12 to put the

RV-8’s volume control into the DVD device. To adjust other functions of

C-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix C

Note:

USING PREPROGRAMMED CODES

When using the Preprogramming method, always use the appropriate

button as shown in the column when asked ”FROM TABLE.” The

labels of the buttons may have been changed, but the codes are in

the positons as shown to the left. For example, the AUDIO Code table

will always be the top left button. The CD Code table will always be

the fourth button down on the right side of the LCD screen, etc.

To p ro g ram t h e re m o t e t o m ake it co m p at ib le w it h o t h e r

components:

1. Manually power on the device to be operated.

2. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT

buttons simultaneously for three seconds until SETUP appears at

the top of the LCD screen.

Use DVD2, not DVD1, to access the DVD code library. DVD1 has

been preprogrammed to control the Lexicon RT-10 Disc Player.

3. Press the P-PRO button next to the LCD screen.

4. The remote will be flashing “SELECT BUTTON” at the bottom of

the LCD screen. Press the button for the device you wish to

program. For example, to program a TV, press the TV button.

6. The remote will be flashing “ENTER NUMBER.” Refer to the tables

starting on page C-18 and find the manufacturer/brand of your

device. (If programming the remote for the TV device, find the

TV’s device code table, and so on.)

5. The remote will be flashing “FROM TABLE” at the bottom of the

LCD screen. Select the device from which to access the code table.

7. Point the remote control toward the device and enter the first

three-digit code number selected for your device. There is no way

of knowing which code is the one that will have the functions that

more closely match your device than the others, so it is wise to try

them all. See step 9 on the next page. (Enter the code number

within 20 seconds of beginning the programming; otherwise the

remote will revert to the SETUP menu, and then after a period of

time, it will go back to the MAIN device page.) If there is more

than one code number assigned to your brand, try one code

number at a time until the right code number is found (the

number that turns off the device). If the device turns off when the

three-digit code is entered, make note of the code. It will have at

least some of the functions in it that are needed to control the

device.

8. Confirm that it is the right code by pressing the Power button. The

device should turn on. After it is confirmed that the right code is

entered, save the code by pressing the SAVE button on the LCD.

9. At this point try ALL of the buttons on the remote, and see which

ones work with the device. The majority of the buttons should

C-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C

Lexicon

work with the device. Make note of the code if it seems to be the

AUTO SCAN WITH THREE-DIGIT NUMBER

right one, and try the next one. You are trying to find the one that

has the most functions to operate your equipment. If there are any

functions missing, you will learn them from your original remote in

the “Using Learning Method” section on page C-7.

You can also program the remote control by sending out a series of

Power Off commands for different brands stored in the library by using

the following steps. This is similar to the first method, except it is easier

to move through all of the device codes for your device and make note

of each one that turns your device OFF.

10. Continue to program other components by repeating from Step 1

above.

To p ro g ram t h e re m o t e t o m ake it co m p at ib le w it h o t h e r

components:

11. Press EXIT at any time to stop the procedure.

12. When you are finished programming the remote, exit from the

preprogramming mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit

from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

1. Manually turn on the device you plan to operate.

2. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT

buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

Note:

3. Press the P-PRO button next to the LCD screen.

A programmed code for each device can be changed at any time by

using the preprogrammed method which starts on the previous page.

A new code will override an old code. For example, this would be done

if a TV is replaced with a new TV. The code table for Laserdisc is stored

under DVD2. The code table for cable box is stored under Zone 2. The

code table for cassette player is stored under Zone 3.

4. The remote will be flashing “SELECT BUTTON.” Press the device you

wish to program. (For example, to program TV, press the TV button.)

5. The remote will be flashing “FROM TABLE.” Select the device from

which the scanned code will be selected. (Important: If you have

already relabeled your device keys, the LCD screen will not look

like the illustration on p age C-5. S e l e ct the appropr iate LCD

button for the “FROM TABLE” using the labels as shown in the

illustration on page C-4. For example, if you have relabeled

PHONO as LIGHTS, you would still push the bottom right button

to access the AUX Code Table.)

6. Point the remote control toward the component and press either

the UP or DOWN button on the LCD. (It will send out a series of

Power Off codes when the button is kept pressed and the code

numbers that are being sent are shown on the LCD.) If the right

code number is sent, the component will turn off right after the

code number is transmitted.

7. Release the UP or DOWN button as soon as the device is turned

off. If you passed the one that turned off the device, manually turn

the device back on, and reverse your UP or DOWN one press at a

time, until the unit turns off. There is no way of knowing which

C-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix C

code is the one that will have the functions that more closely

match the device than the others, so it is advised to try them all.

See Step 9 below. (Press the UP or DOWN button within 20

seconds of beginning programming; otherwise the remote will

revert to the SETUP menu, and then after a period of time, it will

go back to the MAIN device page.) If there is more than one code

number assigned to your brand, try one code number at a time

until the correct code number is found (the number that turns off

the device). If the device turns off when you enter the three-digit

code, make note of the code. It will have at least some of the

functions in it that are needed to control the device.

Apart from the PAGE, HOME and FAV buttons, which cannot be taught,

the RV-8 remote has the capability of learning up to 530 commands.

Note:

Function buttons are buttons that can be assigned a command to control

a particular action for a device. Commonly used function buttons include

the 2 pages of sub-commands within each of the 10 devices: channel up/

down, volume up/down, menu, guide, exit, info, digits 0-9 and the center

of the joystick (thumbpad).

CAUTION! Do n ot ed it t h e Main , Zon e 2 or Zon e 3 b ut -

t on s. Doin g so w ill rem ove RV-8 con t rol.

8. Confirm that it is the right code by pressing the Power button.

After ensuring that the right code is entered, save the code by

pressing the SAVE button on the LCD.

9. Confirm that the right code number that matches the component

was entered by pressing other functional buttons. If any of the

buttons do not operate as they should, repeat from step 1.

IMPORTANT POINTS TO REMEMBER

If the remote control fails to learn a function after a first attempt:

10. Continue to program other components by repeating from step 1

(previous page).

•

Keep the remotes stable by placing them on a flat surface.

Make sure the original remote is pointed at the learning eye at

the top end of the case and is not at an angle.

11. Press EXIT at any time if you do not wish to proceed.

12. Exit from Preprogrammed mode by pressing the HOME button

and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button

once again.

•

Make sure both remotes’ batteries aren't low.

Avoid programming the RV-8 remote under bright lights,

which can interfere with the infrared signals.

•

Some buttons require a single, short push of the original

remote's button; other “repeating” buttons, such as the VOL

button, require that you “press and hold” the original remote’s

button until “Good” flashes twice on the LCD screen.

USING LEARNING METHOD

The RV-8 rem ote can be program m ed to operate a device by

“teaching” the correct commands to the device buttons on the main

screen menu; to the two sub-pages within each device button; to the

31 buttons and the joystick located in the middle of the remote control.

The RV-8 remote learns these commands by receiving infrared signals

directly from your existing remote controls. The RV-8 remote receives

these signals through its learning eye, located at the top of the unit.

•

Try varying the distance between the remotes to find an optimal

distance at which the codes are learned on the first or second try.

C-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C

Lexicon

example, to erase a punch through from a TV to a SAT device, just

“punch” through the TV to the TV.

PROGRAMMING THE FUNCTION BUTTONS

To program the Function Buttons:

S e e “Programm i n g “Punch T h rough” F u nct i o ns” on page 12 f o r more

information.

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT

buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

PROGRAMMING THE TEN DEVICE BUTTONS

2. Press the LEARN button next to the LCD screen.

3. Select the DEVICE that contains the function button you wish to

program.

This procedure will program ONE learned code onto the Device

button, so that when that Device is selected, it will send out the

learned signal as it changes to that Device's function pages.

4. Press the PAGE button to go to page 2 of the device if necessary.

To program the one learned code onto the Device button:

5. Place the original remote control head to head with the RV-8

remote about 2 inches apart on a flat surface.

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT

buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

6. Press the button on the RV-8 remote you wish to program. Only

the three HOME, PAGE and FAV buttons cannot be programmed.

It is not recommended that you re-program the Main, Zone 2 or

Zone 3 buttons.

2. Press the LEARN button next to the LCD screen.

3. Important: Press the PAGE button.

4. Place the original remote control head-to-head with the RV-8

remote about 2 inches apart on a flat surface.

7. Press the button on the original remote control that you wish to

program onto the RV-8 rem ote. Once the RV-8 rem ote has

received the signal, the RV-8 remote will flash “GOOD” on the

LCD screen, indicating it learned the code correctly. (Perform Step

6 within 20 seconds of step 5; otherwise the remote will revert to

the SETUP menu, and then after a period of time, it will go back to

the MAIN device page.) If it flashes “Fail,” repeat from step 4 until

it learns successfully.

5. Select any of the 10 device buttons to program onto the RV-8

rem ote. Press the button on the original rem ote control to

program into the Device button chosen on the RV-8 remote. Once

the RV-8 remote hasreceived the signal, the RV-8 remote will flash

“GOOD” on the LCD screen, indicating it learned the code

correctly. If it flashes ”FAIL,” repeat from step 4 until it learns

successfully. (Make sure to enter the code signal within 20 seconds

of programming.)

8. Repeat from step 3 until you have programmed all of the buttons

that are required.

6. Return to step 5 until all Device buttons have been programmed.

9. Once you complete the programming and wish to exit the

LEARNING mode, press the HOME button. Exit from the SETUP

mode by pressing the HOME button again.

7. When done programming, press the HOME button to exit the

Learning mode. Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME

button once again.

If you are having problems learning to the Volume, Channel and

Transport buttons, it may be because you have previously assigned a

“Punch Through” from another device to that device. To remove a

Punch Through, just “punch through” the device to itself. For

C-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix C

Note:

6. Repeat from Step 3 until all the desired FAV channel buttons have

been programmed.

Follow these instructions only if you actually want a code sent when

changing devices. It may not be desired to send out codes when changing

to a device. For example, you program the RV-8’s TV input code on the TV

device, and are currently in the DVD device pages. The RV-8’s input is set to

DVD. Now you want to quickly adjust the picture on the TV. If the TV

device button is pushed, it will change the input on the RV-8 to TV and you

will not be able to adjust the picture for the DVD. In this case, it would be

better to not program a code to the TV device.

7. Once programming is completed, press the HOME button to exit

from the Favorite Channel mode. Exit from the SETUP mode by

pressing the HOME button once again.

There are five pages of LCD screens for favorite channel programming.

Scroll to other pages by pressing the PAGE or FAV button. In the

Favorite Channels macro, the following buttons can be used: 0-9,

ENTER, DISPLAY, POWER, SYSTEM OFF and INFO/PAUSE.

Note:

PROGRAMMING FAVORITE CHANNELS

To make even more powerful FAV macros, codes can be learned from

original remote(s) to the 0-9, ENTER, DISPLAY, POWER, SYSTEM OFF and

INFO/PAUSE buttons in any device, and used in your FAV macros. (This will

not work if a preprogrammed device code has been applied to those

buttons.) For example, some TVs require a code be sent after the digits

other than the ENTER code in order to change channels. In this case, you

could learn the proper code to the ENTER button from your original TV

remote, and use that in your FAV macro.

Up to 50Favorite Channel buttons can be programmed and saved.

Each favorite channel button can send up to 10 commands with one

button press.

To program Favorite Channel Buttons:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT

buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the FAV button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the device button that corresponds to the component that

the FAV channel will control. For example, pressing the TV device

will only send the type of code to which that the TV responds to.

Pressing the SAT device will only control the satellite box.

4. Press the LCD button you will be assigning to the favorite channel

and enter the channel number you wish to store in the FAV

channel button. Up to 10 digits can be stored.

5. Press the favorite channel button selected in step 4 again to store

the programmed channel.

Note:

If a wrong channel number is pushed, move the cursor by using the

left or right button of the joystick and then reassign the correct

channel number.

C-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C

Lexicon

PROGRAMMING MACRO BUTTONS

A “macro” is a series of commands that can be sent with the push of a

single button. There are two types of macro functions that can be

programmed: functions involving the M1, M2 and M3 buttons;or

functions involving the POWER and SYSTEM OFF buttons. Each of

these buttons is designed to send up to 20 commands. The 10 device

buttons can also send a macro of up to 20 commands when the device

button is pressed for more than one second while on the HOME page

of the remote control.

7. Repeat from step 3 until you have programmed all of the Macros

that you require.

8. When programming is complete, press the HOME button. Exit

from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

Note:

Do not press the HOME button at the beginning of a macro, or it will not

work. The HOME button can be used at any other step in a macro. The M1,

M2, M3, POWER and SYSTEM OFF macros are system-wide, which means

they will function the same no matter what device is being used when they

are programmed.

Note:

If the POWER or SYSTEM OFF buttons are programmed with a macro, they

will no longer function as ON and OFF buttons for components. To restore

their original on and off function, erase any macros programmed onto them.

PROGRAMMING MACRO FUNCTIONS TO THE TEN

DEVICE BUTTONS

PROGRAMMING MACRO FUNCTIONS TO M1, M2, M3,

POWER AND SYSTEM OFF BUTTONS

To program Macro function to the 10 device buttons:

To program macro functions to the M1, M2, M3, Power, System

Off buttons:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENTER buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the MACRO button next to the LCD screen.

3. Important: Press the PAGE button.

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT button

simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the MACRO button next to the LCD screen.

4. Press one of the 10 device buttons.

3. Press the macro button (M1, M2, M3, Power or System Off)

being programmed.

5. Press the functional buttons you wish to store in the device macro

button you selected in the order you want them stored. Up to 20

commands can be stored.

4. Press the functional buttons you wish to store in the device

m acro b utton you selected , in th e ord er you wan t th em

stored. Up to 20 commands can be stored.

Note:

Do not press the HOME button at the beginning of a macro, or it will

not work. The HOME button can be used at any other step in a macro.

5. Be sure to end a macro on the Device page that you would like it

to remain on when the macro is sent in normal use.

6. Be sure to end your macro on the Device page that you would like

to remain on when the macro is sent in normal use.

6. Store the commands programmed into the macro button by

pressing the CH UP button.

C-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix C

7. Return to step 4 until all desired commands are programmed.

1. Press HOME and ENT simultaneously for three seconds.

8. Save the commands selected to the macro button by pressing the

CH UP button.

2. Press MACRO.

3. Press M1.

9. Once you complete the programming and wish to exit from this

mode, press the HOME button. Exit from the SET UP mode by

pressing the HOME button once again. Tip: Remember that a

single push of a Device Button that has a macro connected to it

will take you to that device's function pages. Hold the Device

Button down for one second in order to send the macro that you

have created for that Device Button.

4. Press MAIN. (Opens the remote control MAIN device page.)

5. Press POWER.

6. Press TV. (Opens the TV device page.)

7. Press POWER.

8. Press HOME.

9. Press SAT. (Opens the SAT device page.)

10. Press POWER.

Note:

Pressing the PAUSE button (bottom right of cursor pad) during the macro

programming will add a time delay of 0.2 seconds between the

commands. For example, pressing the PAUSE button three times will create

a pause of 0.6 seconds between the commands where the delay was

inserted. Pressing PAUSE does not count as a macro step.

11. Press HOME.

12. Press MAIN

13. Press PAUSE three times. Pressing the PAUSE button three

timesallows for an extra .6 seconds of wait time (3 x .2 seconds per

push = .6 seconds). This step is included in this example because

most receivers and amps take time to “cycle up” and cannot

receive any commands, such as input, until the device is ready.

This example enabled the other steps of the macro to run while

the Audio device is “cycling up.”

When using a macro, remember to keep the remote pointed toward

the components until the macro is finished being transmited. A

“Sending” icon will flash in the upper right corner of the LCD screen as

the macro is sending each command. It will not appear when a series

of PAUSE commands are being executed. Wait until the icon finishes

flashing before using other functions or putting down the remote.

14. Press SAT. (This selects the “SAT” input on the RV-8.)

15. Press HOME.

SAMPLE MACRO SEQUENCE

16. Press SAT. (Back to this device to enter the appropriate channel.)

The following is a sample macro which demonstrates what a macro

can accomplish. This example assumes the names of the devices have

not been changed and that the “punch through” technique was used

to assign the VOL to the RV-8. If the labels have been changed, insert

the changed names into the example.

17. Press 1, then 3, then 5. (Then press the ENT button if the cable

device requires it.)

18. Press CH UP to save the macro.

19. Press HOME twice. Press M1 to test the macro. It should turn on

the RV-8, then the TV, then the satellite box, then change the input

to SAT on the RV-8, then change the channel to 135.

In this example, the M1 button will be used to power on the TV, the

RV-8 and the cable box; choose the appropriate inputs; and tune in a

favorite TV channel.

C-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C

Lexicon

Note:

You are punching through the controls of the second device to

the device that is currently being controlled by any other

buttons. For example, for VOL you are “punching through” the

controls of the RV-8 MAIN VOL to the TV or SAT, enabling you

to control the RV-8 MAIN VOL when in the TV or SAT screen.

A macro can end on any page, including the HOME page. In the previous

example, the macro was ended on the SAT page before saving it, as this

was the desired endpoint.

6. Punch Through is saved when the second device is pressed.

7. Repeat from step 2 to program Punch Through for other devices.

PROGRAMMING “PUNCH THROUGH” FUNCTIONS

The RV-8 volume control can be used in a different mode using the

volume “punch through” feature. You can also have channel “punch

through” (Channel Up, Channel Down) as well as eight VCR (or DVD)

transport buttons (Play, Stop, Fast Forward and Rewind, Skip-, Skip+,

Pause, Record) operate in another mode such as SAT, CD and RV-8

MAIN modes.

8. Once you complete the programming and wish to exit fromthis

mode, press the HOME button. Exit from the SETUP mode by

pressing the HOME button once again.

9. Repeat from step 5 to “punch through” any other devices or

learned buttons.

To program “punch through” functions:

10. Press the HOME button to exit to main Punch Through mode.

Press the HOME button once again to exit the SETUP mode.

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

ERASING MACRO FUNCTIONS

2. Press the PUNCH button next to the LCD screen.

To erase M1, M2, M3, Power, System Off buttons:

Note:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT

buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

When using “Punch Through,” think of the first device selected as the

device that now controls the functions, and think of the second device

as the device you want to control those functions. You are taking the

controls of the second device and “punching them through” to the

first device.

2. Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the MACRO button.

4. To erase all of the macro buttons in the RV-8 remote, press the ALL

button and then press the SURE? button at the next LCD screen.

3. Press the VOL button on the LCD for Volume Punch Through, the

PLAY button for Transport Punch Through and the CH button for

Channel Punch Through.

5. To erase just one of the macros, press the KEY button at step 4 and

then one of the M1, M2, M3, POWER or SYSTEM OFF buttons to

erase the macro functions from that button.

4. Select the device you wish to “punch through” to (first device

example - television or satellite receiver).

6. Press the HOME button to exit to main Erase mode.

7. Press the HOME button once again to exit the SETUP mode.

5. Select the device you wish to “punch through” from (second

device example - RV-8 MAIN).

C-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix C

ERASING FAVORITE CHANNEL BUTTONS

ERASING PUNCH THROUGH FUNCTIONS

To erase favorite channel buttons:

To erase “punch through” functions:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT

buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the FAV button.

2. Press the PUNCH button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the VOL button for Volume Punch Through, the PLA button

for Transport Punch Through or the CH button for Channel Punch

Through.

4. To erase all the favorite channel buttons in the RV-8 remote, press

the ALL button and then press the SURE? button at the next LCD

screen.

4. Press the device button from which you wish to erase Punch

Through.

5. To erase one button, press the KEY button. Press the individual

button you want to erase and continue with any other individual

buttons you want to erase.

5. Press the same device button again.

6. Punch through is erased when the same device button is pressed

the second time.

6. Repeat from Step 5 to erase any favorite channel buttons.

7. Press the HOME button to exit to main Erase mode.

8. Press the HOME button once again to exit the SETUP mode.

7. Repeat from step 2 to erase the Punch Through for other devices.

8. Exit from Punch Through mode by pressing the HOME button and

then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button

once again.

ERASE MACRO FUNCTIONS FROM DEVICE BUTTONS

To erase macro function from device buttons:

EDIT TEXT ON FUNCTION/DEVICE BUTTONS

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

To edit text on function or device buttons:

1. Enter the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the MACRO button.

2. Press the EDIT button next to the LCD screen.

4. Press the KEY button.

3. Press the DEVICE button to display the function buttons for that

device.

5. Press one of the 10 DEVICE buttons from which you wish to erase

the macro function. Once the device button has been pushed the

macro has been erased. The LCD will flash “ERASED!”

4. Press the function button on which you wish to write or edit text.

You can also go to the second page of the device by press ing the

PAGE button.

6. Exit from Macro mode by pressing the HOME button and then

exit from SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

C-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C

Lexicon

5. To edit DEVICE button text, skip Steps 3 and 4 and press the PAGE

button before selecting the Device button.

4. The character to be changed on the button you selected will blink

and you can change the character using the number pad buttons

on the remote control. The characters assigned to each number

pad button are shown in the previous column. It will cycle to a

different character each time the same number pad button is

pressed.

6. The character to be changed will blink. To change the character

use the num b er p ad buttons on the rem ote control. The

characters assigned to each number pad button are shown below.

It will cycle to a different character each time the same number

pad button is pressed.

5. Save the edited text by pressing the same function button selected

in step 4.

Note:

6. Exit from Edit mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit

from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

Move the cursor left or right using the joystick. Delete a current

character by using the cursor down on the joystick. Using the “cursor

down” technique is a quick way to delete all of the text on a label.

RECALLING THE PREPROGRAMMED THREE-DIGIT NUMBER

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

1. A B C

2. D E F

3. G H I

7. S T U

4. J K L

5. M N O

9. Y Z (Blank)

6. P Q R

8. V W X

2. Press the RECAL button next to the LCD screen.

0. + - <>, etc

3. The LCD display will alternately flash device names and the three-

digit code number assigned to the device for 10 seconds and then

exit to the SETUP mode.

7. Save the text by pressing the button you were writing on (the same

function button selected in step 3 or device button in step 4).

4. Before the 10 seconds are up, pressing the HOME button on the

remote will stop the flashing and exit to the SETUP mode.

8. Exit from Edit mode by pressing the HOME button and then exit

from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button again.

5. Exit from SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button once again.

ERASING LEARNED BUTTONS

EDIT TEXT FOR FAVORITE CHANNEL BUTTONS

To erase learned buttons:

To edit text for favorite channel buttons:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing both the HOME and ENT

buttons simultaneously for three seconds.

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

2. Press the ERASE button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the LEARN button.

2. Press the EDIT button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press the FAV button and then the favorite channel button on

which you wish to write text. There are five LCD pages of favorite

channels. Select the page you wish to write on by pressing the

PAGE button.

C-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix C

4. If you wish to erase all the learned functions in the RV-8 remote,

press the ALL button and then press the SURE? button at the next

LCD screen.

Note:

The time entered in SETUP for the backlight to go off is extended each

time a button is pushed. The light will turn off at the predetermined

interval after the last button has been pushed.

5. To erase all the buttons in a single device or an individual button in

the device, press the DEVICE button.

CLONING THE RV-8 REMOTE CONTROL

6. Press the device button (TV, VCR, MAIN, etc.) to erase the

button(s) from the device.

To clone the remote from another remote:

Note:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

Press the PAGE button and then press the DEVICE button (TV, VCR,

etc.) to erase the learned function in the device button itself.

2. Press the CLONE button next to the LCD screen.

3. Press either the SEND or RECV button depending upon the role of

the remote control. If the RV-8 remote is to be copied from, press

the SEND button. If it is to be copied to, press the RECV button.

7. Press the ALL button to erase all the learned buttons in the device

and press the SURE? button at the next LCD screen.

8. Press a single button to erase individual buttons one at a time. This

will show all the functions in the device. Press the button you wish

to erase.

4. To clone the entire remote, press the ALL button. To clone only

one device at a time, press the DEVICE button.

5. Press the DEVICE button to show all of the devices. Press the

device button you wish to clone.

PROGRAMMING THE BACKLIGHT TO TURN OFF

6. Set the RV-8 remote head-to-head with another RV-8 remote. Each

unit should be in either cloning from or cloning to mode, based

on the above steps.

The backlight can be toggled On and Off by pushing the LIGHT

button on the top right side of the remote. It can also be set to turn off

at a predetermined time.

7. Press the START button on both units to begin cloning. It will take

about 40 seconds to complete the cloning. The LCD will flash

“GOOD” upon completion.

To program the backlight:

1. Go to the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME and ENT buttons

simultaneously for three seconds.

8. Exit from the Cloning mode by pressing the HOME button and

then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button

again.

2. Press the LIGHT button next to the LCD screen.

3. Using the number pad buttons, enter the desired backlight time

(in seconds). It can go up to 99 seconds. Save the time by pressing

the button to the right of the time just assigned.

4. Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button.

C-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C

Lexicon

ADJUSTING THE LCD CONTRAST

CAUTION!

To adjust the LCD contrast:

Th e LCD scr e e n is b r e a k a b le g la ss. Do n o t t a p t h e LCD

screen t o a ct iva t e d evices. Use t h e ru b b er b u t t on s b esid e

t h e lab els on t h e screen .

Pressing the HOME button and Up on the joystick simultaneously will

make the LCD contrast darker. Pressing the HOME button and Down

on the joystick simultaneously will make the LCD contrast brighter.

Th e RV-8 rem ot e con t rol is n ot w at erp roof. Never im m erse

it in w at er. Keep t h e LCD screen d ry. Im m ed iat ely w ip e off

a n y sp illed liq uid .

BATTERY LIFE

Un d er n orm al op eratin g con d ition s, th e b atteries will last

approximately six months. If the batteries are running low, there will

be reduced range from the remote, commands that are not sent

properly, or are not sent at all. The backlighting of the LCD screen and

the buttons may be diminished. Should any of these occur, replace the

batteries immediately. To ensure proper performance of the remote,

use four new AAA alkaline batteries. However, the worn batteries

should be replaced with a fresh set as soon as possible. Do not mix

new and used batteries.

Do n ot exp ose t h e RV-8 rem ot e t o ext rem e t em p erat ures.

Keep it aw ay from an y h eat sources.

Avoid d rop p in g t h e rem ot e con t rol.

Clean t h e LCD screen w it h a soft clot h . Never use ab rasives

or clea n in g solut ion s on t h e soft clot h .

Note:

RECALLING THE ZONE AUDIO CODES FOR THE RV-8

If the batteries are running low, the LCD displays “LOW BATTERY”

when the POWER button is pressed, or when the HOME and ENT but-

tons are pressed simultaneously.

To recall the RV-8 zone audio codes:

1. Simultaneously press MAIN and ENT buttons to access SETUP mode.

2. Press the RECAL button next to the LCD screen.

The remote has an internal memory lock system that retains all of the

programs and learned functions for an extended period of time in the

event of battery loss or replacement.

3. The LCD display will alternatively flash device names and the

three-digit code number assigned to the device for 10 seconds

and then exit to the SETUP mode. Make sure that the audio code

has the correct (default) number.

4. The MAIN zone default audio code should be 001. The ZONE 2

default audio code is 302, and the ZONE 3 default audio code is

303. If one of these codes has inadvertently been changed,

reprogram the codes as described below.

C-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix C

REPROGRAMMING THE ZONE AUDIO CODES TO DEFAULT CODES

To reprogram the RV-8 zone audio codes:

1. Simultaneously press MAIN and ENT buttons to access SETUP mode.

2. Press the P-PRO button next to the LCD screen.

5. The remote should flash ENTER NUMBER. The correct (default)

audio codes for the RV-8 zones are as follows: MAIN zone is 001,

ZONE 2 is 302 and ZONE 3 is 303.

3. The remote should flash SELECT BUTTON at the bottom of the

LCD screen. Press the button for the zone you wish to reprogram.

6. Enter the correct code.

7. Press SAVE on the right of the LCD screen to enter and save the

audio code for the zone.

4. The remote should flash FROM TABLE at the bottom of the LCD

screen. Select the MAIN zone button.

8. Exit from Preprogrammed mode by pressing the HOME button

and then exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the HOME button

once again.

C-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C

Lexicon

THREE-DIGIT PREPROGRAMMED CODES

AUDIO

Manufact urer

Codes

047 214 180 182

Manufact urer

ADC

Cod es

007

FISHER

ADCOM

082 092 225 161 269

FOSGATE

062 231

AIWA

018 104 170 202 203 213 211 188

GOLDSTAR

HAFLER

HARMAN KARDON

INKEL

JBL

JCPENNY

JEFF ROWLAND

JENSEN

JVC

KENWOOD

056 260

008

174

AKAI

138 189

AMC

125 126 127 128 258 281 282

AMEND

054

231 233 254 153 154 118 121 227 277

197

263

076 216

206

058

240 163 191 114 266 279

026 066 145 146 181 190 197 192 182 199 151 222 180

005 280

220 140

216

150 072

007

AMX

196

ANGSTROM

ARCAM

142

141

AUDIO ACCESS

AUDIO ALCHEMY

AUDIO DESIGN

AUDIO EASE

AUDIO FILE

AUDIO MATRIX

AUDIO SOURCE

AUDIO TECHNICA

B & K

147

135

194 221 011

021 196 207

071

167

KINERGETICS

KOSS

KRELL

KYOCERA

LEXICON

LINN

LUXMAN

LXI

273

134

096 097

120 235 236 237

124

137 139 052 165 115 004 009

076 056

BOSE

070 170 224

BRYSTON

CARVER

023

006 028 061 071 201 214 226 180 185 022 029 077 284

CASIO

076

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

MCINTOSH

MCS

MERIDIAN

MITSUBISHI

MONDIAL

MYRYAD

NAD

038 164 152 208

006 028 031 040 063 185 186 251 265

238

076

100 012 013

242 243 204

157 158 042 043 081 112

276

186 113 283

111 244 245 172 183

176

CHIRO

140

CINEMA SOUND

CITATION

CLARION

CURTIS MATHES

DENON

034 134

148 272

026

076

002 034 109 215 229 230 027 037 234 259

EIGER

149

057

ELAN

ENLIGHTENED AUDIO

099 098

NAKAMICHI

NEC

ONKYO

017 046 064 107 108 187 079 080 090 179 209 270 275

026 041 138

OPTIMUS

C-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix C

AUDIO

DVD

Manufact urer

PANASONIC

PARASOUND

PHAST

Codes

Manufact urer

Codes

032 195 219 177

APEX DIGITAL

DENON 007

087

129 130 132 261

080

196

026 027

084

PHILIPS

249 250 251 063

HARMAN KARDON

JVC

PIONEER

PROCEED

RCA

014 033 039 044 045 050 069 159 168 116 035 078 198

012

144 268

010 048 117 156 067

091 057 074

066

REALISTIC

REVOX

019 056 073 075 095

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

MITSUBISHI

NAD

162

083

ROTEL

074 083 085

017

SAMSUNG

SANSUI

016

088

040 048 110 119 065 228

ONKYO

076 035

021 042

066

SANYO

047 059

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

SCOTT

019 091

SEARS

076

SHARP

026 094 131 175 181

PIONEER

PROCEED

PROSCAN

RCA

023 092 107 108

086

SHERWOOD

SONY

024 038 055 102 103 105 106 051 030

018 093 223 247 248 160 166 015 101 184 218 271

026 027

056 070

094

SOUNDESIGN

SOUNDSTREAM

SSI

036

084 088

SAMSUNG

SHARP

068

SUMO

171

TAEKWANG

TEAC

138

SONY

033

005 019 049 111 212 217

THETA DIGITAL

THOMPSON

TOSHIBA

YAMAHA

ZENITH

032

TECHNICS

THETA DIGITAL

TOSHIBA

WARDS

122 176 193 219 178 177 200 257 262

026 027

035 034

042 089

057 074 091

136

060 087 198 278

180

YAMAHA

ZENITH

026 253 169 067 173 205 264 232 089 264 274 285

143 210

C-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C

Lexicon

SAT

Manufact urer

Codes

Manufact urer

PHILIPS

Cod es

071 152 153

ALPHASTAR

123

023 026

AMPLICA

BIRDVIEW

050

PRESIDENT

PRIMESTAR

PROSAT

019 102

129 113 051 126

110 030

BSR

053

072

CAPETRONICS

CHANNEL MASTER

CHAPARRAL

CITOH

053

PROSCAN

RCA

151 106 150

013 014 015 018 036 055

151 106 150

008 009 012 077

REALISTIC

SAMSUNG

SATELLITE SERVICE

SONY

043 074

054

123

CURTIS MATHES

DRAKE

050

028 035 047 085

005 006 007 010 011 112 116 141 052

103

DX ANTENNA

ECHOSTAR

ELECTROHOME

EUROSAT

024 046 056 076

STARCAST

SUPERGUIDE

TEECOM

041

038 040 057 058 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 122

020 124 125

089

023 026 075 087 088 090 107 130 137

114

TOSHIBA

002 127

023 026

FUJITSU

017 021 022 027 133 134

151 106 150

TOWN & COUNTRY

UNIDEN

GENERAL ELECTRIC

016 025 042 043 044 045 048 049 078 079 080 086 101

GENERAL INSTRUMENT 003 004 016 029 031 059 101 148

135 136

HITACHI

HOME CABLE

HOUSTON TRACKER

HUGHES

HYTEK

139 140

VIEWSTAR

WINEGARD

ZENITH 081

115

080 044 029

128 146

033 037 039 104 057 051

082 083 084 091 120

068 154

053

HYUNDAI

ICR

149

023

JANIEL

060 147

KATHREIN

LEGEND

108

057

LUTRON

LUXOR

132

144 062

MACOM

MEMOREX

NEXTWAVE

NORSAT

PACE

010 059 063 064 065

057

028 124 125

069 070

143

PANASONIC

PANSAT

142 060

121

PERSONAL CABLE

117

C-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix C

VCR

Manufact urer

Codes

Manufact urer

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

MARTA

Cod es

031 034 041 067 068 156 164

AIWA

034 161

012 031 067 069

AKAI

016 043 046 124 125 146

101

AMPRO

072

MATSUI

027 030

031

ANAM

031

MEI

AUDIO DYNAMICS

BROOKSONIC

CANON

012 023 039 043

MEMOREX

MGA

003 010 014 031 034 053 072 101 102 134 139

035 037 129

045 046 059

028 031

MINOLTA

MITSUBISHI

MTC

013 020

CAPEHART

CRAIG

108

013 020 045 046 051 059 061 142 151 049

003 040 135

034 040

CURTIS MATHES

DAEWOO

DAYTRON

DBX

031 041

MULTITECH

NEC

024 034

005 007 010 065 108 110 111 112 116 117 119

012 023 039 043 048

108

NORDMENDE

OPTONICA

ORION

043

012 023 039 043

053 054

DYNATECH

ELECTROHOME

EMERSON’

034 053

025

059

PANASONIC

PENTAX

PHILCO

066 070 083 133 140 145 157 163 074

006 017 025 027 029 031 034 035 036 037 046 101 129

013 020 031 063

131 138 153 162 116

031 034 067

FISHER

003 008 009 010

PHILIPS

031 034 054 067 071 101

FUNAI

034

PILOT

101

031 063 072 107 109 144 147

PIONEER

PORTLAND

PULSAR

013 021 048

GO VIDEO

GOLDSTAR

HARMAN KARDON

HITACHI

INSTANTREPLAY

JCL

132 136 155 040 115

108

012 013 020 101 106 114 123

072

012 045

QUARTZ

QUASAR

RADIO SHACK

RCA

002 014

004 018 026 034 043 063 137 150 160 013

066 145 075

031

123

031

013 020 041 107 109 140 144 145 147 034 040 158

JCPENNY

JENSEN

012 013 015 040 066 101

REALISTIC

RICO

003 008 010 014 031 040 053 054 101

043

058

JVC

012 031 043 048 050 055 060 130 150 152

RUNCO

148

KENWOOD

LLOYD

014 048 034 047

SALORA

SAMSUNG

SANSUI

014

034

032 040 066 102 104 107 109 112 113 115 120 122 125

022 043 048 135

LXI

003 009 017 034 106

040

MAGIN

C-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C

Lexicon

VCR

Manufact urer

Codes

Manufact urer

Cod es

SANYO

SCOTT

003 007 010 014 134 102

017 037 112 129 131

ADMIRAL

AKAL

072 081 161 160

197 146

SEARS

003 008 009 010 013 014 081 101 017 073 112

AMARK

112 143

SHARP

031 054 149 159 165

AMPRO

073 167 157 183

SHINTOM

SIGNATURE

SONY

024

AMSTRAD

ANAM

052

034

043 054 056 080 112 131

003 031 052 056 057 058 076 077 078 149 154

AOC

197 004 112 058

SOUNDESIGN

STS

034

AUDIOVOX

BLAUPUNKT

CAIRN

076

013

088

SYLVANIA

SYMPHONIC

TANDY

031 034 059 067

201

034

CANDLE

CAPEHART

CETRONIC

CITIZEN

197 002 003 004

010 034

058

TATUNG

039 043

043

TEAC

034 039 043

197 002 003 004 043 101 103 143

TECHNICS

TEKNIKA

THOMAS

TMK

031 070

CLASSIC

CONCERTO

CONTEC

CORONADO

CRAIG

043

019 031 034 101

004

034

043 050 051

006

143

TOSHIBA

TOTEVISION

UNITECH

VECTOR RESEARCH

VICTOR

008 013 042 047 059 079 082 112 131 081

043 054

040 101

CROWN

043 143

040

CURTIS MATHES

CXC

197 101 004 143

012

043

048

DAEWOO

DAYTRON

DWIN

004 016 043 044 076 103 114 125 127 143

VIDEO CONCEPTS

VIDEOSONIC

WARDS

012 034 046 141

004 143

040

177

003 013 017 024 031 034 040 053 054 131

012 034 039 043

DYNASTY

DYNATECH

EIKI

043

YAMAHA

ZENITH

062

034 048 056 058 072 080 101

187

ELECTROHOME

EMERSON

024 076 143 196

197 004 005 028 043 047 048 050 051 076 096 143 151

153 154 155

007 057

FISHER

C-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix C

Manufact urer

FUJITSU

Codes

198

Manufact urer

Cod es

NEC

132 130 134 197 040 016 024 056 019

FUNAI

028 043

NIKEI

043

FUTURETECH

043

ONKING

ONWA

043

197 008 009 034 056 073 074 130 144 155 160 161 165

043

004 091 157 183

OPTONICA

ORION

019 081

GOLDSTAR

HALL MARK

HITACHI

INFINITY

JBL

004 102 106 112 113 116 119 127 143

096

004

PANASONIC

PHILCO

034 056 080 092 164

004 009 010 011 012 023 075 143 158 163 166 072

197 003 024 056 059 060 063 064 164 004

164

PHILIPS

197 003 004 005 038 059 093 164 127

164

PIONEER

PORTLAND

PROSCAN

PROTON

QUASAR

RADIO SHACK

RCA

197 018 023 025 116 135 190 203 204

JCPENNY

JENSEN

JVC

197 004 008 009 024 030 065 101 143 156 160

004 143

013

144 160 161 165 167

034 038 070 083 145 199

004 058 131 143 171 173 193

KEC

043

034 056 092

KENWOOD

KLOSS

197 070

019 043 143 004 127

002 059

160 161 165 065 156 144 197 004 023 024 056 074 152

KMC

143

REALISTIC

ROCTEC

RUNCO

007 019 043 047

KTV

197 043 143 154

186

LODGENET

LOGIK

072

168 169 178 179 180 181 182 183 073 157

072

SAMPO

197 058 004 202

LUXMAN

LXI

004

SAMSUNG

SANYO

004 050 089 101 105 127 143 160

166 007 015 052 081 160 164

166 007 020 053 057 082 187

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

MATSUI

MEMOREX

METZ

197 003 004 022 059 060 061 063 064 127 160 164 094

SCOTT

004 028 043 048 143

197 164

SEARS

015 030 004 007 028 057 143 094 160 082 165 166

164

SELECO

189 200

007 072 004

SHARP

170 081 019 028 029 014 004 022 143 175

088

SIEMENS

SIGNATURE

SONY

088

MGA

197 004 024 028 042

072

MINERVA

MITSUBISHI

MTC

088

070 085 139 147 126 185 194

004 024 028 040 042 109 124 146 191

197 004 062 101

SOUNDESIGN

SPECTRICON

SSS

004 028 003 043

112

NAD

015 025

004 043

C-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C

Lexicon

Manufact urer

Codes

Manufact urer

Cod es

SUPRE MACY

SYLVANIA

TANDY

002

ADCOM

062 042

197 003 059 060 063 064 164 044 160 127

AIWA

059 065 088 089 105 122 170 187

081

AKAI

085 195 202

231 232

118

TATUNG

056 062

AMC

TECHNICS

TECHWOOD

TEKNIKA

034 080

AMEND

004

ARCAM

238

002 003 004 024 028 043 072 101 143

AUDIO ACCESS

AUDIO EASE

AUDIO TECHNICA

BSR

119 147

165

TELEFUNKEN

TELERENT

TERA

037 046 086 087

046

072

037 057

103 008

063

172

CALIFORNIA AUDIO

CAPETRONIC

CARRERA

CARVER

TMK

004

TOSHIBA

TOTEVISION

UNIVERSAL

VIDEO CONCEPTS

VIDIKRON

VIDTECH

007 015 030 040 062 101 138

057 080

143

185 041 044 050 086 107 130 134 135 138 139 203 204

008 009

167

146

CASIO

111 182

174 184 188 192

CLARINETTE

CREEK

182

004

159

WARDS

004 008 009 019 028 060 061 063 064 072 074 143 164

CROWN

DENON

035

034

002 123

WESTING HOUSE

YAMAHA

YORK

076

EMERSON

FISHER

042 069 102

197 004

050 185 134 008

004

FRABA

111

YUPITERU

ZENITH

043

GENEXXA

GOLDSTAR

HAITAI

010 069 102

072 073 095 103 157 183

112

080

ZONDA

093

HARMAN KARDON

HITACHI

INKEL

018 033 047 208

042 175

130 143 144

JC PENNEY

JENSEN

014 061 092 141

158

JVC

004 022 136 163 213 214 242 243

C-24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix C

Manufact urer

Codes

Manufact urer

Cod es

KENWOOD

185 007 023 055 071 072 142 137

RADIO SHACK

RCA

182

KOSS

KRELL

061

241

017 042 150

REALISTIC

042 050 051 102 181 182 187

KYOCERA

LOTTE

005

ROTEL

SAE

044 107 161 178 250

044 107

102

LUXMAN

LXI

011 028 070 076

SANSUI

044 069 107 128 171 190 125

059

SANYO

050

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

MCINTOSH

MCS

044 107

SCOTT

069 102

027 041 044 051 077 107 209

SHARP

026 031 051 066

212

SHERWOOD

SIGNATURE

SONY

003 019 051 096 112 115 119 166

014 073 092

033

MEMOREX

MISSION

MITSUBISHI

MITSUMI

MODULAIRE

MONDIAL

MYRYAD

NAD

010

048 081 097 126 133 177 225 226 164

044 107

SOUNDESIGN

SUMO

251

179

155

153

SYLVANIA

SYMPHONIC

TAEKWANG

TANDY

044 107

182

052 181

147

195 085

244

010

006 005 067 178

TEAC

015 034 036 051 052 101 131 140 079

KAKAMICHI

NEC

217 218 219 095

TECHNICS

TECHWOOD

THETA DIGITAL

TOSHIBA

VECTOR RESEARCH

VICTOR

060 103 200 172 184 008 068

014 062

076

NIKKO

046

234 235

NSM

044 107

006 067 091 160 148

ONKYO

030 038 039 168 169

080

OPTIMUS

PANASONIC

PARASOUND

PHILIPS

010 050 057 058 081 082 083 085 093 195

004 022 114 124

185 033

103 201 172 008 068

WARDS

233

YAMAHA

YORX

024 046 054 186 183 245

182

041 044

PIONEER

PROCEED

PROTON

QUASAR

010 020 025 056 174 175 176

239

044 107 228

103 008

C-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C

Lexicon

PHONO

Manufact urer

Codes

Manufact urer

Cod es

152

DENON

206 207

120

AIWA

164

FUNAI

ARCHER

155

KENWOOD

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

MITSUBISHI

NAD

152 013

032 121

211

AUTON

191

DMX

156

DRAPER SCREEN

DWIN

204

121

080

EVERQUEST

EXTRON

206

121

151

OPTIMUS

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

049 013

113

FAROUDJA

FUJI

184

209

032

JERROLD

153

PIONEER

RADIO SHACK

RCA

106 117 121

120

JVC

185

KENWOOD

LITE-TOUCH

LUTRON

185

208

002

077 158 159

REALISTIC

RUNCO

049

MAKITA

186 201

127

MINDPATH

NILES

205

SANYO

075

160 187

SHARP

152 013

053 110

113

NSM

161

SONY

PIANO DISC PLUS

PHILIPS

085

TECHNICS

THETA DIGITAL

TOSHIBA

YAMAHA

090

POLK AUDIO

REPLAY

162

032

075

152 106

043 129

RUSSOUND

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

SIMA

081

156 163

082

SOLO ELECTRONICS

SOMFY

207

Note:

078 079

SONY

104 164 165 166

The LD codes are stored in DVD.

STARCOM

TURBOSCAN

VELODYNE

X-10

153

167

203

093 183

XANTECH

168 169 170 171 172 188 189

C-26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix C

CABLE

Manufact urer

Codes

Manufact urer

Cod es

ABC

103 003 004 039 042 046 053

OAK

031 037 053

AMERICAST

ANTRONIX

ARCHER

099

PANASONIC

PARAGON

PHILIPS

044 047

014

052

005 007 014

099

006 012 013 020 085 095

BELL SOUTH

CENTURION

CENTURY

CITIZEN

PIONEER

PRUCER

103 034 051 063 076 105

092

059

007

RCA

047

007

RECOTON

REGAL

098

COMBANO

COMSAT

080 081

074

049 050

REGENCY

SAMSUNG

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

SIGNAL

057

COMTRONICS

DIGICABLE

EAGLE

030

101

003 011 041 042 043 045 046

020 030 040

057 066

106

030

EASTERN

SIGNATURE

SL MARX

SONY

103

ECHOSTAR

ELECTRICORD

GEMINI

030

032

096

008 054

072

SPRUCER

STARCOM

STARGATE

TADIRAN

TIME WARNER

TOCOM

047 078

GENERAL ELECTRIC

002 004 008 009

008 030 097 104

030

GENERAL INSTRUMENT 103 074 104

GNC

099

GOLDEN CHANNEL

HAMLIN

030

043

049 050 055

039 040 056

052

HITACHI

103 055

TOSHIBA

UNIKA

JERROLD

103 002 003 004 008 009 010 069 074

007 014

MAGNAVOX

MEDIA ONE

MEMOREX

MITSUBISHI

M-NET

010 012 064 079 095 094

UNITED CABLE

UNIVERSAL

VIEWSTAR

ZENITH

004 053

107

005 007 014 032 035

012 015 018 086 087 088 089

052 060 093 100

052

102

037

MOVIE TIME

NOVAPLEX

NSC

028 032

092

015 028 038 071

C-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C

Lexicon

TAPE

Manufact urer

AIWA

Codes

015 071 100 114

CARVER

006 008 027 024 036

DENON

105 227 229

FISHER

064

GOLDSTAR

HARMAN KARDON

JVC

011

233

106 116 239 240

005 013 023 026 064 145 146 181 190

124

KENWOOD

LINN

LUXMAN

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

MCINTOSH

MITSUBISHI

NAD

035 137 139

027

014 027 056 065 087

238

242 243

029 048

NAKAMICHI

ONKYO

244 245 025

002 012 016 017 018 019 115

026 054 055

OPTIMUS

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

007 010 032 088 195

027 087

PIONEER

QUASAR

SANSUI

003 039 047 050 066 098 222

007 088

027 113 119 224

026 057 131 175 181

038 004 028 030 033 034

020 022 052 084 089

009 059 212

SHARP

SHERWOOD

SONY

TEAC

TECHNICS

TOSHIBA

VICTOR

007 010 076 088 109 122 199

112

106

YAMAHA

021 026 031 067 040

C-28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix

Installation Worksheet ................................................................ D-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D

Lexicon

INSTALLATION WORKSHEET

INPUT SETUP

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

TUNER

PHONO

NAME

DIGITAL IN

ANALOG IN

ANLG IN LVL

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT IN

2-CH

5.1a

MIC

MAIN ADVANCED

INPUT SELECT

ANLG BYP

S-VIDEO 16:9

S-VIDEO 4:3 OSD

COMPONENT OSD

LEGACY VIDEO

ZONE2 IN

ZONE2 ADVANCED

ANLG IN LVL

DIGITAL BYPASS

DIG OUT RATE

RECORD

D-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix D

SPEAKER SETUP

CUSTOM SETUP

THX SETUP

SPEAKER DISTANCES

LEVELS CALIBRATION

THX 80Hz

FRONT LEFT/ RIGHT

CENTER

THX 80Hz

SIDE LEFT/ RIGHT

REAR LEFT/ RIGHT

SUBWOOFER

ULTRA2SUB

BGC

THX 80Hz

ASA

UNITS

BASS PEAK LIMITERS

CAL NOISE

SUB LIMITER

LIMIT ADJ

I/ O CONFIG

Analog Inputs

Amplifier Outputs

SETTINGS

5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG

8 STEREO INPUTS

MAIN 7.1

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0

D-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D

Lexicon

INSTALLATION WORKSHEET (continued)

DISPLAY SETUP

TRIGGER SETUP

TUNER SETUP

Circle all parameters set to ON.

REGION

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

STATUS

REMOTE ONLY

DVD1

DVD2

MONO

SCAN SENS

5.1

FILM

MUSIC

POSITION

SAT

FORMAT

LOCK OPTIONS

MODES

VCR

BACKGROUND

FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY

STATUS

MUSIC

TUNER

PHONO

5.1 PLIIx MOV

5.1 PLIIx MUS

DIGITAL EX

AUDIO CNTRL

SETUP

ZONE2 INPUTS

ZONE3 INPUTS

FILM

5.1 2-CHANNEL

5.1 MONO LOGIC

5.1 MONO SURR

5.1 MONO

BRIGHTNESS

A/ V SYNC DELAY

CUSTOM NAME

EDIT CUSTOM NAME

AUDIO CONTROLS

BASS

MUSIC

FILM

MUSIC

MUSIC SURR

PLIIx +

PLIIx MOV

PLIIx MUS

PLII +

PLII MOVIE

PLII MUSIC

PL +

PRO LOGIC

TREBLE

TILT EQ

MUSIC

LOUDNESS

BALANCE

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP

MAIN PWR ON

2-CHAN

5.1a

FILM

MUSIC

SurEX

MUSIC

MUTE LEVEL

FADER

ZONE 2 PWR ON

ZONE 3 PWR ON

HEADPHONE

ZONE2 BALANCE

ZONE3 BALANCE

5.1a STANDARD

5.1a 2-CHANNEL

5.1a BYPASS

CIN

MUSIC

NIGHTCLUB

CONCERT HALL

CHURCH

CATHEDRAL

PANORAMA

2-CH SURROUND

2-CHANNEL

MONO LOGIC

MONO SURROUND

2CH BYPASS

MAX VOLUME

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1

HEADPHONE

HEADPHONE 5.1a

LIVE! SMALL

LIVE! MED

LIVE! LARGE

D-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix D

3-DIGIT PREPROGRAMMED CODES WORKSHEET

COMPONENT

DVD1

MANUFACTURER

CODE(S) USED

DVD2

SAT

VCR

PHONO

D-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix D

Lexicon

PREPROGRAMMED LCD TEXT FOR OTHER DEVICES

DVD1

DVD2

SAT

VCR

PROG

RANDO ANGLE

FAUCH ACTIO

FETCH

HELP

V/T

DISP

VCR-P SLOW+

F. ADV SLOW-

INPUT

SLOW

PROG

COUNT A-TRK

RESET

CLEAR

T-REC DELET

PAGE 2

T-SPE

DISPL SETUP

CLEAR MEMO

REPEA TITLE

RETUR

AUDIO S-CHA

TIME SLOW+

S-ON

ALPHA

VIEW

ALT

REC

SERVI

BACK

HOP

A-CH

ADD

A-B

SHUFF

SOUND SLOW-

PAGE 2

XPLA

EJECT

PAGE 1

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

OFF

ON/OFF

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

OFF

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

OFF

ON/OFF

VOL UP

VOL DN

SKIP+

SKIP-

MUTE

ON/OFF

VOL UP

VOL DN

SKIP+

SKIP-

MUTE

DOWN

LEFT

DOWN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

DOWN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

ꢄ, MENU

ꢅ, GUIDE

O, EXIT

II, INFO

ꢄ

ꢄ, MENU

ꢅ, GUIDE

O, EXIT

II, INFO

GUIDE

EXIT

INFO

ꢄ, MENU

ꢅ, GUIDE

O, EXIT

II, INFO

ꢄ

ꢅ

EJECT

PAUSE

RECORD

PAUSE

DISPLAY

ENTER

DISPLAY

ENTER

DISPLAY

ENTER

DISPLAY

ENTER

DISPLAY

ENTER

DISPLAY

ENTER

D-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Appendix D

PHONO

T/V

SLEEP

CC-SN DELET

RESET ANT

INPUT

A-CH

ADD

P-ON

SWAP

SOURC LOCAT

POSI FREEZ

P-OFF

STILL

PROG

DISPL

CLEAR FADER

REPEA

A-B

INTRO

TIME

DISK 1 DISK 6

DISK 2

DISK 3

DISK 4

DISK 5

EDIT

PAGE 2

PAGE 1

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

OFF

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

OFF

ON/OFF

SYSTEM-OFF

POWER

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE-CH

OFF

ON/OFF

VOL UP

VOL DN

CH UP

CH DN

MUTE

PRE CH

ON/OFF

VOL UP

VOL DN

SKIP+

SKIP-

MUTE

PRE CH

TRACK+

TRACK-

RANDOM

DOWN

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

DOWN

LEFT

DOWN

LEFT

SKIP-

SKIP+

LEFT

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

RIGHT

SELECT

PLAY

STOP

REW

PLAY

STOP

REW

ꢄ

ꢄ, MENU

ꢅ, GUIDE

O, EXIT

II, INFO

GUIDE

EXIT

INFO

ꢄ, MENU

ꢅ, GUIDE

O, EXIT

II, INFO

ꢄ, MENU

ꢅ, GUIDE

O, EXIT

II, INFO

ꢄ

ꢅ

EJECT

PAUSE

RECORD

PAUSE

DISPLAY

ENTER

DISPLAY

ENTER

DISPLAY

ENTER

DISPLAY

DISC

DISPLAY

ENTER

DISPLAY

ENTER

D-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

AUTO, 6-4

AUTO AZIMUTH parameter, 6-4, 6-39

AUTO FREQUENCY parameter, 3-78

AUTO GAIN parameter, 3-9, 3-10

AUTO parameter, 3-9, 3-10

AUTO SPEAKER SETUP screens, 3-48

Autoload, 2-12

AUTOLOAD parameter, 3-74

Automatic Calibration, 3-36

Automatic calibration using microphones, 3-37

5.1a THX UL2Cin listening mode, 6-30

5.1-channel connectors, 2-7

8 STEREO INPUTS option, 3-60

Numerics

2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG option, 3-61

2.0 ENCODING parameter, 2-34

2CH BYPASS listening mode, 6-34

2CH BYPASS STATUS menu, 2-32

2-CH MODE menu, 3-15

2-CH Parameter, D-2

2-CH parameter, 3-12

2CH STATUS menu, 2-30

2-CH SURROUND listening mode, 6-15

2-CHANNEL listening mode, 6-15

5, 6-26

5 SPKR ENHANCE parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 6-

26, 6-29, 6-30, 6-39

5 ST. & 5.1 ANLG option, 3-61

5.1 2-CHANNEL listening mode, 6-23

5.1 ANALOG STATUS menu, 2-33

5.1 L7 FILM listening mode, 6-16

5.1 L7 MUSIC listening mode, 6-17

5.1 L7 TV listening mode, 6-17

5.1 MAIN & ZONE2 2.0 parameter, 3-62

5.1 MONO listening mode, 6-24

5.1 MONO LOGIC listening mode, 6-23

5.1 MONO SURR listening mode, 6-24

5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode, 6-20

5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode, 6-21

5.1a 2-CHANNEL listening mode, 6-33

5.1a BYPASS listening mode, 6-33

5.1a BYPASS STATUS menu, 2-31

5.1a L7 FILM listening mode, 6-29

5.1a L7 MUSIC listening mode, 6-30

5.1a MODE menu, 3-16

A/V SYNC DELAY parameter, 3-63, 3-67, D-4

about the RV-8, 1-2

AC input connector, 2-9

ACADEMY FILTER parameter, 6-15, 6-23, 6-39

adjusting the LCD contrast, C-16

advanced speaker array, 3-35

amplifier channel status, 2-13

amplifier output connectors, 2-13

amplifier outputs, 2-7

BACKGROUND parameter, 3-20, D-4

BALANCE parameter, 4-2, D-4

BASS CONTENT parameter, 6-13, 6-39

BASS ENHANCE parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 6-

26, 6-29, 6-30, 6-39

amplifier overview, 2-13

analog audio input connectors, 2-7

ANALOG BYPASS parameter, 3-18

ANALOG IN parameter, 3-7, 3-8, D-2

anamorphic trigger signals, 3-18

ANLG IN LVL parameter, 3-7, 3-9, 3-23

ANLOG BYPASS parameter, 3-17

arrow buttons, 2-15

ASA parameter, 3-29, 3-35

assigning input connectors, 3-7

audio controls

BASS parameter, 4-2, D-4

frequency response graph, 4-3

BASS PEAK LIMITERS, 3-53

BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu, 3-58, D-3

BASS RT parameter, 6-12, 6-39

BASS XOVER parameter, 6-39

battery installation, 1-6

battery life, C-16

BGC parameter, 3-29, 3-35

BIT RATE parameter, 2-34

BALANCE parameter, 4-6

BASS parameter, 4-2

CLEAR PRESET parameter, 5-3

FADER parameter, 4-6

LISTEN TO PRESET parameter, 5-3

LOUDNESS parameter, 4-4

NAME parameter, 5-3

boundary gain compensation, 3-35

BRIGHTNESS parameter, D-4

CAL NOISE parameter, 3-58, D-3

Calibration

automatic, 3-36

manual, 3-53

CALIBRATION parameter, 6-13, 6-39

5.1a parameter, 3-12

TILT EQ parameter, 4-4

TREBLE parameter, 4-2

5.1a STANDARD listening mode, 6-32

5.1a THX listening mode, 6-30

5.1a THX MUSIC listening mode, 6-32

5.1a THX SurEX listening mode, 6-30

ZONE2 BALANCE parameter, 4-6

AUDIO CONTROLS menu, 4-2, D-4

audio output connectors, 2-8, 2-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Lexicon

CATHEDRAL listening mode, 6-12

CENTER DEPTH parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-40

CENTER MIX LVL parameter, 2-34

CENTER MIX parameter, 6-23, 6-29, 6-33, 6-40

Center output connector, 2-7

CENTER parameter, 3-29, 3-31, 6-37, 6-40

changing input names, 3-5

CHANNELS parameter, 2-34

DISPLAY parameter, 3-76

EDIT INPUT NAME menu, 3-5

editing presets, 2-12

EFFECT LVL parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-13, 6-15, 6-23, 6-

ES DECODING parameter, 6-25, 6-27, 6-28, 6-29, 6-40,

6-42, 6-44, 6-46

ES ENCODING parameter, 2-34

EX DECODING parameter, 6-20, 6-21, 6-22, 6-41

EX ENCODING parameter, 2-34

EXTERNAL NOISE TEST, 3-53, 3-57

DISPLAY SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-63

DISTANCES & LEVELS option, 3-36, 3-48

DISTANCES option, 3-36, 3-48

documentation conventions, 1-ii

DOLBY DIGITAL EX listening mode, 6-22

DOLBY DIGITAL listening mode, 6-22

DOLBY DIGITAL MODE menu, 3-15

Dolby DIGITAL parameter, 3-12

DOLBY PL + THX listening mode, 6-9

DOLBY PLII MOV listening mode, 6-7

DOLBY PLII MOVIE listening mode, 6-7

DOLBY PLII MUSIC listening mode, 6-8

DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode, 6-20

DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode, 6-8

DOLBY PRO LOGIC listening mode, 6-9, 6-9

DOLBY STATUS menu, 2-30

checking microphones, 3-41

CHURCH listening mode, 6-12

CLEAR ALL parameter, 3-75

CNTR DLY SAMPLES parameter, 6-23, 6-29, 6-33, 6-40

COMPONENT IN parameter, 3-7, 3-11

COMPONENT OSD parameter, 3-17, 3-20, 3-21, D-2

component video input connectors, 2-7

Composite video connectors, 2-8

COMPRESSION parameter, 6-16, 6-17, 6-19, 6-20, 6-21,

6-22, 6-23, 6-40

CONCERT HALL listening mode, 6-11

CROSSOVER SETUP menu, 3-26

CTR WIDTH parameter, 6-8, 6-40

CUSTOM menu, 6-37, 6-40

CUSTOM NAME parameter, 3-63, 3-67

CUSTOM parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-9, 6-10,

6-11, 6-12, 6-13, 6-15, 6-16, 6-17, 6-19, 6-20, 6-21,

6-22, 6-23, 6-24, 6-40

factory-default settings, restoring, 7-4

FADER parameter, 4-2, D-4

FORMAT DETECT parameter, 3-21

FORMAT parameter, D-4

FREQUENCY option, 3-76

Front L/R output connector, 2-7, 2-7

FRONT L/R parameter, 3-29, 3-31

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu, 3-66

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY parameter, 3-63

FRONT STEERING parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-17, 6-42

front-panel

DTS 2-CHAN listening mode, 6-29

DTS L7 FILM listening mode, 6-26

DTS listening mode, 6-28

DTS Neo

6 + THX listening mode, 6-10

6 CIN listening mode, 6-10

6 MUSIC listening mode, 6-10

DTS STATUS menu, 2-31

DTS THX MUSIC listening mode, 6-28

DTS THX UL2 Cin listening mode, 6-27

DTS-ES 2-CHAN listening mode, 6-29

DTS-ES DECODING parameter, 6-25

DTS-ES DISCR listening mode, 6-28

DTS-ES L7 FILM listening mode, 6-26

DTS-ES L7 MUSIC listening mode, 6-26

DTS-ES listening mode, 6-28

DTS-ES MODE menu, 3-16

DTS-ES parameter, 3-12

DTS-ES STATUS menu, 2-31

DTS-ES THX listening mode, 6-27

Dynamic listening modes, 3-13, 6-3

BRIGHTNESS parameter, 3-66

display, 2-3

overview, 2-2, 2-4

RV-8, 2-2

STATUS parameter, 3-66

CUSTOM SETUP Menu, 3-29

CUSTOM SETUP menu, 3-26, D-3

custom speaker setups, 3-26

CUSTOM vs PRESET listening modes, 6-37, 6-40

HEADPHONE 5.1 listening mode, 6-34

HEADPHONE 5.1a listening mode, 6-35

HEADPHONE DTS listening mode, 6-35

HEADPHONE L7 listening mode, 6-34

headphone output, 2-5

headphone overview, 2-14

HEADPHONE parameter, 3-69

highlights, RV-8, 1-4

Declaration of Conformity, A-4

DIALOG OFFSET parameter, 2-34

DIG OUT RATE parameter, 3-23, 3-24

digital audio input connectors, 2-8

digital audio output connectors, 2-9

DIGITAL BYPASS parameter, 3-23, 3-24

DIGITAL IN parameter, 3-7

DIGITAL STATUS menu, 2-32

DIMENSION parameter, 6-8, 6-40

direct station access, 2-10

high-pass filter, 3-28, 3-28

horizontal bar graphs, 2-16

EARLY RFLX LVL parameter, 6-41

EDIT CUSTOM NAME parameter, 3-63, 3-67, D-4

I-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Index

preferred, 6-3

selection buttons, 6-3

listening modes, preferred, 3-12, 3-14

LIVE! CALIBRATION

MIC MODE menu, 3-16

MIC parameter, 3-12

MICROPHONE CHECK option, 3-36

microphone input connectors, 2-8

microphones

I/O CONFIG SETUP menu, 3-2

INPUT BALANCE parameter, 6-13, 6-42

input connectors, 2-7

menu, 3-3

parameter, 3-80

performing, 3-83

microphone, 2-8

automatic calibration, 3-42, 3-48

checking, 3-40

connecting, 3-37, 3-80

improper positioning, 3-39, 3-46, 3-47, 3-82

placement, 3-42

INPUT NAME menu, 3-5

INPUT parameter, 2-35

INPUT SELECT parameter, 3-17, 3-19, D-2

input selection buttons, 2-4

remote control, 2-18

INPUT SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-4, D-2

INPUT TYPE parameter, 2-35

INPUTS

LIVE! listening mode, 6-35

LIVE! STATUS menu, 2-33

LIVENESS parameter, 6-11, 6-42

loading presets, 2-11

proper positioning, 3-38, 3-43, 3-44, 3-45, 3-81

MID RT parameter, 6-12, 6-43

MIX ROOM parameter, 2-35

MODE ADJUST menu, 6-2

mode buttons, 2-4

MODE parameter, 2-35

MONO listening mode, 6-16

MONO LOGIC listening mode, 6-15

MONO SURROUND listening mode, 6-16

Mute button, 2-5

LOCK OPTIONS, 3-79

AUDIO CNTRL parameter, 3-79

menu, 3-3

Advanced, 3-17

changing names, 3-5

Main Zone, 2-28, 3-2

MODES parameter, 3-79

SETUP parameter, 3-79

LOUDNESS parameter, 4-2

frequency response graph, 4-5

LOW FREQ WIDTH parameter, 6-13, 6-42

low-pass filter, 3-28, 3-28

installation considerations, 1-5

INTERNAL NOISE TEST, 3-53, 3-56

IR IN connector, 2-9

IR receiver, 2-3

MUTE LEVEL parameter, 3-68

MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0 parameter, 3-62

MAIN 7.1 parameter, 3-62

MAIN ADVANCED option, 3-17

MAIN menu, 2-15

MAIN PWR ON parameter, 3-68

Main Zone Off button, 2-5

Main Zone selection buttons, 2-4

maintenance, 7-4

L7 FILM listening mode, 3-13, 6-4

L7 MUSIC listening mode, 6-5

L7 MUSIC SURR listening mode, 6-5

L7 TV listening mode, 6-4

LEDs, IR receiver, 2-3

NAME parameter, 3-5

naming presets, 2-11

NIGHTCLUB listening mode, 6-11

LEGACY VIDEO parameter, 3-21

level meters, 3-10

Off buttons, 2-5, 2-5

on-screen display

LEVELS CALIBRATION menu, 3-55

LEVELS CALIBRATIONS menu, D-3

LEVELS option, 3-36, 3-48

LFE MIX parameter, 6-16, 6-17, 6-19, 6-20, 6-21, 6-22,

6-23, 6-26, 6-27, 6-28, 6-29, 6-29, 6-30, 6-31, 6-32,

6-33, 6-42

LIMIT ADJ parameter, 3-59

LIMITER parameter, 3-58, 3-59

LISTENER POS parameter, 6-42

listening mode

manual analog audio adjustments, 3-10

manual calibration, 3-53

BACKGROUND parameter, 3-65

FORMAT parameter, 3-65

POSITION parameter, 3-65

STATUS parameter, 3-64

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu, 3-64, D-4

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY parameter, 3-63

output connectors

MANUAL parameter, 3-9, 3-10

manual speaker distance calibration, 3-54

MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu, 3-53

MASTER LEVEL parameter, 6-23, 6-29, 6-33, 6-43

MAX VOLUME parameter, 3-69

menu arrow buttons, 2-15

menu item selection, 2-15

menu navigation, 2-15

audio, 2-8, 2-9

trigger, 2-8

video, 2-7

activating, 6-2

descriptions, 6-4

parameter descriptions, 6-39

menu options, 2-16

Menu tree, B-2

OUTPUT LEVELS menu, 6-37

OUTPUT LEVELS parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-9,

I-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Lexicon

6-10, 6-11, 6-12, 6-13, 6-15, 6-16, 6-17, 6-19, 6-20,

6-21, 6-22, 6-23, 6-26, 6-27, 6-28, 6-29, 6-30, 6-31,

6-32, 6-33, 6-43

Output levels, calibrating

automatic, 3-36

6-26, 6-29, 6-30, 6-43

Rear L/R output connector, 2-7

REAR L/R parameter, 3-29, 3-32, 6-37, 6-44

rear-panel

safety instructions, 1-ii

SAMPLE RATE parameter, 2-35

saving presets, 2-11

overview, 2-6

RV-8, 2-6

Scan Mode, 2-11

Bass Peak Limiters, 3-58

manual, 3-55

SCAN SENS parameter, 3-73

SCROLL RATE parameter, 3-77

selecting a station, 2-10

SET CROSSOVERS option, 3-25

SET DISTANCES menu, 3-51

SET LEVELS menu, 3-51

SETTING DISTANCES menu, 3-49

SETTING LEVELS menu, 3-49

SETUP menu, 2-16, 3-2

SHAPE parameter, 6-44

SIDE L/R parameter, 3-29, 3-32, 6-37, 6-44

SIZE parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-44

SOUND STAGE parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 6-44

SOURCE parameter, 6-46

SPEAKER ANGLE parameter, 6-45

SPEAKER DISTANCES, 3-53

recalling zone audio codes, C-16

RECORD parameter, 3-23, 3-24

RE-EQUALIZER parameter, 6-4, 6-6, 6-9, 6-10, 6-16, 6-

17, 6-19, 6-26, 6-27, 6-29, 6-30, 6-31, 6-43

REGION parameter, 3-72

PANORAMA listening mode, 6-13

PANORAMA parameter, 6-8, 6-43

parameter drop-down menus, 2-16

parameter relationships, 6-47

parameters

remote control

battery installation, 1-6

buttons, 2-17

command matrix, 2-18, 2-18

operation considerations, 2-14

remote control buttons, 2-17

remote control overview, 2-14

remote control programming, C-2

auto scan with three-digit number, C-6

device activation, C-2

listening mode menu, 6-39

STATUS menu, 2-34

parameters, preferred listening mode selection, 3-12

phono input connectors, 2-8

POWER MANAGEMENT menu, 3-3

power switch, 2-9

PRE-DELAY parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-43

preferred listening mode selection, 3-14

Preferred listening modes, 3-12

PRESET NAME option, 3-76

macro operations, C-3

overview, C-4

SPEAKER DISTANCES menu, 3-54

SPEAKER SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-25

speaker setup parameters, 3-29

SPEECH DETECT parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-45

SPREAD parameter, 6-45

programming device buttons, C-8

programming favorite channels, C-9

programming function buttons, C-8

using learning method, C-7

using programmed codes, C-5

REMOTE ONLY parameter, 3-70

reprogramming zone audio codes, C-17

RESET MODE parameter, 6-38, 6-44

RESTORE DEFAULT NAME menu, 3-6

restoring factory-default settings, 7-4

REVERB LVL parameter, 6-40, 6-42, 6-44, 6-44, 6-46

ROLLOFF parameter, 6-11, 6-12, 6-44

routine maintenance, 7-4

product registration, 1-5

program operation parameters, 3-71

programming macro buttons, C-10

cloning the remote control, C-15

editing text on buttons, C-13

erasing favorite channel, C-13

erasing learned buttons, C-14

erasing macro functions, C-12, C-13

erasing punch through functions, C-13

programming backlight, C-15

punch through functions, C-12

recalling preprogrammed numbers, C-14

sample sequence, C-11

Standby button, 2-4

STATUS menu

level meters, 2-35

parameters, 2-34

STATUS menus, 2-29

SUB & SUB LVL parameter, 6-45

SUB L/R LVL parameter, 6-33

SUB LEVEL parameter, 6-15, 6-16, 6-23, 6-24, 6-29

SUB parameter, 6-37

SUBWOOFER parameter, 3-29, 3-33

SURR MIX LVL parameter, 2-35

SURR ROLLOFF parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-13, 6-15, 6-16, 6-

17, 6-23

SURROUND DLY parameter, 6-8, 6-45

SURROUND EX parameter, 6-19, 6-31, 6-45

SURROUND MIX parameter, 6-23, 6-29, 6-33, 6-46

S-VIDEO 16

RS-232 connectors, 2-9

RV-8

about, 1-2

highlights, 1-4

product registration, 1-5

RADIO TEXT parameter, 3-77

RDS NAME option, 3-76

REAR DLY OFFSET parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17,

I-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RV-8

Index

9 parameter, 3-17, 3-18

S-VIDEO OSD 4

3 parameter, 3-17, 3-20

VIDEO IN parameter, 3-11

video input connectors, 2-7

video output connectors, 2-7

VOCAL ENHANCE parameter, 6-4, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 6-26,

6-29, 6-30, 6-46

S-Video output connectors, 2-8

VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, 3-2, 3-68

volume knob, 2-3

three-digit preprogrammed codes, C-18

THX listening mode, 6-18

THX MUSIC listening mode, 6-19

THX SETUP Menu, 3-29

THX SPEAKER SETUP screen, 3-28, 3-28

THX SurEX listening mode, 6-18

THX UL2Cin listening mode, 6-18

THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter, 3-29, 3-34

TILT EQ parameter, 4-2

frequency response graph, 4-5

TREB CUT RT parameter, 6-46

TREBLE parameter, 4-2

frequency response graph, 4-3

trigger output connectors, 2-8

TRIGGER SETUP, 3-70

TRIGGER SETUP menu, 3-2

troubleshooting, 7-2

WORD LENGTH parameter, 2-35

Z2 PWR ON parameter, 3-68

Z3 PWR ON parameter, 3-69

Zone 2 Off button, 2-5

Zone 2 selection buttons, 2-4

Zone 3 Off button, 2-5

Zone 3 selection buttons, 2-4

ZONE2 ADVANCED inputs, 3-23

ZONE2 BALANCE parameter, 4-2, 4-2

ZONE2 IN parameter, 3-21

ZONE2 IN parameter settings, 3-22

Zones, understanding, 2-28

Troubleshooting automatic calibration, 3-52

Tune/Seek access, 2-10

TUNE/SEEK Buttons, 2-5, 2-5

tuner antenna connectors, 2-8

tuner overview, 2-10

TUNER PRESETS menu, 5-2

TUNER PRESETS parameter, 3-75

Tuner Regions, 3-73

TUNER SETUP menu, 3-3

TUNER SETUP option, 3-72

Tuner status, 2-29

Two-line Status, 2-28, 2-29

Ultra2-certified, 3-34

understanding the zones, 2-28

USE LAST parameter, 3-14

I-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PRODUCT REGISTRATION

Please register this product within 15 days of

purchase. To do so, complete and return this card

or register online at www.lexicon.com. Retain the

sales receipt for proof of coverage.

Mr.

Mrs.

Ms.

Miss

Single

Married

Divorced

Widowed

LIMITED WARRANTY

First Name

Last Name

Title

Company

Mailing Address

City

What Expenses will Harman Specialty Group

Assume?

Harman Specialty Group will pay all labor and material

expenses for covered items. Payment of shipping

charges is discussed in the next section of the warranty.

Harman Specialty Group offers the following warranty

on this product:

What Certain Damages are Excluded?

State

Fax Number

Zip

Telephone Number

Email Address

Product Model

Version

Harman Specialty Group’s liability for a defective

product is limited to repair or replacement of that

product, at our option. Harman Specialty Group shall

not be liable for damages based on inconvenience;

loss of use of the product; loss of time; interrupted

operation; commercial loss; or any other damages,

whether incidental, consequential, or otherwise.

Purchase Date

Serial Number

What is the Duration of this Warranty?

This warranty will remain in effect for three (3) years

from the original date of purchase.

Where did you purchase this product?

Age Education

High School

How is Service Obtained?

Household Income

Under $20,000

Under 18

18-24

25-34

35-49

50-64

65+

When this product needs service, write, telephone, or

fax Harman Specialty Group to request information

about where the unit should be taken or sent. When

making a written request, please include your name,

complete address, and daytime telephone number;

the product model and serial numbers; and a descrip-

tion of the problem. Do not return the unit to Harman

Specialty Group without prior authorization.

Who is Covered?

College

Graduate School

Certificate:

$20,000 to $34,999

$35,000 to $49,000

$50,000 to $74,999

$75,000 to $99,000

$100,000+

This warranty may be enforced by the original pur-

chaser and subsequent owners during the warranty

period, provided the original dated sales receipt or

other proof of warranty coverage is presented at time

of service.

How do State Laws Relate to this Warranty?

Some states do not allow limitations on the duration of

implied warranties and/or the exclusion or limitation

of incidental or consequential damages. As such, the

above limitations may not apply.

How did you learn about this product? Choose one:

Friend

Colleague

Teacher

Store salesperson

Store display

Received as a gift

Magazine Article

Own other Lexicon

products

What is Covered?

This warranty is not enforceable outside of North

America. This warranty provides specific legal rights.

Additional rights may be provided by some states.

This warranty covers all defects in material and

workmanship on this product, except as specified

below. The following are not covered:

When Shipping a Product for Service . . .

Which of the following were most important in the selection of this product?

Sound

Features

Quality

Brandname

Value for price

Other:

Durability

1. Pay any initial shipping charges, which are the

responsibility of the owner. If necessary repairs are

covered by this warranty, Harman Specialty

Group will pay return shipping charges to any

destination in the United States using the carrier

of our choice.

1. Damage resulting from

What are your three favorite magazines?

1. 2.

What are your three favorite websites?

1. 2.

A. Accident, misuse, abuse, or neglect.

B. Failure to follow instructions contained in the

user guide.

What features would you like to see added to this product in the future?

C. Repair or attempted repair unauthorized by

Harman Specialty Group.

D. Failure to perform recommended periodic

2. Pack the unit securely. Package insurance is

strongly recommended.

RV-8 01/06

maintenance.

3. Include a copy of the original dated sales receipt.

(A copy of the original dated sales receipt must be

presented whenever warranty service is required.)

4. Do not include accessories such as power cords or

user guides unless instructed to do so.

2. Causes other than product defects, including lack

of skill, competence, or experience on the part of

the owner.

3. Damage occurring during any shipment of this

product. Claims for shipping damages must be

made with the carrier.

4. Damage to a unit that has been altered, or on

which the serial number has been defaced, modi-

fied, or removed.

What are the Limitations of Implied

Warranties?

Any implied warranties, including warranties of mer-

chantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are

limited in duration to the length of this warranty.

Customer Service

Tel 781-280-0300

Fax 781-280-0495 (Sales)

Fax 781-280-0499 (Service)

Harman Specialty Group

3 Oak Park

Bedford, MA 01730-1413

Tel 781-280-0300

Fax 781-280-0490

www.lexicon.com

USA

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A Harman International Company

Part No. 070-15838 | Rev 1 | 01/06

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KTM Motorcycle 640 DUKE II User Manual
Lantronix Printer EPS User Manual
LG Electronics Cell Phone AS740 User Manual
Liebherr Beverage Dispenser EWTNes 2956 User Manual
Lochinvar Gas Heater CLR 125 075 DF9 thru 501 080 DF9 User Manual
Lowrance electronic GPS Receiver AirMap 600c User Manual
Magnavox Clock Radio AJ384017 User Manual
Makita Drill 6302H User Manual
Maytag Washer MFS18 User Manual
McCulloch Lawn Mower MC175H42ST User Manual